02 ETR300-R-600 Manual Control

Release Date: Sep. 2019 / Manual Revision:1.
14
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

USER’S MANUAL
ENTEC ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Copyright © 2017 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved. Forerunner Distribution & Automation
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R http://www.entecene.co.kr
Release Note:
[Dec. 2017] Ver1.00

New user manual for ETR300-R-600
[Apr. 2018] Ver1.01

1. Change “6.2.6. Time”
2. Add “71.2.8. System Power”
3. Change “7.1.6.2. CB Operation Time”
4. Change “7.2.1.7. ETIMS Setup
5. Change “7.2.5. Wifi”
6. Change “11. TIME”
7. Add “18. Wireless Connection”
[May. 2018] Ver1.02

1. Change “7.1.1.1. Power Line”
2. Add “7.1.5.5. Latch Logic”
3. Add “7.1.5.6. Onehot Logic:
4. Change “8.1.1.1. Auto Reclosing Setup”
[Oct. 2018] Ver1.10

1. Add “Multi-Bit Protocol”
2. Add “Z0 Admittance (21YN)” element
[Nov. 2018] Ver1.11

1. Add “DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Function”
2. Add “Negative Sequence Over Voltage(47)” element
[Jan. 2019] Ver1.12

Change “14. INSTALLATION”
[Apr. 2019] Ver1.13

Delete “Over Frequency” menu in “7.1.2.6. Power Quality Monitoring”
[Sep. 2019] Ver1.14

Modify to the latest H/W Drawings.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Summary of Features........................................................................................................... 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 7

2.1. Inputs and Outputs............................................................................................................... 7
2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 9
2.3. Metering Accuracy ............................................................................................................ 11
2.4. Recloser Mode Funtions .................................................................................................... 12
2.5. Sectionalizer Mode Functions ........................................................................................... 22
2.6. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 23
2.7. Loop Control ..................................................................................................................... 29
2.8. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 30
2.9. Communications................................................................................................................ 36
3. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................. 37
4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 38
5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 39
5.1. Communication Port.......................................................................................................... 40
5.2. NTC Connector ................................................................................................................. 42
5.3. Current Input Connector .................................................................................................... 42
5.4. Voltage Input Connector .................................................................................................... 43
5.5. SCADA Connector (Option) ............................................................................................ 43
5.6. Monitor Connector ............................................................................................................ 44
5.7. Status Inputs Connector..................................................................................................... 44
5.8. Trip/Close Connector ........................................................................................................ 45
5.9. Outputs Connector............................................................................................................. 45
5.10. Power Input / Battery Input Connector ........................................................................... 46
5.11. Power Output Connector ................................................................................................. 46
5.12. DC Inputs Connector (Option) ........................................................................................ 46
5.13. External I/O Unit ETIO10 (Option) ................................................................................ 47
6. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 49
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY ii
6.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 50

6.1.1. Operation Section ................................................................................................... 50
6.1.2. Local Control Section............................................................................................. 51
6.1.3. Menu Control Section ............................................................................................ 56
6.1.4. Fault Indication Section ......................................................................................... 58
6.1.5. Voltage Element Section......................................................................................... 58
6.1.6. Reclosing Sequence Status Section ........................................................................ 59
6.1.7. System Diagnostic Section ..................................................................................... 59
6.1.8. Battery Status Section ............................................................................................ 59
6.1.9. User LED Section................................................................................................... 60
6.1.10. SetGroup Status Section ....................................................................................... 61
6.1.11. Other Status Section ............................................................................................. 61
6.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 62
6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree ............................................................................................... 62
6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting ................................................................................................... 65
6.2.3. GROUP Setting ...................................................................................................... 66
6.2.4. Event ...................................................................................................................... 67
6.2.5. Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 67
6.2.6. Time........................................................................................................................ 67
6.2.7. Status ...................................................................................................................... 67
6.2.8. Metering ................................................................................................................. 67
6.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 68
6.3.1. Initial Screen .......................................................................................................... 68
6.3.2. Main Menu ............................................................................................................. 73
6.3.3. Setting Example ..................................................................................................... 73
6.3.4. Setting Save ............................................................................................................ 74
7. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 75

7.1. General Setting .................................................................................................................. 75
7.1.1. System .................................................................................................................... 76
7.1.2. Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 86
7.1.3. Loop Control ........................................................................................................ 106
7.1.4. Passcode ............................................................................................................... 127
7.1.5. PLC ...................................................................................................................... 127
7.1.6. Device .................................................................................................................. 137
7.1.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 147
7.2. Communication ............................................................................................................... 148
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

7.2.1. Protocol Setup ...................................................................................................... 148

7.2.2. Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 184
7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup...................................................... 192
7.2.4. FTP-SSL ............................................................................................................... 197
7.2.5. Wifi (option) ......................................................................................................... 198
7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup ................................................................................................ 199
7.2.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 203
8. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 204

8.1. Recloser ........................................................................................................................... 205
8.1.1. Auto Reclosing (79).............................................................................................. 209
8.1.2. Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51P) ........................................................... 219
8.1.3. Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51G)........................................................ 224
8.1.4. Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51Q(46)) .............................. 228
8.1.5. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P1).............................................................. 232
8.1.6. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G1) .......................................................... 234
8.1.7. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SG) ................................................................................ 236
8.1.8. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q1(46)) ................................. 238
8.1.9. Phase Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50P2) ............................................... 240
8.1.10. Ground Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50G2) .......................................... 242
8.1.11. Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50Q2(46)) ................................. 244
8.1.12. Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................. 246
8.1.13. Cold Load Pickup ............................................................................................... 255
8.1.14. Harmonic Block (2HB and 5HB) ....................................................................... 258
8.1.15. Directional Controls (67) .................................................................................... 260
8.1.16. Broken Conductor .............................................................................................. 268
8.1.17. Voltage (27/59/64N) ........................................................................................... 270
8.1.18. Frequency (81) ................................................................................................... 278
8.1.19. Power (32) .......................................................................................................... 286
8.1.20. Demand (49) ....................................................................................................... 290
8.1.21. Z0 Admittance (21YN) ....................................................................................... 293
8.1.22. Hotline Tag ......................................................................................................... 299
8.1.23. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves.............................................................. 302
8.1.24. Others ................................................................................................................. 337
8.2. Sectionalizer .................................................................................................................... 339
8.2.1. FI Pickup Current ................................................................................................. 339
8.2.2. Inrush Time........................................................................................................... 340
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iv
8.2.3. Auto Setction ........................................................................................................ 341

8.3. Monitoring....................................................................................................................... 356
8.3.1. Phase Difference................................................................................................... 356
8.3.2. Synchro’ Check (25) ............................................................................................. 358
8.3.3. Open Phase ........................................................................................................... 362
8.3.4. Live Line Block.................................................................................................... 363
8.3.5. Fault Locator ........................................................................................................ 364
8.3.6. Load Current Alarm ............................................................................................. 367
8.3.7. Power Factor (55) ................................................................................................. 369
8.4. Save Setting ..................................................................................................................... 370
9. EVENT RECORDER.................................................................................................. 371

9.1. Operation Event............................................................................................................... 371
9.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 373
9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary ................................................................................................... 375
9.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 377
9.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 378
9.6. Load & Energy Event ...................................................................................................... 379
9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event .................................................................................. 379
9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event ................................................................................. 381
9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day ............................................................................................. 382
9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration..................................................................... 384
9.7. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 385
9.8. PQM Event ...................................................................................................................... 386
9.9. Load Current Alarm Event .............................................................................................. 388
9.10. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 389
10. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 390

10.1. Count ............................................................................................................................. 390
10.1.1. ETR300-R Count............................................................................................... 390
10.1.2. Fault Count ......................................................................................................... 391
10.1.3. PQM Count ........................................................................................................ 393
10.1.4. Communication Count ....................................................................................... 397
10.1.5. User Count.......................................................................................................... 399
10.2. Interrupt Time ................................................................................................................ 401
10.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................. 401
10.4. Data Reset ..................................................................................................................... 402
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY v
10.5. Controller Information .................................................................................................. 402

10.6. IP INFORMATION ....................................................................................................... 403
10.7. RECLOSER AI SCALE FACTOR................................................................................ 403
11. TIME........................................................................................................................... 404

12. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 405
12.1. Recloser ......................................................................................................................... 405
12.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 408
12.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 408
12.4. GOOSE Single Input ..................................................................................................... 409
12.5. GOOSE Double Input ................................................................................................... 409
12.6. GOOSE Output.............................................................................................................. 410
12.7. Fault ............................................................................................................................... 410
12.8. Diagonosic ..................................................................................................................... 411
13. METERING ............................................................................................................... 412

13.1. Current ........................................................................................................................... 412
13.2. Voltage ........................................................................................................................... 413
13.3. Frequency ...................................................................................................................... 414
13.4. Power ............................................................................................................................. 415
13.5. Energy ........................................................................................................................... 416
13.6. Demand Current and Power .......................................................................................... 417
13.7. Unbalance ...................................................................................................................... 419
13.8. Harmonics ..................................................................................................................... 420
13.9. True R.M.S .................................................................................................................... 420
13.10. ZERO IMPEDANCE .................................................................................................. 421
13.11. TD Monitoring............................................................................................................. 421
13.12. Controller Reference ................................................................................................... 422
14. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 423

14.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 423
14.2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 424
14.3. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 426
14.4. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 427
14.5. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 428
14.6. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 428
14.7. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................... 429
14.8. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 430
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vi
14.9. VD Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................................... 431

14.10. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 432
14.11. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 433
14.12. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling ............................................................... 434
14.13. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 435
14.14. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 435
14.15. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 435
14.16. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 436
14.17. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 437
14.18. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 437
14.19. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 438
14.20. Hardware Block Diagram............................................................................................ 439
14.21. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 440
14.22. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 442
14.23. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram.................................................................................... 443
14.24. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 444
14.25. CT Protection Circuit .................................................................................................. 444
14.26. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) ................................................................................... 445
14.27. Voltage Transducer ...................................................................................................... 446
14.28. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 447
14.29. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 448
14.30. Recloser Trip and Close Coil ...................................................................................... 448
14.31. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 449
15. MAINTANANCE....................................................................................................... 450

15.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 450
16. PLC function .............................................................................................................. 453

17. Function of File Transfer Protocol ........................................................................... 454
17.1. Patching firmware to upgrade ....................................................................................... 454
17.2. Import/Export CSV files ............................................................................................... 455
17.2.1. Access ETR300-R to import and export CSV files ............................................ 455
17.2.2. Export CSV files ................................................................................................ 455
17.2.3. Import CSV files ................................................................................................ 455
17.3. COMFEDE .................................................................................................................... 456
17.4. COMTRADE ................................................................................................................ 457
17.4.1. File format and Name ......................................................................................... 457
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii

17.4.2. Releated Setting Items ........................................................................................ 457
18. Wireless Connection .................................................................................................. 458

18.1. Connection using WIFI (PC) ......................................................................................... 458
18.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS ................................................................................... 459
18.3. Security.......................................................................................................................... 460
18.3.1. SSL / TLS ........................................................................................................... 460
18.3.2. AES..................................................................................................................... 460
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY viii

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Description
ETR300-R with microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide protective
coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for continuous best quality of electric
service.
Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option) which
fundamentally installed.
ETR300-R provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote. It
also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters.
Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy metering is
also performed.
Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control ETR300-R with key buttons on the user
interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled, Control
Locked, Remote enabled, GROUP settings, Loop control Enabled, Loop control auto restore, Hot
line tag and so on.
Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of settings,
acquisition of event data, and management of operation history.
To provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best quality of electric distribution,
ETR300-R contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3,
McGraw Edison, and KEPCO and so on. Users can select any time of current curve simply by
programming and modifying.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 1
1.2. Summary of Features

PROTECTION ( RECLOSER MODE)
 Automatic Reclosing(Up To 5 Shots)
 Two Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements
 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element
 Two Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements
 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element
 Sensitive Earth Fault Element
 Two Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements
 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element
 Inrush Restraint and Cold Load Pickup
 2nd and 5th Harmonic Block Elements
 Phase Directional Control
 Ground Directional Control
 Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control
 Negative Sequence Directional Control
 Sequence Coordination Control
 Broken Conduct Element
 Two Under Voltage Elements
 Two Over Voltage Elements
 Neutral Over Voltage Elements
 Negative Sequence Over Voltage Elements
 Voltage Auto Restoration
 Two Under Frequency Elements
 Two Over Frequency Elements
 Frequency Decay Element
 Frequency Auto Restoration
 Two Forward Power Elements
 Two Directional Power Elements
 Phase Current, Grount Current, Negative Sequency Current, Active Power and Reactive Power
Demand Elements
 Z0 Admittance Element
 Hotline Tag Element
FAULT INDICATION (SECTIONALIZER MODE)

 Phase Fault Indication
 Ground Fault Indication
 Sensitive Earth Fault Indication
 Negative Sequence Fault Indication
 Inrush Restraint
 Auto Sectionalizer
MONITORING (COMMON)
 Phase Difference
 Synchro’ Check
 Open Phase
 Live Line Block
 Fault Locator (applies to Recloser mode only)
 Load Current Alarm
 Power Factor (Lead and Lag)
 Live Line
 Operation Count
 Conact Wear per Phase
 Battery Automatic Load Test & Battery Management
 Power Quality
- Interrupt
- Sag
- Swell
- Harmonics
- Current Unbalance
- Voltage Unbalance
- Under Voltage
- Over Voltage
- Under Frequency
 Transdurer(TD) Monitor
 Recloser Trip/Close Coil
 Breaker Failure with Current Supervision
 System Power
 Recloser Gas Over/Under Pressure
NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.
EVENT RECORDER
 S/W Operation Recorder - last 30,000 events
 Fault Event Recorder - last 10,000 events
 Fault Waveform(60 cycles× 64 samples) - last 32 events
 System Event Recorder - last 30,000 events
 Setting Change Event Recorder - last 30,000 events
 Load&Energy Recorder
- Average Load & Energy – last 27,500 events (Max 1,145 days)
- Peak Load & Energy in every hour – last 27,500 events
- Peak Load & Energy in every day – last 27,500 events
 Diagnostic Event Recorder - last 30,000 events
 PQM Detection Event Recorder - last 10,000 events
 Load Current Alarm Event Recorder - last 10,000 events
NOTE : According to stting, all events can support COMFEDE format.

According to stting, waveform can support COTRADE format.
MAINTENANCE
 Restart, Diagnostic and Operation counters
 Fault Trip and Fault counters
 PQM counters
 Communication counters
 User counters
 Interrupt Time
 Contact Wear per Phase
METERING
 Each Phase Current and Angle : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef
 Each Phase Pick Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Iq
 Each Phase and Line to Line Voltage and Angle : Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs,
Vst, Vtr
 Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component : I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0
 Source and Load side Frequency, Frequency Change Rate, Slip Frequency and Slip Angle
 Single Phase and Three Phase Power : Active Power(kW), Rective Power(kVar), Apparent
Power(kVA), Power Factor(%)
 Positive and Negative Energy : Active Eenergy(kWh), Reactive Energy(kVarh)

 Present and Positive/Negative Maximum Demand
- Demand Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Iq
- Single Phase and Three Phase Active Power(kW) and Reactive Poer(kVar)
 Source/Load side Voltage and Current Unbalance
 Voltage and Current Harmonics (THD, 2nd ~ 31th order)
 Voltage and Current True R.M.S
 Z0 Impedance, Y0 Admitance
 Tranducers Input (TD1~4, ETD1~4) – Option
 ETR300-R Condition Reference
- Battery Voltage, Charger Voltage and Charger Current
- Battery Capacity
- ETR300-R Internal Temperature
- ETR300-R External Temperature - Option
- Gas Pressure – Option
- System Power : +12V, -12V, Reference Voltage
COMMUNICATIONS
 Side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-
Bit Protocol, ETR300-R Interface Software
 Side panel RS485 Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol
 Side panel Eth1 and Eth2 Ethernet Port or Fiber Optic(Option) Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus,
IEC61850, IEC60870-5-104 and Multi-Bit Protocol Protocol, ETR300-R Interface Software
 Side panel PORT SPI-1,2 (Option) : I/O expendable communication(RJ-45, RS-422
communication method used)
 Front Panel USB-B Type Port: ETR300-R Interface Software
USER INTERFACE
 Fault Indicators
 Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
 Dual Functional Keypads
 20×8 Character LCD Display
 59 LED indicators - Fault indications, Sequence status, Battery status, etc
 Setting Range Help Messages
 Access Security(3 Passwords with Different Authorites)
OTHERS
 Loop Control (applies to Recloser mode only)
 Programmable Logic Control(PLC)
 Time Synchronism Device (IRIG) – Option
 Wifi – Option
 GPS - Option
AUXILIARY INPUTS
 12 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs – Option
 8 Opto-isolated Programmable External Inputs - Option
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS
 8 Dry Contact Programmable Outputs – Option
 8 Dry Contact Programmable External Outputs - Option
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
SYSTEMS
 3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum
FREQUENCY
 50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation
CONTROL VOLTAGE INPUT

 AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (±20%)
 Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
USER AVAILABLE DC POWER OUTPUT - Option

 DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc
 DC Power Continuous : 60W
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Standard

 Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10
 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <6V
 Burden: 0.002VA(4V)
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Option

 Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10
 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V
 Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS (CT)

 Current Inputs Ia, Ib, Ic, In and Isef
 Ia, Ib, Ic, In Input Current Range
 1A Nominal
 2A continuous
 25A 1 second
 Burden : 0.38VA(1A)
 Ise Input Current Range
 0.05A Nominal
 0.30A Continuous
 5A 1 second
 Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
CONTROL INPUTS - Option

 Control Inputs 4 Channel
 Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
 250Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 125Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 48Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 24Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 12Vdc(-10%,+30%)
 Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
CONTROL OUTPUT CONTACTS - Option

 Control Outputs 4 Channel
 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
 Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)
 Maximum operating power
Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts

125Vdc 0.1A
(L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.8A
24Vdc 3A
250Vac 3A
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vac 5A
2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Electromagntic Compatibility Immnuity
 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-2 : 2008
 Level 3 and 6㎸ contact, 8 ㎸ air
 Radiated electromagnetic field immunity : IEC 61000-4-3 : 2010
 10 V/m at 80㎒~1.0㎓ and 1.4㎓~2.7㎓
 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity : IEC 61000-4-4 : 2012
 2 kV at 5 kHz (Communication Ports)
 Surge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-5 : 2017
 4 kV line to line
 4 kV line to earth
 4 kV Comm. ports
 Conducted disturbance immunity : IEC 61000-4-6 : 2013
 10 V at 150 kHz ~ 80 MHz
 Power frequency magnetic field immunity : IEC 61000-4-8 : 2009
 100 A/m (Continuous), 1 000 A/m (3s)
 Voltage dips, interruption and variation immunity : IEC 61000-4-11 : 2004
 Voltage disp immunity test : 0%, 40%, 70%, 80%
 Voltage interruptions immunity test : 0%
 Voltage variations immunity test : 70 % / 30 cycles
 Oscillatory wave immunity : IEC 61000-4-18 : 2006
 Immunity test for 1 MHz burst ; Comm: 2.5 kV, Differential : 1.0 kV
 Immunity test ofr 100 kHz burst; Comm: 2.5 kV, Differential : 1.0 kV
 Emissoin test : CISPR 11 , Class A
Environmental
 Cold : IEC 60068-2-1 :2007
 Test Ad : 16 hours at -40℃
 Dry Heat : IEC 60068-2-2 :2007
 Test Ad : 16 hours at +85℃
 Damp heat Cyclic : IEC 60068-2-30 : 2005
 Severity Level : 25℃ to 55℃, 2cycles,
 Relative Humidity : 95%
 Vibration : IEC 60255-21-1 : 1988
 Shock and bump : IEC 60255-21-2 : 1988
 Seismic : IEC 60255-21-3 : 1993
Safety
 Dielectric Strength : IEC 60255-27 : 2013
 2000 Vac on Control inputs, control outputs, and analog inputs, communication for
1minute
 Impulse : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 0.5 J, 5 kV, 1.2/50 ㎲
Insulation resistance : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 100 ㏁ at 500 V d.c
2.3. Metering Accuracy

The quantity of electricity used in metering and protection is based on fundamental content which
harmonic is removed in input voltage and current parameters.
VOLTAGE METERING
 Rated voltage : AC effective value voltage 4 V
 Phase A, B, C : ±0.5% of reading ( 20 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±0.5˚
 V1, V2, 3V0 : ±0.6 % of reading ( 20 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±1˚
CURRENT METERING
 Rated current(a,b,c,n) : AC 0.6 Arms
 Ia, Ib, Ic, In : ±0.5mA or 0.5 % of reading(0.01~1.5 A), ±0.5˚
 I1, I2, 3I0 : ±1.0 mA or 3 % of reading(0.01~1.5A ), ±1˚
 Rated current(se) : AC 1.5mArms
 Ise : ±0.05 mA or 0.5 % of reading(0.5~300.0 mA), ±1˚
POWER METERING
 Apparent Power : ±1.2 %( Rated Voltage >80 %, Rated Current >0.03)
 Active Power : ±0.7 % PF=1, ±1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
 Reactive Power : ±0.7 % PF=0, ±1% PF<0.5(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
FREQUENCY METERING
 Source/Load Voltage Frequency : ±0.01 Hz
HARMONIC METERING : ±5%
Z0 Impedance
 Z0 Impedance, Y0 Admitance : ±0.7 % (Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
The above measurement accuracy is applied only for ETR300-R controller. The measurement
accuracy of voltage and current including recloser is about ±1 %.
2.4. Recloser Mode Funtions

Auto Reclosing
Function..................................................................... ENABLE/DISABLE
Operations to Lockout – Phase .................................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Ground ............................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - SEF ..................................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq’ ..................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - phase ..... NO/YES
Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - ground... NO/YES
Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - NEQ...... NO/YES
Reclose interval 1 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 0.10 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle............................ 0.10 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset time from lockout ............................................ 0.10 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reclose Wait Time ..................................................... 1.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Overcurrent Protection (+/-)

Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary
according to H/W option.
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves
 ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely
 IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse
 EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
 Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
 Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4
 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)
Time Dial ................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE
Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot
Sensitive Earth Fault Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM
Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.0 in steps of 0.01s
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Inst’ Overcurrent Lockout Protection(+/-)

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A
Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot
Inrush Restraint
Phase/Ground/SEF/Neq Seq’ Function….………..DISABLE/ ENABLE
Fault Pickup Level at Inrush Restraint Duration
 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ……….10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A
 SEF Pickup Level…………………….……….0.1 to 2,000.0A in steps of 0.1A
 Dropout Level…………………………………5%
Restore Minimum Time
 Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function…………..DISABLE/ ENABLE
 Restore Minimum Time……………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Inrush Restraint Reset
 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Rest Current…….…..10 ~ 1600A in steps of 1A
 SEF Rest Current…….………………………..0.1 ~ 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
 Reset Time…………………………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Curves
 Curve Type…………………………………….Total 62 Curves
- ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely
- IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse
- EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
- Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
- Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
- User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4
- McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
- Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)
 Time Dial……………………………………..0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
 Time Adder……………………………………0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Response Time…………………….0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Reset Type…………………………………….INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Outage Time .............................................................. 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Outage Current .......................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Cold Load Pickup

Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES
Multiple of Cold Load….………………………….1.0 to 5.0 xMTC in steps of 0.1 xMTC
Cold Load Interval Time ........................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min
2nd and 5th Harmonic Blocking

Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 5 to 100% in steps of 1%
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Reset Time ................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Minimum Current...................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Phase Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Ground/Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (3V0)
For voltage element polarizing the source
VTs must be connected in Wye
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(V2)
Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Broken Conduct Protection

Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Pickup Level(I2/I1) ................................................... 1 to 100% in steps of 1%
Minimun Normal Current.......................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Maximun Normal Current ......................................... OFF, 10 to 630A in steps of 1A
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
Voltage Protection
Under Voltage 1,2
 Function………………………………………..DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM
 Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………..0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
Under Voltage Auto Restoration
 Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE
 Reset Time……………………………………..1 to 100 min. in steps of 1 min.
 Retoration Source Side………………………...VS/VL/VS&VL
Over Voltage 1,2

Neutral Over Voltage 1,2
NEQ Over Voltage 1,2
Over Voltage Auto Restoration
 Reset Time……………………………………..1 to 100 min. in steps of 1 min.
 Retoration Source Side………………………...VS/VL/VS&VL
 Active Voltage Type……………………………Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when Over Voltage
102 to 105% of Pickup when Under Voltage
5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Frequency Protection
Under Frequency 1,2
 Pickup Level …………………………………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
 Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Minimun Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Over Frequency 1,2

Frequency Decay
 Pickup Level(Hz/sec) ………………………… 0.01 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01㎐/sec
 Minimum Normal Frequency…..……………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
 Active Type………….…………………………INCREASE/DECREASE/ABSOLUTE
Frequency Auto Restoration
Level Accuracy .......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02㎐ when Under Frequency
at CVD Pickup+0.05㎐ when Under Frequency
at VT Pickup - 0.02㎐ when Over Frequency
at CVD Pickup -0.05㎐ when Over Frequency
Power Protection
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM
Fuction Bloke Time After Close ............................... 0.02 to 300.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Forward Power 1,2
 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.00 to 300.00MW in steps of 0.01MW
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
 Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power
Directional Power 1,2
 Active Minimum Powr Level..………………. OFF, -300.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01MW
 Angle………………………………………….0.00 to 359.99° in steps 0.01°
 Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power and Reactive Power
Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
Phase, Ground, Negative Sequence Demand Protection

Pickup Level
 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’………………………10A to 1600A in steps of 1A
 Active Power………………………………….0.01 to 300.00 MW in step of 0.01 MW
 Reactive Power………………………………..0.01 to 300.00 Mvar in step of 0.01 Mvar
Demand Type ............................................................ THERMAL/BLOCK
Thermal Interval Time .............................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min
Block Interval Time .................................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Z0 Admittance Protection
Protection Type.......................................................... G&B/G/B
Minimun S.E.F Current ............................................. 0.1 to 160.0 A in steps of 0.1A
Minimum 3V0 Voltage .............................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Reset Time ................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Right Conductance (G) ............................................. 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Left Conductance (G) ............................................... 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Up Susceptance (B) .................................................. 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Down Susceptance (B) ............................................. 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Hot Line Tag

Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves
 ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely
 IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse
 EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
 Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4
 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)
Time Dial ................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Sequence Coordination Control

Sequence Coordination ............................................. ON/ OFF
Lockout Priority
Lockout Priority ........................................................ PHASE/ GROUND
2.5. Sectionalizer Mode Functions

Fault Indication
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
Sensitive Earth Fault Pickup Level ........................... 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary
according to H/W option.
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Inrush Duration Time

Phase/Ground/S.E.F/Neg Seq’ .................................. 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳
Auto Section
Type Select ................................................................ OFF/AUTO SETCTION/TIE POINT
Auto Sectionalizer Control
 Auto Sectionalizer Operate Count ...…………..1 to 5 Count in steps of 1 Count
 Auto Sectionalizer Operate Time Delay…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
 Auto Sectionalizer Reset Time Delay……….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Tie Point Switch Control
 Tie Point Switch Operate Count ......…………..1 to 5 Count in steps of 1 Count
 Tie Point Switch Close Time Delay…..…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
 Tie Point Switch Open Time Delay.…..…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
 Tie Point Switch Reset Time Delay…...…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
 Dead Line Time Delay at Source Side…...….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
 Dead Line Time Delay at Load Side..…...….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ open/close time delay
2.6. Monitoring
Phase Difference
Dead Voltage Maximum Level.................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Angle Difference...................................... 1° to 100° in steps of 1°
Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.01 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Difference Check Phase ............................................ ALL/A/B/C
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................ 5%
Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°
Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec
Syncro’ Check
Dead Voltage Maximum Level.................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Angle Difference...................................... OFF, 20.0° to 80.0° in steps of 0.1°
Maximum Frequency Difference(Slip Freq.) ............ 0.5 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Syncro’ Check Phase ................................................. A/B/C/AB/BC/CA
Compensation Angle ................................................. 0° to 330° in steps of 30°
Load Side Voltage Compensation Factor .................. 0.50 to 2.00 in steps of 0.01
Recloser Closing Time .............................................. 0.00 to 600.0msec in steps 0.1msec
Closing Wait Time ..................................................... 1 to 600sec in steps 1sec
Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................ 5%
Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°
Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Open Phase
On Level .................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Off Level ................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%
Live Line Block

Live Line Block ......................................................... RECLOSE/CLOSE/BOTH BLOCK
Live Level ................................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Line Check Source ............................................ VS/VL/VS&VL
Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%
Fault Locator
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km
Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Load Current Alarm

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Delay ......................... 0.00 to 600.00s in steps 0.01s
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Power Factor 1,2

Pickup Level for Lag ................................................. OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level for Lead ............................................... OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
Time Delay ................................................................ 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Fuction Block Time After Close................................ 0.05 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Live Line
Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec
Operation Counter
Alarm Count .............................................................. 1 to 20000 in steps of 1
Reset Count ............................................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Recloser Contact Wear

Alarm Pickup Level .................................................. 0.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00s in steps 0.01s
Interruption Current at Point 1(Max. Operation) ...... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA
Number of Operation at Point 1(Max. Operation) .... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1
Interruption Current at Point 2(Min. Operation) ....... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA
Number of Operation at Point 2(Min. Operation) ..... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1
Set Phase A Wear....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
Set Phase B Wear ...................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
Set Phase C Wear ...................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
Battery Automatic Load Test

Test Period ................................................................. OFF, 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour
Battery Management
Charge Time .............................................................. 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.
Discharge Time.......................................................... 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.
Alarm Pickup Level................................................... 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%
Reset Battery Capacity .............................................. 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%
Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)

Interrupt
 Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.10 to 0.49xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Sag
Swell
Harmonics
 Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Voltage Total Harmonics Time Delay………..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
 Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Current Total Harmonics Delay Time…….…..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Current Unbalance
 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
Voltage Unbalance
 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
Under Voltage
 Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Over Voltage
 Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Under Frequency
 Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Over Frequency
 Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
or ± 5%
TD Monitor
TD1 Rate ................................................................... 1 to 200 in steps of 1
TD1 Ratio .................................................................. 1 to 3000 in steps of 1
TD1 Offset................................................................. -10000 to +10000 in steps of 1
TD1-1 Type ............................................................... UNDER/OVER
TD1-1 PU ................................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1
TD1-1 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec
TD1-2 Type ............................................................... UNDER/OVER
TD1-2 PU ................................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1
TD1-2 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Dropout Level ........................................................... 90% of Pickup when Over Type
110% of Pickup when Under Type
※. NOTE : There is 4 more channels(TD2 ~ TD4, ETD1 ~ ETD4) the same as above.
System Power
Function..................................................................... OFF/ON
+12V Pickup .............................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V
-12V Pickup............................................................... OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V
Ref. V Pickup ............................................................ OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
2.7. Loop Control

Loop Control
Type Select ................................................................ NONE/SEC/MID/TIE
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID ....................... VS/VL/VS&VL
Voltage Response Side to TIE ................................... VS/VL/VS&VL
VS Wiring Type ......................................................... 3PN/3PP/1PN(A)/1PN(B)/1PN(C)/1PP(AB)/
1PP(BC)/1PP(CA)
VL Wiring Type......................................................... 3PN/3PP/1PN(A)/1PN(B)/1PN(C)/1PP(AB)/
1PP(BC)/1PP(CA)
Primary Setting Group .............................................. GROUP1/2/3/4/5/6
Alternate Setting Group ............................................ GROUP1/2/3/4/5/6
Change Alternate Setting at MID .............................. OFF/ON
Change Alternate Setting at TIE ................................ OFF/ON
Loop Control Auto Enable after Manual Close ......... DISABLE/ENABLE
Loop Control Auto Enable after Manual Open ......... DISABLE/ENABLE
Open Time on Both Dead Line at TIE ...................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Auto Restoration Time at SEC/MID ......................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Dead Line Level ........................................................ 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Line Level ......................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Dead Line Time Delay .............................................. 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Live Line Time Delay ............................................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Dead Line Reset Time ............................................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Reclosing Block Time after LC Operation ................ 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
2.8. Recorder
OPERATION EVENT RECORDER
 Trigger Source
 Recloser Closed(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control CLOSE)
 Recloser Opened(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control OPEN)
 Storage Capacity : Total 30,000 Events
FAULT EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Fault Pickup
 Fault Timeout Elements
 Data Channels
 Analoge 21 Channels (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef, I1, I2, 3I0, Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Fault
Location, Fault Reactance, Y0real, Y0imag, Y0rms)
 Storage capacity : 10,000 events
FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE

 Trigger Source
 Fault Pickup
 Fault Timeout Elements
 Data Channels
 Current 5 Channels(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef)
 Voltage 6 Channels(Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)
 Admitance 3 Channels (Y0real, Y0imag, Y0rms)
 Digital Input Port Status 36 Channels (IN101~112, IN201~216, IN301~308)
 Digial Output Relay 32 Channels (OUT101~108, OUT201~216, OUT301~308)
 Digital Logic Channels
 Sample Rate : 16/32/64 per cycle
 Trigger Position : 1 to 60cycles(64 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes)
 Storage capacity : 32 events with max 240cycles(Cycle is dependent on Sample Rate)
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Protection Elements
 52A Contact
 Sequence status
 Front panel control
 AC supply
 External control
 Fail operation
 External input status
 System alarm, etc.
 Trigger Time : every 5 msec
 Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
 Storage Capacity : Last 30,000 Events
SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Global Setting Change
 Group Setting Change – Group 1/2/3/4/5/6
LOAD & ENERGY

1) Average Load/ Minute
 Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, G
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф),
Negative Varhour(3ф)
 Trigger Time : every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes
2) Peak Load/ Hour

 Trigger Source
 Trigger Time : every 1 hour
 Storage Capacity : Total 27,500 Events, 1145days
3) Peak Load/ Day

 Trigger Source
 Trigger Time : every 1 day
 Storage Capacity : Total 27,500 Events, 27500 days
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V)
 A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)
 Power Down Mode
 Gas Status
 DSP Fail
 RTC Fail
 Memory Fail
 Flash-Rom Fail
 Circuit Voltage Fail
 Event Fail
 Count Fail
 DO Fail
 Close Fail
 Open Fail, etc.
 Trigger Time : every 5 msec
 Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
PQM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Interrupt Dectect
 Voltage Sag Detect
 Voltage Swell Detect
 Voltage/Current Harnonics Detect
 Voltage/Current Unbalance Detect
 Under/Over Voltage Detect
 Under/Over Frequency Detect
 Trigger type : Pick up
LOAD CURRENT ALARM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Phase A, B, C Load Current Alarm
 S.E.F Load Current Alarm
 Negative Sequence Load Current Alarm
 Trigger type : Pick up
COUNTER
 System Restart Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Diagnostic Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Operation Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Fault Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 PQM Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Communication Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 User Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each counter is applied
differently.
 When the setting is OFF, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value
exceeds 1,000,000
 When the setting is ON, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value
exceeds 65,534
INTERRUPT TIME
 Total, Phase A, B and C Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
 Momentary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
 Temporary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
 Sustained Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each interrupt time is
applied differently.
 When the setting is OFF, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the
interrupt time exceeds 1,000,000 secs
 When the setting is ON, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the
interrupt time exceeds 65,534
RECLOSER CONTACT WEAR

 Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
 Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
 Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
PEAK CURRENT
 Phase A, B, C, G Peak Current and Negative Sequence Peak Current
 Trigger Source
 Load Current Alarm Detect
ENERGY
 Positive Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh
 Positive Rective Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh
 Negative Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh
 Negative Rective Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh
NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Ener’ Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each energy value is
applied differently.
 When the setting is OFF, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy
value exceeds 999,999,999
 When the setting is ON, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy value
exceeds 60,000
DEMAND
 Demand Current – A, B, C, G, Negative Sequence
 Demand Positive Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Positive Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Negative Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Negative Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
2.9. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications
RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data
bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
Side panel RS232-1
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol,
Interface Software
bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
Side panel RS232-2
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol,
Interface Software
Side panel RS485 bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol
RJ-45 or Fiber Optic(Option),10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Side panel EN1, EN2 DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC61850, IEC60870-5-104 and Multi-Bit
Protocol, Interface Software
Side panel SPI-1, SPI-2 RJ-45, RS-422 communication method used
(* Option) I/O expendable communication port
Side panel Wifi SMA-Female Type
(* Option) Interface Software
USB- B Type
Front Panel USB
ETR300-R interface software
3. APPLICATION
ETR300-R has two control types(Recloser type(default) and Sectionalizer type). Control Type
setting is available in the menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE /
CONTROL TYPE”. The control type must be selected according to the installed body. The
Recloser function(fault trip) is active on Recloser type, and when the recloser body, Recloser type
must be selected. But, The Sectionalizer(fault indication) function is active on Sectionalizer type,
and when the swich body or sectionalizer body, Sectionalizer type must be selected. If the selected
control type and the body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.
Depending on the control type, different setting menus are applied. Applied setting menus are
shown below according to the control type.
Recloser Function
Auto Reclosing (79) Broken Conduct (46BC)
Phase Overcurrent (51P/50P) Voltage Protection (27/59/64N)
Ground Overcurrent (51G/50G) Frequency Protection (81U/81O/81D)
Recloser function is active.

Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG) Power Protection (32FP/32P)
Sectionalizer function is not active.
Negative Seq＇ Overcurrent (51Q/50Q) Demand Protection (49)
Inrush Restraint & CLPU HotLine Tag

RECLOSER
(SECMODE= 0) 2nd/5th Harmonic Block Loop Control
Default Setting
Direction (67P/67G/67SG/67Q) Fault Locator
Control Type
SECTIONALIZER
(SECMODE = 1)
Sectionalizer Function
Phase Fault Indication (FI) Negative Seq’ Fault Indication (FI)
Ground Fault Indication (FI) FI Inrush Restraint

Sectionalizer function is active.
Recloser function is not active. Sensitive Earth Fault Indication (FI) Auto Section
: Sub-menu of ＂ MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / RECLOSER＂ menu
: Sub-menu of ＂ MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL＂ menu
: Sub-menu of ＂ MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / MONITORING＂ menu
: Sub-menu of ＂ MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SECTIONALIZER＂ menu
*. NOTE ) The remaining functions are applied in common regardless of the Control Type.
Figure 3-1. Control Type Logic Diagram
ENT
ESC
5
3
1
6
4
2
FUN
C
B
A
SEF
27 UV
59 OV
50 IOC
51 TOC
50 IOCL
VC / VT
VB / VS
VA / VR
81 UF/OF/RF
25 SYNCHRONISM
ETR300-R
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
M10 9 2 1 3 2 1
RS232 1L/ACT
DBG 1SPEED
RX 2L/ACT
TX 2SPEED
FG N P
Figure 4-1. Construction and Dimensions(Standard)

- +
NTC IRIG-B RS485 RS232-2 RS232-1 Eth2 Eth1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 F01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 E01 5 4 3 2 D01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 C01 07 06 05 04 03 02 B01 7 6 5 4 3 2 A01
SEF IN IC IB IA VN VT VS VR VN VC VB VA 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 OUT101 112 111 110 109 108 IN107 106 105 104 103 102 IN101
CT PT OUTPUT INPUT
MONITORS INPUT TRIP/CLOSE OUTPUT POWER OUT POWER IN
IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 OUT205 OUT206 OUT207
4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION
PW
COM
DC +
DC -
TRIP
OUT IN GND P N P N BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-

CLOSE
L01 2 3 K01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J01 2 3 4 5 I01 2 3 4 5 6 H01 2 3 4 G01 2 3 4

http://www.entecene.co.kr
38
5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION

ETR300-R Side panel construction is as follows.
M10 9 2 1 3 2 1
RS232 1L/ACT
DBG 1SPEED
RX 2L/ACT
TX 2SPEED
- + FG N P
NTC WIFI IRIG-B RS485 RS232-2 RS232-1 Eth2 Eth1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 F01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 E01 5 4 3 2 D01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 C01 07 06 05 04 03 02 B01 7 6 5 4 3 2 A01
950 950 950 950
SEF IN IC IB IA VN VT VS VR VN VC VB VA 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 OUT101 112 111 110 109 108 IN107 106 105 104 103 102 IN101
CT PT OUTPUT INPUT
MONITOR INPUT TRIP/CLOSE OUTPUT POWER OUT POWER IN
CLOSE
DC +
DC -
COM
IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

TRIP
OUT205 OUT206 OUT207

PW
OUT IN GND P N P N BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-
950
950 950
L01 2 3 K01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J01 2 3 4 5 I01 2 3 4 5 6 H01 2 3 4 G01 2 3 4
Figure 5-1. Side Panel(Standard)
Cable standard for connector refers to “Table 5-1. Cable Standard for Connector”.
Table 5-1. Cable Standard for Connector

Item Model No. Remark
NTC AKZ 950-2P sensor
IRIG-B AKZ 950-2P Option
RS485 AKZ 950-3P Communition
RS232 DB9-P Communition
Eth1, Eth2 RJ45 Fiber optic option
WIFI SMA Option
CT AKZ 950-10P -
PT AKZ 950-8P -
INPUT(A), INPUT(B) AkZ 950-7P Option
OUTPUT(C) AkZ 950-8P Option
OUTPUT(D) AkZ 950-5P Option
MONITOR AKZ 950-3P Gas pressure
INPUT(K) AkZ 950-10P -
TRIP/CLOSE AkZ 950-5P -
OUTPUT(I) AKZ 950-6P -
POWER OUT AKZ 950-4P Modem power
POWER IN AKZ 960-4P AC24V, Battery
5.1. Communication Port

1) RS232 PORT
RS232 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring
Indicator).
Table 5-2.RS232-1/RS2332-2 Pin Description

Pin Signal Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect
2 RXD Receive Data(IN)
3 TXD Transmit Data(OUT)
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready(OUT)
5 GND Ground
Figure 5-2.RS232
6 DSR Data Set Ready(IN)
7 RTS Request To Send(OUT)
8 CTS Clear To Send(IN)
9 N/C No Connection
2) RS485 PORT
RS485 has 3pins as in ‘Table 5-3. RS485 Pin Description’.
Table 5-3.RS485 Pin Description

3 2 1
Pin Description
1 RS485+
2 RS485-
3 SG (Cable Shield) FG N P
Figure 5-3.RS485
3) ETHERNET PORT
Ethernet1 and 2 are RJ-45 that has 8pins as in ‘Table 5-4.Ehternet(TP) Pin Description’.
Ethernet port can be selected between TP and FX type. If FX type is used, LC type optical
communication will be supported.
Table 5-4.Ethernet(TP) Pin Description

10Base-T Signal
Pin Wire Color
100Base-TX Signal 1L/ACT
1SPEED
1 White/Green Transmit+ 2L/ACT
2SPEED
2 Green Transmit-
Eth2 Eth1
3 White/Orange Receive+
[ Ethernet TP ]
4 Blue Unused
1L/ACT
5 White/Blue Unused 1SPEED
2L/ACT
6 Orange Receive- 2SPEED
7 White/Brown Unused Eth2 Eth1
[ Ethernet FX ]
8 Brown Unused
Figure 5-4.Ethernet Port
4) SPI PORT(Option)
SPI-1 and SPI-2 are RJ-45 and are used for
communication with External I/O Unit ETIO10.
For detailed information on External Unit, refer to
“5.13. External I/O Unit ETIO10 (Option)”. SPI-2 SPI-1
Figure 5-5.SPI-1(Option)
5) IRIG-B Connector - Option
It is a IRIG-B connector for time synchronization function using Time Synchronization module.
2 1
Table 5-5. IRIG-B Pin Description
Connector Pin Description
IRIG-B 1 POSITIVE
Connector 2 NEGATIVE - +
Figure 5-6. IRIG-B
6) Wifi Connector - Option

ETMFC610 and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly. See “18. WIRELESS
CONNECTION” for details on Wifi connections.
Table 5-6. WIFI Pin Description

SMA Connecting the SMA WIFI

1
Connector antenna cables Figure 5-7. WIFI
5.2. NTC Connector

A terminal that connects the battery temperature compensation sensor.
M10 9
Table 5-7. NTC Pin Description
NTC 01 NTC Thermistor
Connector 02 (10 ㏀ B25/85K 3435) NTC
Figure 5-8. NTC Thermistor
5.3. Current Input Connector

Current connector starts from pin number 1(A phse), 2(B phase), 3(C phase), 4(N, ground), 5(SEF)
in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of ETMFC610. Connector
type is STLZ950-10.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 F01
SEF IN IC IB IA
Figure 5-9. Current Input Terminal

Table 5-8. Current Input Pin Description
Pin IA IB IC IN SEF
A B C N
Description SEF
phase phase phase phase
5.4. Voltage Input Connector

Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T)
voltages. Pin arrangement is as follow table. Connector type is STLZ950-8P.
Table 5-9. Voltage Input Pin Description

Pin VA VB VC VR VS VT
Default LCD
A B C R S T
Display
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 E01
VN VT VS VR VN VC VB VA
Figure 5-10. Voltage Input Terminal
5.5. SCADA Connector (Option)
5 4 3 2 D01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 C01 07 06 05 04 03 02 B01 7 6 5 4 3 2 A01
108 107 106 105 104 103 102 OUT101 112 111 110 109 108 IN107 106 105 104 103 102 IN101
OUTPUT INPUT
Figure 5-11.SCADA Input, Output Terminal
Digital output (DO) part is composed of a total of 8 relay outputs. Connector to output commands
from the control part.
Digital input (DI) part receives 12 status signals in total by using electrically insulated contacts.
Connector to as part of the receiving of status inputs from the control element.
5.6. Monitor Connector

It is input terminal to monitor ETR300-R status and its pin arrangement is as in “Table 5-7.
Monitor Pin Description”.
Table 5-10. Monitor Pin Description

OUT Pressure +12V
MONITORS IN Pressure Output
GND Pressure GND
Figure 5-12. Monitor Terminal
5.7. Status Inputs Connector

8 inputs of status provision.
Dry contact input method by internal power method
Table 5-11. Status Input Pin Description INPUT

IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
Connector Pin Description PW
1 Open ST’
2 Close ST’
3 Manual Unlock ST’
K01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Status 4 Spare
Input 5 Door ST’ Figure 5-13. Status Input Terminal
Connector 6 Close/open power good
7 Spare
8 Spare
9,10 Common
5.8. Trip/Close Connector

Output terminal to control ETR300-R and its arrange is as in ‘Table 5-8. TRIP/CLOSE Pin
Description’.
CLOSE
DC +
DC -
COM
TRIP
Table 5-12. TRIP / CLOSE Pin Description
1 CLOSE(-)
2 TRIP(-)
TRIP/CLOSE
3 COM COSE/TRIP(+) J01 2 3 4 5
Connector
4 DC Power Input(+) Figure 5-14. TRIP/ CLOSE Terminal
5 DC Powre Input(-)
5.9. Outputs Connector

Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 3 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin
arrangement is as follow.
Table 5-13. Output Pin Description OUT205 OUT206 OUT207

OUT205
1,2
Photo relay output
I01 2 3 4 5 6
Output OUT206
3,4
Connector Photo relay output Figure 5-15. Output Terminal
OUT207
5,6
Dry contact output
5.10. Power Input / Battery Input Connector

Power Input Connector for EVR2A-NT’s AC24V Power Supply.
It is a battery input connector to charge the battery using inner charger circuit
Table 5-14. Power/Battery Input Pin Description BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-

Power/Battery 1,2 BATT INPUT
Input Connector 3,4 AC 24V INPUT G01 2 3 4
Figure 5-16. Power & Battery Input

Thermistor
5.11. Power Output Connector

Power output connector for switch operation or modem power supply and so on. It can supply DC
+12V or +24V, 40W/continuous , 60W/1min usage.
Table 5-15. Power Output Pin Description P N P N
Connector Pin Description FUSE
Power Output H01,H03 +24V or +12V

Connector H02,H04 GND
H01 2 3 4
Figure 5-17. Power Output Thermistor
5.12. DC Inputs Connector (Option)

4 inputs of status provision.
Table 5-16. DC Input Pin Description 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 M01

DC01 20mA
- + - + - + - +
DC02 20 mA NTC DC4 DC3 DC2 DC1
DC INPUT
DC03 20mA Figure 5-18. DC Input Terminal
Connector
DC04 20mA
NTC Thermistor (10k)
5.13. External I/O Unit ETIO10 (Option)

By using the EXT Port, the number of input and output channels of ETR300-R is expanded.
External I/O Unit ETIO10 is configured following way.
1) COM Port
 RJ-45
 ETR300-R Communication between
side panel Port A and RS422
2) DC Power Input
 DC Power Voltage : 12, 24, 110Vdc
Figure 5-19. External I/O Unit ETO10
 DC Power Continuous : 4W
3) Inputs Channels
 Input 8 Channels
 Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
 250Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 125Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 48Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 24Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 12Vdc(-10%,+30%)
 Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
4) Output Channels
 Output 8 Channels
 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
 Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)
 Maximum operating power
Table 5-17. Output Channel Contacts

125Vdc 0.1A
(L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.8A
24Vdc 3A
250Vac 3A
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vac 5A
5) Analoge Input Channels

 AI 4 Channels
 Operating Range
 Current type : 4~20mA
 Voltage type : 0~10V
*. Channel type (current or voltage) can be selected by purchaser.
I/O UNIT
PORT1 DO DI IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4
POW
RUN
TX
RX
8 4 12 8 4
RS422 A01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 B01 02 03 04 05 06
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 ALARM

+24V 0V SG FG LAMP
ETIO10
TEST
950
E01 02 03 04 C01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 D01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO,, LTD.
Figure 5-20. ETO10’s Side Panel
6. USER INTERFACE PANEL

This section describes User Interface Panel based on the front-panel.
User Interface Panel has a LCD(20  8), keypads and LEDs to monitor selected functions and to
indicate selected function and operation status as below.
 Directly control the recloser

 Verify control status
 View system status
 View metering value
 View information stored in ETR300-R unit
 View and change ETR300-R settings
ETR300-R
1 2
3 4
5 6
51 TOC
50 IOC
50 IOCL
B
ESC FUN
C
ENT SEF
27 UV
59 OV
81 UF/OF/RF
VA / VR
VB / VS
VC / VT
Figure 6-1. User Interface Panel
6.1. Construction
Panel consists of eight sections as below;
 Operation Section
 Local Control Section
 Menu Control Section
 Other Control Section
 Fault Indication Section
 Voltage Elements Section
 Reclosing Sequence Status Section
 System Diagnostic Section
 Battery Status Section
 User Selected LED Section
 Other Status Section
6.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN
Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.
CLOSE
Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser.
ETR300-R has a feature of Manual Close Time Delay. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of
0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the recloser. During the
manual close delay time, if the CLOSE push-button is pressed, it closes immediately without
waiting for the close delay time to be completed.
POSITION LED
Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.
Figure 6-2. Operation Section
6.1.2. Local Control Section

All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the
control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is
DISABLE. The push-button toggles ENABLE/DISABLE.
Figure 6-3. Local Control Section
Protection Enabled
When the LED is illuminated, all protection elements(in case of Reclose mode) and fault indication
elements(in case of Sectionalizer mode) are enabled. The protection can be disabled by pressing the
“PROTECTION ENABLED” push button on the front panel.
NOTE : If “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, all protection elements and fault indcation
are operating, however, Ground fault and Sensitive Earth Fault Elements are
individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button.
Ground Enabled
GROUND ENABLED LED is ON and OFF by pressing the “GROUND ENABLED” push-button.
When the “PROTECTION ENABLED” and “GROUND ENABLED” LEDs are both ON, ground
overcurrent protection element(in case of Reclose mode) and ground fault indication element(in
case of Sectionalizer mode) operate. However, even if the “GROUND ENABLED” is ON and the
“PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, ground fault elements do not operate. If the
“GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, ground fault
elements do not operate.
When “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time. Also,
when “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON.
SEF Enabled
SEF Enabled LED is ON and OFF by pressing “SEF ENABLED” push-button. When the
“PROTECTION ENABLED” and “SEF ENABLED” LEDs are both ON. Sensitive earth fault
elements operate. However, even if the “SEF ENABLED” is ON and the “PROTECTION
ENABLED” LED is OFF, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate. If the “SEF ENABLED” is
OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate.
When “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON. Also, when “GROUND
ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time.
Reclose Enabled
When the “RECLOSE ENABLED” LED is ON, the auto reclosing(79) element(in case of Reclose
mode) is enabled. The auto reclosing can be disabled by pressing the “RECLOSE ENABLED”
push-button at the front panel.
Control Locked
When the “CONTROL LOCKED” LED is on, all the functions in the operation section and Local
control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the “CONTROL LOCKED” push-
button at the front panel.
NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, Lamp Test and menu control section
can be normally operated.
Remote Enabled
When the “REMOTE ENABLED” LED is ON, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system)
are enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the “REMOTE ENABLED” push-button at the front
panel. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0, MODBUS,
IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and IEC61850, etc.
NOTE : When the “REMOTE ENABLED" LED is ON, depending on user’s request and
option, Push-Button controls on the front panel can be blocked except for LAMP
TEST and MENU Control Section.
Group Select
This button is used to change the setting group applied to ETR300-R.
The procedure of changing the active setting group using the "GROUP SELECT" push-button on
the front panel is as follows.
 Use the "GROUP SELECT" push-button
1 2
to select the setting group you want to GROUP SELECT MODE
3 4
apply. Setting group is cyclically 5 6
selected; GROUP1  GROUP2  … PRESS <GROUP>: NEXT

<ENT> : SET
 GROUP6  GROUP1. <ESC> : ABORT
 While controlling the "GROUP
SELECT" push-button, the LCD display
will be like the “Figure 6-4. Group Figure 6-4. Group Select Mode LCD Display
Select Mode LCD Display” and the
selected SET GROUP LED will flash. ESC FUN
 At this time, if you press the [ENT] button, the selected setting group will be applied. The
flashing "SET GROUP" LED will light up. ENT
 If [ESC] button is pressed or if [ENT] button is not pressed for a long time, the setting group
before the "GROUP SELECT" push-button control will be returned.
NOTE : If ‘LOOP CONTROL’ function is activated, selected group is not changed to press
the [GROUP SELECT] button.
Loop Control Enabled

When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop control function is enabled. LED ON
Control is possible only under the conditions as mentioned in “Table 6-2. “LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions”.
Table 6-1. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions

Loop Control Setting
Recloser Status Remark
Function Type Select
ENABLE SEC CLOSE
ENABLE MID CLOSE
ENABLE TIE OPEN
Loop Control Auto Restore

When “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED is ON, auto restoration function is enabled. In
auto restoration function, “Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values
after the loop control operation.
LED ON Control of “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” is only possible when the "LOOP
CONTROL ENABLED" LED is ON in SEC and MID type.
Hot Line Tag

When “HOT LINE TAG” LED is ON, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.
When the "HOT LINE TAG" LED is ON, 1 shot lockout occurs on overcurrent fault even if the
auto reclosing function is activated/enabled. For overcurrent trip operation, T-C Curve set in
“MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / RECLOSER / HOTLINE TAG” menu is applied and
reclosing operation is blocked.
Battery Test
When “BATT’ TEST” push-button is pressed, battery load test is run.
On Test, Battery is disconnected from the
1 2
[BATTERY TEST MODE]
charge circuit and connected the battery with 3 4
load resistor and check the battery. Load resistor BATTERY(V) : 24.00 5 6
CHARGER(V) : 26.00
shall be connected with AC supply. BAT STATUS : OK
CHG STATUS : OK
LCD displays during Battery Load Testing.

 BATTERY(V) : Display the battery Figure 6-5. Battery Test Mode LCD Display
voltage.
ESC FUN
ENT
 CHARGER(V) : Display the voltage of charge circuit.

 BAT STATUS : Display battery status.
- OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V
- HIGH : When the battery voltage is over 28V
- LOW : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V
- NO BATT : When the battery voltage is below 15V
 CHG STATUS : Display charge circuit status.
- OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29.5V
- HIGH : When the charge circuit is over 29.5V
- LOW : When the charge circuit is below 25V
Trip Test
By pressing this button, fault simulation is activated like 1500A of fault current flows on phase A,
B, C. Protection function is operated according on the setting.
Lamp Test/ FI Reset

Reset fault indication and run lamp test.
Auxiliary LED 1/2

Depending on user’s request, manufacturer sets a function on the LED. When the LED is on, the
function is operated.
6.1.3. Menu Control Section

ETR300-R has 20  8 LCD(Liquid Cristal Display) display.
LCD DISPLAY
8x20 Characters display
CONTROL KEYS
[▲] [▼] [◀] [▶]
Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting
value
[▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode
[◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode
[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode
[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level
[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input
NOTE
If control panel is awaken from sleep mode using [AWAKE] key, it must be set to “KEY”
or “BOTH” in setting menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE
/ PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method”.
1 2
3 4
5 6
ESC FUN
ENT
Figure 6-6. Menu Control Section
[FUN] Key
Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is
also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display.
[ESC] Key
The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.
[ENT] Key
ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to
accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.
[◀] [▶] Key

Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when
you change display message.
[▲] [▼] Key

Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value
when you are in the data input mode.
6.1.4. Fault Indication Section

On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than pickup level.
TRIP TYPE
 51 TOC : Shows Time Overcurrent Trip.
 50 IOC : Shows Instantaneous Overcurrent trip
 50 IOCL : Shows Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout
trip
FAULT INDICATION
 A, B, C : Indicates a phase fault has occurred on one
of the phase lines
 G (GROUND) : Indicates an ground fault has
occurred
Figure 6-7. Fault Indication Section
 SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on
the neutral line
NOTE : Fault Indication LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be turned off by "FI
RESET" command.
6.1.5. Voltage Element Section

Indicates that voltage element is occurred. 27 UV
59 OV
 27 UV : Shows Under Voltage elements 81 UF/OF/RF

 59 OV : Shows Over Voltage and Neutral Over Voltage
elements
VA / VR
 81 UF/OF/RF : Shows Under Frequency, Over
VB / VS
Frequency and Frequency Decay elements
VC / VT
 25 PHASE DIFFERENCE : Shows the close waiting
status under Synchro’ Check element and Phase Figure 6-8. Voltage Elements
difference between source side and load side. Section
 VA/VR,VB/VR,VC/VT : Shows Open Pahse Status on
each phase.
NOTE : 27UV, 59OV and 81UF/OF/RF LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be
turned off by Recloser closing.
6.1.6. Reclosing Sequence Status Section

Indicates the auto reclosing sequence procedure.
 79 RESET : Sequence shows resetting

 79 CYCLE : Sequence shows running
 79 LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout
Figure 6-9. Sequence Status Section
6.1.7. System Diagnostic Section
Indicates Diagnostic status of ETR300-R.
 RUN : Status of ETR300-R systems shows

normal
 DIAG/ERROR : Status of ETR300-R
systems shows warning
 RX : Shows the data receiving status for
remote communication. Figure 6-10. System Diagnostic Section
 TX : Shows the data transferring status for
remote communication.
NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal
6.1.8. Battery Status Section
Indicates the system power status of ETR300-R.

AC SUPPLY indicates ETR300-R has external power
source. CHARGER LED shows ETR300-R charging
status, BATTERY LED shows ETR300-R battery status.
 AC SUPPLY : Satus of supplying the external AC Figure 6-11. Battery Status Section
power.
 CHARGER : If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status.
 BATTERY : If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status.
NOTE : Battery voltage and charge circuit voltage are always monitored periodically.
6.1.9. User LED Section
Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed.

PLC logic is set in “ETR300-R ETIMS Interface
Software”.
Factory default setting is as follows.
Figure 6-12. User LED Section
Table 6-2. Default User LED Function

User LED
Name Descrpition
PLC Logic
The LED is ON when the negative sequence overcurrent
ULED1 NEQ
fault is occurred.
The LED is ON when the broken conduct fault trip is
ULED2 46 BC
occurred.
ULED3 32 POWER The LED is ON when the power fault trip is occurred.
ULED4 49 DEMAND The LED is ON when the demand fault trip is occurred.
The LED is ON when status of ETR300-R is machnism

ULED5 MACHANISM LOCK
lock.
The LED is ON when status of ETR300-R is close
ULED6 CLOSE BLOCK
block.
The LED is ON when status of ETR300-R is open
ULED7 OPEN BLOCK
block.
ULED8 Not defined The LED is not defined.
6.1.10. SetGroup Status Section
GROUP #
It displays the currently applied Set Group to ETR300-R.
1 2
Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT”
button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of 3 4
changing the set group locally.
5 6
Figure 6-13. Set Group Status

Section
6.1.11. Other Status Section
REVER POWER
When reverse current flows, REVERSE POWER LED
becomes On. Reverse power is determined by 3-phase
power factor.
Figure 6-14. Other Status Section
CLPU ON
In the Cold Load and Inrush Restraint Duration, CLPU
ON LED becomes On.
6.2. LCD Display

20  8 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and
to check operation status clearly.
[ Initial Logo ] [ Main Menu ]

FUN
ENT
RECLOSER CONTROL [MAIN MENU] >1.GLOBAL SETTING
ETR300-R
SELF CHECK [ NORMAL]

ACTIVE SET [ GROUP1] >2.GROUP SETTING
52 CONTACT [ CLOSE]
ENTEC E&E CO., LTD.

>3.EVENT
CURRENT(A) / VOLT(KV)
>4.MAINTENANCE
IA: 00000 IB: 00000
IC: 00000 IN: 00000
SEF: 00.00
VA: 00.00 VR: 00.00 >5.TIME
VB: 00.00 VS: 00.00
VC: 00.00 VT: 00.00
>6.STATUS
LOOP CONTROL <NON>
>7.METERING
VS STATUS [ - ]
VL STATUS [ - ]
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE [ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[GR1]
Figure 6-15. Initial Logo and Main Menu
6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree

 Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu.
 Initial screen and all menus are round robin algorithm.
 Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu.
 Main menu has 7 sub-menus.
[MAIN MENU]
>1.LIVE LINE
>1.GLOBAL SETTING >1.GENERAL >1.SYSTEM >1.POWER LINE 2.OPERATION COUNT
2.CURRENT SENSING 3.CONTACT WEAR
3.VOLTAGE SENSING 4.BATT LOAD TEST
>2.EVENT RECORDER
5.BATT MANAGEMENT
6.POWER QUALITY
>3.MONITORING 7.TD MONITOR
8.SYSTEM POWER
>4.LOOP CONTROL
>1.PASSCODE 1 >1.LOGIC TIMER
>5.PASSCODE 2.PASSCODE 2 2.PULSE TIMER
3.PASSCODE 3 3.PULSE COUNT
4.INPUT PORTS
>6.PLC
5.OUTPUT PORTS
>1.CONTROL TYPE 6.LATCH LOGIC
>7.DEVICE 2.OPERATION TIME
3.H/W OPTION
4.GAS SENSOR
>*.SAVE SETTINGS
5.MANUAL CLOSE
6.LCD DISPLAY
7.PANEL SLEEP
8.TIME ZONE
9.OTHERS
10.FACTORY DEBUG >1.DNP3 SLAVE 1
2.DNP3 SLAVE 2
>2.COMMUNICATION >1.PROTOCOLS >1.DNP3 3.COMMON
>1.IEC60870-5-101
>2.IEC60870-5 2.IEC60870-5-104
3.COMMON
>3.MODBUS
4.IEC61850
5.SNTP
6.SNMP
7.ETIMS
>1.MULTI-BIT A
>8.MULTI-BIT 2.MULTI-BIT B
>2.PORTS >1.RS232-1
2.RS232-2
3.RS485
4.ETHERNET1 >1.CALLING STRING
5.ETHERNET2 2.CALLING NUMBER
3.INITIAL STRING
>3.DIALUP MODEM >1.RS232-1 MODEM 4.CONNECTION
>2.RS23202 MODEM >1.CALLING STRING

>4.FTP-SSL 2.CALLING NUMBER
3.INITIAL STRING
>5.WIFI 4.CONNECTION
>1.GROUP 1
>6.EVENT&ETC
>2.GROUP 2
ⓐ
>*.SAVE SETTINGS
>3.GROUP 3
>2.GROUP SETTING
>1.OPERATION >4.GROUP 4
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE >5.GROUP 5
>1.OPERATION
>3.EVENT 4.SYSTEM
2.FAULT
5.SET CHANGE
3.FAULT CYCLE >6.GROUP 6
6.LOAD&ENERGY/MIN
4.SYSTEM
7.LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR
5.SET CHANGE
8.LOAD&ENERGY/DAY
6.LOAD & ENERGY
9.DIGNOSTIC
7.DIGNOSTIC
10.PQM
8.PQM
11.LOAD CURR＇ ALARM
9.PQM CYCLE
>12.CLEAR SAVED DATA
11.ABOVE ALL
>4.MAINTENANCE >1.COUNT >1.ETR300-R >1.ETR300-R COUNT

2.FAULT 2.OPERATION COUNT
>2.INTERRUT TIME 3.PQM 3.FAULT COUNT
3.CONTACT WEAR 4.COMMUNICATION 4.PQM COUNT
5.USER COUNT 5.COM’ COUNT
>4.DATA RESET 6.COUNT ALL
>5.TIME 5.CONTROLLER INFO 7.INTERRUT TIME
6.IP INFORMATION 8.BATT. CAPACITY
7.MECHANISM SCALE 9.CONTACT WEAR
>1.RECLOSER 10.ENERGY
>6.STATUS
2.INPUT PORTS 11.MAX DEMAND
>1.CURRENT
3.OUTPUT PORTS 12.PEAK CURRENT
2.VOLTAGE
4.GOOSE S-IN 13.COMM BUFF
3.FREQUENCY
5.GOOSE D-IN 14.USER CONT
>7.METERING 4.POWER
6.GOOSE OUT 15.ABOVE ALL
5.ENERGY
7.FAULT
6.DEMAND
8.DIAGONOSTIC
7.UNBALANCE
8.HARMONICS
9.TRUE R.M.S
10.Z0 IMPEDANCE
11.TD
12.CONTROLLER REF
*. NOTE ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETR300-R.
Figure 6-16. Menu Structure Tree (1/2)
ⓐ >1.RECLOSER >1.AUTO RECLOSING >1.FUNCTION

>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
>2.OPERATION 4.NEG SEQ＇
>1.PHASE/NEG SEQ＇
>3.INTERVALS
2.GROUND
3.SEF
>1.(+)PHASE FAST 4.OTHERS
>2.TIME OC-PHA 2.(+)PAHSE DELAY
3.(-)PHASE FAST
4.(-)PAHSE DELAY >1.(+)GROUND FAST
>3.TIME OC-GND 2.(+)GROUND DELAY
3.(-)GROUND FAST
>1.(+)NEG SEQ FAST
4.(-)GROUND DELAY
2.(+)NEG SEQ DELAY
>4.TIME OC-NEQ
3.(-)NEG SEQ FAST
4.(-)NEG SEQ DELAY
>5.INST OC-PHA >1.(+)INST OC-PHA
2.(-)INST OC-PHA
>1.(+)INST OC-GND
>6.INST OC-GND
2.(-)INST OC-GND
>1.(+)INST OC-SEF
>7.INST OC-SEF 2.(-)INST OC-SEF
>1.(+)INST OC-NEQ
>8.INST OC-NEQ 2.(-)INST OC-NEQ
>1.(+)INST OCL-PHA
>9.INST OCL-PHA
2.(-)INST OCL-PHA
>1.(+)INST OCL-GND
>10.INST OCL-GND
2.(-)INST OCL-GND
>1.(+)INST OCL-NEQ
>11.INST OCL-NEQ 2.(-)INST OCL-NEQ
>12.INRUSH RES＇/CLPU >1.INRUSH RESTRAINT >1.FUNCTION

2.PICKUP CURRENT
3.RESTORE MIN. TIME
>2.COLD LOAD PICKUP
4.INRUSH RES＇ RESET
5.PHASE CURVE
>1.2ND BLOCKING
>13.HARMONIC BLOCK 6.GROUND CURVE
2.5TH BLOCKING
7.NEG SEQ＇ CURVE
8.OTHERS
>1.PHASE
>14.DIRECTION 2.GROUND
3.SEF >1.UNDER VOLT1
4.NEG SEQ＇ 2.UNDER VOLT2
>15.BROKEN CONDUCT
3.UV RESTORATION
4.OVER VOLT1
>16.VOLTAGE 5.OVER VOLT2
>1.UNDER FREQUENCY1 6.OV RESTORATION
2.UNDER FREQUENCY2 7.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT1
>17.FREQUENCY
3.OVER FREQUENCY1 8.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT2
4.OVER FREQUENCY2 9.NEQ OVER VOLT1
5.FREQUENCY DECAY 10.NEQ OVER VOLT2
6.AUTO RESTORATION
>18.POWER >1.FUNCTION
2.FORWARD POWER
>19.DEMAND 3.DIRECTION POWER
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
>20.Z0 ADMITTANCE 3.NEG SEQ＇
4.ACTIVE POWER
5.REACTIVE POWER
>21.HOTLINE TAG
>1.USER CURVE 1
2.USER CURVE 2
>22.USER CURVE 3.USER CURVE 3
4.USER CURVE 4
>23.OTHERS >1.PICKUP CURRENT
>1.PHASE DIFFERENCE
2.INRUSH DURATION T
>2.SECTIONALIZER 2.SYNCHRO＇ CHEC
4.AUTO SECTION
3.OPEN PHASE
4.LIVE LINE BLOCK
>3.MONITORING
5.FAULT LOCATOR
>*.SAVE SETTINGS 7.POWER FACTOR
*. NOTE ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETR300-R.
Figure 6-16. Menu Structure Tree (2/2)
6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting

SYSTEM
Set items related to power system and main body.
Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING and VOLTAGE SENSING.
EVENT RECORDER
Set items related to the format of event beind recoded and whether event is recorded.
MONITORING
Set items related to monitoring for power system and ETR300-R.
Consists of LIVE LINE, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY LOAD TEST,
BATTERY MANAGEMENT, POWER QUALITY, TD MONITOR and SYSTEM POWER.
LOOP CONTROL
Set items related to loop control elements. This menu is only applied when “RECLOSER” type is
set in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE” menu.
PASSCODE
Set items related to passcode security.
Consists of PASSCODE1, PASSCODE2 and PASSCODE 3.
PASSCODE 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and
PASSCODE 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. PASSCODE 3 is applied when
clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.
PLC
Set items related to PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements.
Consists of LOGIC TIMER, PULSE TIMER, PULSE COUNT, INPUT PORTS, OUTPUT PORTS
and LATCH LOGIC.
DEVICE
Set items related to Controller ETR300-R.
Consists of CONTROL TYPE, OPERATION TIME, H/W OPTION, GAS SENSOR, MANUAL
CLOSE, LCD DISPLAY, PANEL SLEEP, TIME ZONE and OTHERS.
COMMUNICATION
Set items related to communication elements.
Consists of PROTOCOLS, PORTS, DIALUP MODEM, FTP-SSL, WIFI and EVENT&ETC.
SAVE SETTING
Save all changed values in the menu.
6.2.3. GROUP Setting

This menu is divided into GROUP 1~ 6 for user’s convenient. Selected group circulatly changes
each time of pressing the [GROUP SELECT] button. Consists of GROUP 1~6 settings,
respectively. If ‘GROUP #’ LED is ON, ‘GROUP # SETTINGS’ settings are applied to ETR300-
R.
[GROUP SETTING] 1 2
>1.GROUP 1 3 4
2.GROUP 2 5 6
3.GROUP 3
4.GROUP 4
5.GROUT 5
6.GROUT 6
Figure 6-17. GROUP SELCT Button and GROUP Setting
ESC FUN
The [GROUP SELECT] button is used to select a set group applied to present ETR300-R. Please
refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for
ENT
procedure of changing the set group locally.
the [GROUP SELEC] button.
All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into RECLOSER,
SECTIONALIZER and MONITORING sub menus.
When set to "RECLOSER" type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE
/ CONTROL TYPE”, only "RECLOSER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated
("SECTIONALIZER" menu is not operated).
When set to "SECTIONALIZER" type, only "SECTIONALIZER" and "MONITORING" menus
are operated ("RECLOSER" menu is not operated).
6.2.4. Event
ERT300-R event information is shown in this menu.
Consists of OPERATION, FAULT, FAULT CYCLE, SYSTEM, SET CHANGE,
LOAD&ENERGY/MIN, LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR, LOAD&ENERGY/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC,
PQM, LOAD CURRENT ALARM and CLEAR SAVED DATA.
6.2.5. Maintenance
Shows about Event Maintenance items.
 COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic.
 INTERRUPT TIME : Cumulated time of Interruption occurred is displayed.
 CONTACT WEAR : Shows damaged status of Interrupter.
 DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset.
 CONTROLLER INFO : Present ETR300-R information is displayed.
 IP INFORMATION : Shows H/W address and IP for ETH1&2
 MECHANISM SCALE : Correction scale factor for main body sensor is displayd.
For more detail information, please refer to “10. MAINTENANCE” .
6.2.6. Time
Present time can be set and checked.
If “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type” is “GMT”
and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is “ON”, do not
set current time manually.
6.2.7. Status
Present status of recloser, fault, dignostic and Input/Output are displayed.
6.2.8. Metering
Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see “13. METERING”)
6.3. Using the LCD Menu

6.3.1. Initial Screen
Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in ETR300-R.
① To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button.
② Press [FUN] button in initial screen to move to Main menu.
③ “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY”
Through “Init Main Screen” in the MENU, main initial screen can be selected. After initial
booting or clearing SLEEP MODE, this intial Screen can be displayed.
Table 6-3. Initial Screen (1/5)

INITIAL SCREEN
RECLOSER CONTROL Initial Screen 1

ETR300-R
This screen displays status information of ETR300-R
SELF CHECK [ NORMAL]
ACTIVE SET [ GROUP1]
52 CONTACT [ CLOSE]
SELF CHECK: It displays self diagnostic information of ETR300-R.
ENTEC E&E CO., LTD.
 NORMAL: It displays normal status of ETR300-R
 ALARM: It displays self diagnostic alarm of ETR300-R.
 ERROR: It displays self diagnostic error of ETR300-R. In this status,
ETR300-R is in significantly abnormal satus so, ETR300-R blocks to
Open/Close recloser.
NOTE :
If “ALARM” and “ERROR” in the self check, ETR300-R is in abnormal
condition. Immediately stop operation and contact Manufacturer.
ACTIVE SET: It displays the currently applied SET GROUP in ETR300-R.
52 CONTACT: It displays the status of recloser’s main contact

 CLOSE: Displays main contact is closed.
 OPEN: Displays main contact is opened.
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable
connection is not completed.

INITIAL SCREEN
CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV) Initial Screen 2

IA: 00000 IB: 00000 This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.
IC: 00000 IN: 00000
SEF: 00.00
VA: 00.00 VR: 00.00
VB: 00.00 VS: 00.00  Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].
VC: 00.00 VT: 00.00
 Each phase voltage value is displayed (A,B,C,R,S,T) [kV].
CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV) Initial Screen 3

IA: 00000 IB: 00000 This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.
IC: 00000 IN: 00000
SEF: 00.00
AB: 00.00 RS: 00.00
BC: 00.00 ST: 00.00  Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].
CA: 00.00 TR: 00.00
 Each phase-to-phase voltage value is displayed (AB,BC,CA,RS,ST,TR) [kV].
GPS/IRIG MODULE
Initial Screen 4
This screen displays IRIG/GPS related with time synchronization.
STATUS[ NOT INSTALL]
G01/01/2017 00:00:00
L01/01/2017 00:00:00
<-: -D -M -S> STATUS: This screen displays time synchronization information.
<-: -D -M -S>
 LINK SUCCESS: Time synchronization device is well installed.
GPS/IRIG MODULE  LINK FAIL: The connection of time synchronization is not normal.
STATUS[ NOT INSTALL]  NOT INSTALL: Time synchronization device is not installed.
G01/01/2017 00:00:00
L01/01/2017 00:00:00
< ⓐ > G: This screen displays UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
< ⓑ >
L: This screen displays Local Time.
ⓐ This screen displays latitude received from time synchronization device.

(N: North, S: South).
ⓑ This screen displays longtitude received from time synchronization device.
(E: East, W: West).
*. NOTE) If time synchronization device is not installed or at link fail,
local Information (latitude, longtitude) is not displayed.
CONTROLLER INFO Initial Screen 5

MPU: V1.0.0.0 This screen displays the version of ETR300-R.
DSP: V1.0.0.0
CPU: V1.0.0.0
HMI: V1.0.0.0
XML: ST00-1.00
OS : #001 2017-01-01

INITIAL SCREEN
RECLOSER STATUS Initial Screen 6

RECLOSE FUN[ ENABLE] This screen displays auto reclosing function. It can only display when control
SEQUENCE NO[ 0]
SEQUENCE ST[ RESET] type setting is “RECLOSER”.
RECLOSER ST[ CLOSE]
CYCLE RESET[ - ]
AT REST’ CL[ - ]
RECLOSE FUN : It display auto reclosing function status.
 ENABLE : When function is enabled.
 DISABLE : f When function is disabled.
 - : Since control type is selected as sectinalizer, auto reclosing function is
not activated.
SEQUNCE NO: Number of reclosing operation (0~4) is displayed.
SEQUNCE ST: It is showing reclosing sequence process status.

 RESET : It displays 79 Reset.
 CYCLE : It displays 79 Cycle. It means reclosing running state.
 LOCKOUT : It displays 79 Lockout.
RECLOSER ST: Circuit Breaker Open/Close Status is displayed.

 CLOSE: Displays recloser is closed.
 OPEN: Displays recloser is opened.
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable
connection is not completed.
CYCLE RESET: When fault is clear during 79 Cycle, it is under auto reset
status.
 RUNNING: After clearing fault current, reset timer is running to make
auto reset.
AT RESET CL: After fault caused by Volage and frequency auto restation
function, AT RESET CL indicates status for auto closing.
 RUNNING: After fault, when line returns to normal status, restartion timer
is running to make auto closing.

INITIAL SCREEN
LOOP CONTROL <SEC> Initial Screen 7

VS STATUS [LIVELINE] This screen displays loop control function. It can be only available when
VL STATUS [LIVELINE]
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ] control type is as “RECLOSER”.
AUTO RESTORE [ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[P-1]
ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.
LOOP CONTROL <ⓐ>  SEC : Sectionalizing Recloser
VS STATUS [LIVELINE]  MID : Midpiont Recloser
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]  TIE : Tiepoint Recloser
AUTO RESTORE [ - ]  NON : None Selected
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[ⓑ-ⓒ]
 - : Since control type is selected as sectinalizer, auto loop control function
is not activated.
VS STATUS: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)

VL STATUS: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
VS LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to
the dead line of source side
 RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.
VL LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to

the dead line of load side.
AUTO RESTORE : Displays auto restoring status after loop control

operation. It is only available when SEC and MID status.
 RUNNING : After returning to live line, timmer is running for automatic
reset.
S-CNG : When loop control is operating, it can display the possibility of auto
set group change. It is only available when MID and TIE status.
S-GR : It indicats the currently applied set group.

ⓑ It indicates that when currently applied set group as primary(P) or
alternate(A) setting.
ⓒ It indicats the currently applied set group.

INITIAL SCREEN
AUTO SECTIONALIZER Initial Screen 8

SECTION FUN[ SEC] This screen displays auto section function. It can be only available when
OPERATE ST [ RESET]
SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L] control type is as “SECTIONALIZER”.
LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]
O-COUNT SET[ 4]
O-COUNT NO.[ 0]
SECTION FUN : It indicates auto section function as below.
 DISABLE : Auto secontion function does not operate.
 SEC : It operates as Auto Sectionalizer.
 TIE : It operates as Tiepoint Switch.
OPERATE ST: Displays the present operating status.

 RESET : Reset status
 RUNNING : Operation counter is increasing.
 LOCKOUT : When at “SEC”, it displays. When operation coutner is up to
maximum setting, recloesr will be at open operating.
 CLOSING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for close operation order.
 OPENING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for opening operation
order
SOURCE VOLT: Displays the status of of source side voltage(LIVE or

DEAD LINE)
LOAD VOLT: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
O-COUNT SET : Displays the set operate count
O-COUNT NO. : Displays the present operate count
6.3.2. Main Menu

In the initial screen, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC]
button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below.
MAIN MENU
[MAIN MENU] Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menus.

>1.GLOBAL SETTING
2.GROUP SETTING You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key.
3.EVENT
4.MAINTENANCE Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
5.TIME
6.STATUS
7.METERING
As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.
6.3.3. Setting Example

Step to change Phase Pickup current of Recloser menu in Group1~6 setting.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ TIME OC-PHA/

(+)PHASE FAST/ PICKUP”.
A following screen is displayed.

MAIN MENU/ GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ TIME OC-PHA/ (+)PHASE FAST/ PICKUP
[(+)PHASE FAST] Range 10 ~ 1600A
Function: TRIP
>Pickup: 500 Default 500A Step 1A
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Phase pickup current. This value is primary current.
Time Add.: 0.00
[10~1600:1A]
Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio.
(Primary current) = (Secondary current) × (CT ratio)
As above example screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into
value column.
Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value.
Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value.
NOTE : You must save all changed values at ”Setting Save” menu.
6.3.4. Setting Save

To save all changed values, steps are as follows;
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ *. SAVE SETTING” and follow each
step as below(“Global Setting / General”, “Global Setting / Communiction” and “Group Setting”
menu have “*.Setting Save” menu).
MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SAVE SETTING

①
① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button.
SETTING CHANGED
PRESS <ENT>
TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)
② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct, ③
② screen appears; otherwise ② screen appears again.
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and
ENTER PASSCODE 1
Group Settings, and Passcode 2 is applied when communication
0000
setting is changed.
③
③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③ screen is displayed for
[SAVE SETTING]
short period.
* SUCCESS *
④ If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE SETTING”, then,
* NOTHING CHANGED *
screen ④ is displayed.
If you do not want to save changed setting value, please go to ① screen

⑤ through [▲] [▼] button and to ⑤ screen [ENT] button.
SETTING CHANGED
PRESS <ENT> NOTE :
TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)
Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved.
If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is
remained.
7. GLOBAL SETTING
Place the cursor in “GLOBAL SETTING”, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL
SETTING. This menu consists of “GENERAL” menu and “COMMUNICATION” menu.
[GLOBAL SETTING]
>1.GENERAL
2.COMMUNICATION
7.1. General Setting

This menu is to set general setting required to operate recloser’s controller ETR300-R, and Sub-
menu consists of below picture.
[GENERAL]
>1.SYSTEM
2.EVENT RECODER
3.MONITERING
4.LOOP CONTROL
5.PASSCODE
6.PLC
7.DEVICE
*.SAVE SETTING
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.
7.1.1. System
Place the cursor on “SYSTEM” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below.
[SYSTEM]
>1.POWER LINE
2.CURRENT SENSING
3.VOLTAGE SENSING
CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is
requested.
7.1.1.1. Power Line

Place a cursor on “POWER LINE” in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this
menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / System Frequency
[POWER LINE] Range 50, 60 ㎐
>System Frequency:60
Phase Rotation: ABC Default 60 Step ~
Phase Combina’: abc
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a
default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.
[50~60Hz:10Hz]
It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec.
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation
[POWER LINE]
Range ABC, ACB
System Frequency:60
>Phase Rotation: ABC
Default ABC Step ~
Phase Combina’: abc
[ABC/ACB]
Select the phase rotation of the power system.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Combina’
[POWER LINE]
Range abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba
System Frequency:60
Phase Rotation: ABC
Default abc Step ~
>Phase Combina’: abc
Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control
[Combination of ABC]
device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that bushing A is
connected with phase C, bushing B is connected with phase A and
bushing C is connected with phase B.
NOTE: In order to get the details relevant to the connection for ETR300-R-600, refer the
following figure and table.
Line Feeding Case : Install Direction

Install Case: Normal Installed
6 5 4 3 2 1 (Source Side: 1V)
7 8 9 10 11 12 Install Case: Reverse Installed

(Source Side: 2V)
Source Side Load

+ - Side
C IC T
R IA A
a c b a b c
B IB S
S IB B
b a c c a b
A IA R
T IC C
c b a b c a - +
Figure 7-1. Phase Connection
Table 7 2. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation
Line feeding Recommend Setting Phase Mapping Result
Bushing Terminal Phase Source Side LCD/INDEX Display : Bushing/Controller
Combination Source V(Load V) / Current Terminal
Case 1 : abc abc 1V Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC
Case 2 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA
Case 3 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB
Case 4 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB
Case 5 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC
Case 6 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA
Case 7 : abc abc 2V Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC
Case 8 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA
Case 9 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB
Case 10 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB
Case 11 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC
Case 12 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA
*. NOTE ) Setting value for ‘Source Side’ is available from “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /
SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING” in the menu..
7.1.1.2. Current Sensing

Place a cursor in “CURRENT SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection and fault indication features that have
settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and
sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents
(Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current.
In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary
conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the
ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive
earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered.
For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see “14.8. urrent Inputs Wiring Diagram”).
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 2000
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
GND CT Pol’: FOR
Set phase CT ratio.
[1~2000:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 2000
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
GND CT Pol’: FOR
Set ground CT ratio.
[1~2000:1]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0
PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000.0 Step 0.1
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
GND CT Pol’ FOR
Set sensitive earth CT ratio.
[0(OFF),0.1~1000.0]
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] Range Forward, Reverse
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default Forward Step ~
>PHA CT Polar’: FOR
>GND CT Polar’: FOR
Set phase CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Polarity

>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default Forward Step ~
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
>GND CT Pol’: FOR
Set Ground CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]
GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity

>GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 Default Forward Step ~
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
>GND CT Pol’: FOR
>SEF CT Pol’: FOR
Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]
7.1.1.3. Voltage Sensing

Place a cursor in “VOLTAGE SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
ETR300-R has two voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load side
line voltages. With Line VTs installed, ETR300-R can be used to perform voltage measurements,
power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements and so on.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA
>1V CON-Type: WYE
1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default WYE Step ~
1V Ratio: 3300.0
2V CON-Type: WYE Select the voltage type of system that input to Source Voltage
2V Rated(P-N):22.86
Connector(1V) .
[NONE/WYE/DELTA]
 NONE : VT non installed. Select NON
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Rated(P-P)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 3.00~38.00kV
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 22.86 Step 0.01kV
1V Ratio: 3300.0
2V CON-Type: WYE Enter the primary rated voltage(kV) of potential transformer for
2V Rated(P-P):22.86
Source Voltage Connector(1V).
[3.00~38.00:0.01kV]
This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage(phase-
to-phase).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 10.0~6500.0
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 3300.0 Step 0.01
>1V Ratio: 3300.0
2V CON-Type: WYE
2V Rated(P-P):22.86 Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Source Voltage
[10.0~6500.0:0.01] Connector(1V).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default WYE Step ~
>1V Ratio: 3300.0
2V CON-Type: WYE Select the voltage type of system that input to Load Voltage
>2V Rated(P-N):22.86
Connector(2V) .
[NONE/WYE/DELTA]
 NONE : VT non installed. Select NON
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Rated(P-P)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 3.00~38.00kV
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 22.86 Step 0.01kV
>1V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V CON-Type: WYE Enter the primary rated voltage(kV) of potential transformer for Load
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
Voltage Connector(2V).
[10.0~6500.0:0.01]
This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage(phase-
to-phase).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 10.0~6500.0
>1V Ratio: 3300.0 Default 3300.0 Step 0.01
>2V CON-Type: WYE
>2V Ratio: 3300.0 Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Load Voltage
[10.0~6500.0:0.01] Connector(2V).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Installation Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T
>2V CON-Type: WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 3P Step ~
>2V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V Instal Type: 3P Insert the type of load side sensing voltage for the recloser body unit.
Source Side: 1V
3P : The voltage sensor is installed in each of the three phases
[3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-T]
1P-R : The voltage sensor is installed only in the R phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-S : The voltage sensor is installed only in the S phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-T : The voltage sensor is installed only in the T phase of the
recloser body unit.
NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to

only one phase or none of the phase, following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.
 Phase Difference
 Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection – PQM
 Voltage Unbalance Detection – PQM
 Under and Over Voltage Detection – PQM
 Loop Control
 Directional Control
 Under and Over Voltage Protection
 Live Line Detection
 Phase Open/Loss Detection
 Open Phase
 Live Load Blocking
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 1V, 2V
>2V CON-Type: WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 1V Step ~
>2V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V Instal Type: 3P Select the Source side of System.
>Source Side: 1V
1V : It is selected when Source Voltage Connector(1V) is connected
[1V/2V]
with the Source side of System..
2V : It is selected when Load Voltage Connector(2V) is connected with
the opposite Source side of System.
According to the selected value, the indication of “MAIN MENU/

METERING/ VOLTAGE” change. In the VOLTAGE screen, ABC
indicates the Source Side, and RST indicates the Load Side.
7.1.1.4. Event Recorder

Place the cursor on “EVENT RECORDER” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. Waveform, Event Recorder and its related elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Recorder
[EVENT RECORDER] Range ON, OFF
>Wave Recorder: ON
>Wave S/R: 64 Default ON Step ~
Wave Pre-Cycle: 5
Wave P/S: P(1ST)
L&E Record: ON Set whether to use wave recorder function.
[OFF/ON] When this setting is OFF, fault cycle will not register any information.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 16, 32, 64sample
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R: 64 Default 64 sample Step ~
Wave Pre-Cycle: 5
Wave P/S: P(1ST) Select a number of sampling for wave capture.
L&E Record: ON
Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection. For
[16/32/64]
example, Captured wave cycle is 60 cycles if 64 sampling is applied.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 1 ~ 20 cycle
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R: 64 Default 10 Step 1 cycle
>Wave Pre-Cycle: 10
Wave P/S: P(1ST) Pre-cycle is to record(capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger
L&E Record: ON
occurring. Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For
[1~20:1cycle]
instance, if pre-cycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 64, 5
cycle si applied, the sampling number is 32, pre-cycle is 10, 16 case, 20
pre-cycle is applied.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave P/S

[EVENT RECORDER] Range P(1ST), S(2ND)
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R: 64 Default P(1ST) Step ~
>Wave Pre-Cycle: 10
>Wave P/S: P(1ST) Select if analog data value is primary data or secondary data recorded
L&E Record: ON
on Wave cycle. Record the current and voltage data applied to setting
[P(1ST)/S(2ND)]
value ETR300-R on secondary side (the CT ratio and VT ratio divided
by the primary side data).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Record

[EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF, ON
>L&E Record: OFF
L&E Interval: 15 Default OFF Step ~
COMFEDE Record: OFF
COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
Set wherther Load&Energy event is recorded or not.
[OFF/ON]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Interval

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60
>L&E Record: OFF
>L&E Interval: 15 Default 15 Step ~
COMFEDE Record: OFF
COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
Set the interval to record Load&Energy events.
[5/10/15/20/30/60]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMFEDE Record

>L&E Record: OFF
>L&E Interval: 15 Default OFF Step ~
>COMFEDE Record: OFF
COMTRADE Record:OFF When occurring event, configure if it will be saved on COMFEDE
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
format (COMmon Format for Event Data Exchange) format file of
[OFF/ON]
ETR300-R.
COMFEDE file recorded in ETR300-R can be downloaded by file
transfer protocol function. For details, refer to “17.3. COMFEDE”.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Record

>L&E Record: OFF
>L&E Interval: 15 Default OFF Step ~
>COMTRADE Record:OFF In case of occuring a fault, set COMTRADE (COMmon Format for
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
Transient Data Exchange) format file in ETR300-R.
[OFF/ON]
The COMTRADE file recorded in ETR300-R can be downloaded by
the file transfer protocol function. For details, refer to “17.4.
COMTRADE”.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rev.

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 1999, 2013
>L&E Record: OFF
>L&E Interval: 15 Default 1999 Step ~
>COMTRADE Record:OFF
>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
Select version of COMTRADE file.
[1999/2013]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE P/S

[EVENT RECORDER] Range P(1ST), S(2ND)
>COMTRADE Record:OFF Default P(1ST) Step ~
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
>COMTRADE Rate: 1 Select whether the analog data value recorded in the COMTRADE file
[P(1ST)/S(2ND)] is primary or secondary data.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rate

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 1 ~ 10
>COMTRADE Record:OFF Default 1 Step 1
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
>COMTRADE Rate: 1 Sets the rate of the analog data value recorded to the COMTRADE file.
[1~10:1] Record the value divided by the analog data into the COMTRADE file.
7.1.2. Monitoring
Place the cursor on “MONITERING” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[MONITERING]
>1.LIVE LINE
2.OPERATION COUNT
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.BATT LOAD TEST
5.BATT MANAGEMENT
6.POWER QUALITY
7.TD MONITOR
8.SYSTEM POWER
7.1.2.1. Live Line

Place the cursor on “LIVE LINE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
ETR300-R has Line line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintais over live
detec level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as
below.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv

[LIVE LINE] Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
Live Line Tm: 4.00 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating.
[0.10~1.40:0.01xVT]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv

[LIVE LINE] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
>Live Line Tm: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec
Set the delay time of live detec element.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
7.1.2.2. Operation Count

Place the cursor on “OPERATION COUN” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Recloser operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function

[OPERATION COUNT] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Alarm Count: 10000 Default DISABLE Step ~
Reset Count: 0
Select whether to use Recloser operation count monitoring.
If function is activated and operation counter is over “Alarm Count”,
[DISABLE, ENABLE]
Logic bit DIGOPRC(Diagnostic Operation Count) is set. Logic bit can
be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.
Function
ON
Alarm Count
Set_Val
_
AND DIGOPRC
Operation Count +
Figure 7-2. DIGOPRC Diagram
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Alarm Count

[OPERATION COUNT] Range 1 ~ 20000
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Count: 10000 Default 10000 Step 1
Reset Count: 0
Set a number to alarm when Recloser operation number meets this set.
[1~20000:1]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Reset Count

[OPERATION COUNT] Range 0 ~ 10000
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Count: 10000 Default 0 Step 1
>Reset Count: 0
It is to set the same operation number of circuit breaker. Set value is
available after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to “MAIN
[0~10000:1]
MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ OPERATION COUNT or
COUNT ALL” menu.
NOTE :
1. When entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET”
menu to reset operation count, password 3 authentication is
required
2. The current operation count can be checked in the “MENU/
MAINENANCE/ COUNT/ ETR300-R” menu.
7.1.2.3. Contact Wear

Place the cursor on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Recloser contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function

[CONTACT WEAR] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Select whether to use Recloser contact wear monitoring.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup(%)

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.0 ~ 50.0 %
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 20.0 Step 0.1 %
Time Delay: 0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000 Set a pickup value to alarm when recloser contact wear reaches set
[0.0~50.0:0.1%] value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Time Delay

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 1.0 Step 0.1 sec
>Time Delay: 0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Set time delay when recloser contact wear reaches set value.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I1

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1.00~600.00 kA
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 1 Step 0.01 kA
>Time Delay: 0.01
>Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000 To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
[1.00~600.00:0.01kA] operation number at the point 1(maximum operation number).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct1

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1~60000
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 10000 Step 0.01kA
>Time Delay: 0.01
>Interrupt I1: 1.00
>Interrpt Ct1: 10000 To set interruption current of the curve for interruption current to
[1~60000:1] operation number at the point 2(manimum operation number).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I2

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1.00~600.00 kA
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 20.00 Step 0.01kA
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00
>C Wear Set: 100.00 To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
[1.00~600.00:0.01kA] operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct 2

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1~60000
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 16 Step 1
A Wear Set: 100.00
B Wear Set: 100.00
C Wear Set: 100.00 To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
[1~20000:1] operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set

>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 100.00 Step 0.01%
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 It is to set Circuit breaker phase A contact wear value in ETR300-R.
>C Wear Set: 100.00
Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ CONTACT
WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set

>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 It is to set Circuit breaker phase B contact wear value in ETR300-R.
C Wear Set: 100.00
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set

>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 It is to set Circuit breaker phase C contact wear value in ETR300-R.
>C Wear Set: 100.00
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
NOTE :
1. Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA
RESET” menu to reset “Phase A Contact Wear”, “Phase B Contact Wear” and “Phase C
Contact Wear”.
2. Current contact wear of each phase can be checked in “MENU/ MAINENANCE/
CONTACT WEAR” menu.
7.1.2.4. Auto Battery Load Test

Place the cursor on “BATT LOAD TEST” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT LOAD TEST / Period

[BATT LOAD TEST] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour
>Period: 24
Default 24 Step 1 hour
Set a time period for automatic battery load test.

[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]
7.1.2.5. Battery Management

Place the cursor on “BATT MANAGEMENT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
The ETR300-R has a battery management function that calculates and manages the battery capacity
using the charge time and discharge time of the set battery. However, for correct battery capacity
calculation, charge time and discharge time should be set for the installed battery.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Function

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Charge Time: 780 Default DISABLE Step ~
Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00 Set whether to monitor battery capacity.
Capacity Rst:100.00
If set to ENABLE, if the battery capacity is less than the "Alarm Level"
[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]
setting value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)" event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Charge Time

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 60 ~ 6000 min.
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 780 Step 1 min.
Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00 Sets the time at which the fully discharged battery (0%) will be fully
[60~6000:1 m] charged.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Discharge Time

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 60 ~ 6000 min.
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 1440 Step 1 min.
>Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00
Sets the time when the fully charged battery (100%) is fully discharged.
[60~6000:1 m]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 50 Step 0.01 %
Discharge Time:1440
>Alarm Level: 50.00 Set the battery monitoring level.
Capacity Rst:100.00
If battery capacity is less than this set value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)"
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 100 Step 0.01 %
Discharge Time:1440
>Alarm Level: 50.00
>Capacity Rst:100.00 Set the battery capacity reset value.
[0.00~100.00:0.01%] After this setting, it can reset battery capacity using “MAIN MENU /
MAINENANCE / DATA RESET / BATT. CAPACITY or COUNT
ALL”.
When the battery is replaced, it should be reset to the capacity for the
replaced battery according to the above procedure.
NOTE :
1. Password 3 authentication is required when entering
“MENU / MAINENANCE / DATA RESET” menu to reset
the battery capacity.
2. Current battery capacity can be checked in “MENU /
METERING / CONTROLLERL REF” menu.
7.1.2.6. Power Quality Monitoring

Place the cursor on “PQM” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.
[PQM]
>1.PQM FUNCTION
2.INTERRUPT
3.SAG
4.SWELL
5.HARMONICS
6.CURR UNBALANCE
7.VOLT UNBALANCE
8.UNDER VOLTAGE
9.OVER VOLTAGE
10.UNDER FREQUENCY
11.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT
The ETR300-R provides voltage and current measurement signals at a rate of 64 samples / cycle pe
r cycle, providing instantaneous voltage drop (Sag), instantaneous voltage swell, interrupt, undervo
ltage, overvoltage, And power quality monitoring functions such as voltage / current imbalance.
The power quality for power grid is classified into several categories according to the voltage
magnitude and duration according to the international standard IEEE 1159 "Recommended Practice
on Monitoring Electric Power Quality". The power quality categories are listed in “Figure 7-3.
Power Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)” and “Table 7-3. Power
Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)”.
When the power quality monitoring element occurs, record the PQM event, PQM waveform and
PQM counter. In addition, when the related communication point is used, the occurrence event can
be transmitted to the master station through the remote communication.
Transient Short duration Long duration
Instant Moment Temporary
Swell Over voltage

1.1 pu
1.0 pu Normal Range
0.9 pu
Sag Under voltage
0.1 pu
Interruption
30cycle 3sec
0.5cycle 1min
Figure 7-3. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)
Table 7-1. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)
Category Time Voltage Value
Short-term fluctuation
Sag 0.5 ~ 30 Cycle 0.1~0.9 xVT of rating

Instantaneous
Swell 0.5 ~ 30 Cycle 1.1~1.8 xVT of rating
Interruption 0.5 Cycle ~ 3 sec Rated below 0.1 xVT
Momentary Sag 30 Cycle ~ 3 sec Rated below 0.1~0.9 xVT
Swell 30 Cycle ~ 3 sec Rated below 1.1~1.8 xVT
Interruption 3 sec ~ 1 min Rated below 0.1 xVT
Temporary Sag 3 sec ~ 1 min 0.1~0.9 xVT of rating
Swell 3 sec ~ 1 min 1.1~1.8 xVT of rating
Long-term fluctuation
Sustained Interruption 1 min above Rated below 0.1 xVT
1) PQM Function
Place the cursor on “PQM FUNCTION” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function
[PQM FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Default DISABLE Step ~
Select whether to use PQM function.

[DISABLE/ENABLE] If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled.
2) Interrupt
Place the cursor on “INTERRUPT” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level
[INTERRUPT] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 0.49 xVT
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default OFF Step 0.01 xVT
It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality.

0(OFF),0.10~0.49xVT
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time

[INTERRUPT] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default 2.0 Step 0.5 cycle
Set a interrupt detecting time.

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
3) Sag
Place the cursor on “ SAG” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level
[SAG] Range 0(OFF), 0.50~ 0.99 xVT
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default OFF Step 0.01 xVT
Set a voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality.

0(OFF),0.50~0.99xVT
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Time

[SAG] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: OFF
Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
4) Swell
Place the cursor on “SWELL” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level
[SWELL] Range 0(OFF), 1.01~ 1.50 xVT
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default 0 Step 0.01 xVT
Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.

0(OFF),1.01~1.50xVT
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Time

[SWELL] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: OFF
Set a time to detect voltage swell.

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
5) Harmonics
Place the cursor on “HARMONIC” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup
[HARMONICS] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default OFF Step 0.1%
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00
Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion.

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay

[HARMONICS] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00
Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup

[HARMONICS] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default OFF Step 0.1%
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00
Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion.

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay

[HARMONICS] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00
Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
6) Current Unbalance
Place the cursor on “CURR UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Pickup
[CURR UNBALANCE] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>Pickup: 30.0
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 30.0 Step 0.1 %
Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality.
Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
I2
UI rate   100
I1
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Time delay

[CURR UNBALANCE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Pickup: 30.0
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec
Set the time delay of current unbalance.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
7) Voltage Unbalance
Place the cursor on “VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Pickup
[VOLT UNBALANCE] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>Pickup: 30.0
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 30 Step 0.1 %
Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality.
Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
V2
UVrate   100
V1
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time delay

[VOLT UNBALANCE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Pickup: 30.0
Set the time delay of voltage unbalance.

[0.00~600.0:0.01s]
8) Under Voltage
Place the cursor on “UNDER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Pickup
[UNDER VOLTAGE] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT
>Pickup: 0.80
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
Set pickup voltage level to detect for under voltage element of power
0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT quality.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time

[UNDER VOLTAGE] Range 0.00 ~600.00 sec
>Pickup: 0.00
Set detecting time for under voltage element of power quality.

[0.0~600.0:0.1s]
9) Over Voltage
Place the cursor on “OVER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Pickup
[OVER VOLTAGE] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT
>Pickup: 1.20
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 1.20 Step 0.01 xVT
Set pickup voltage level to detect for over voltage element of power
0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT quality.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Time

[OVER VOLTAGE] Range 0.00 ~600.00 sec
>Pickup: 1.20
Set detecting time for over voltage element of power quality.

[0.0~600.0:0.1s]
10) Under Frequency

Place the cursor on “UNDER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Pickup
[UNDER FREQUENCY] Range 0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
>Pickup: 1.20
Time Delay: 4.00 Default 59.50 Step 0.01 Hz
Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.

0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz
the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time Delay

[UNDER FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Pickup: 1.20
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] Set an under frequency detecting time.
11) Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit

Place the cursor on “ITHD/UBI I LIMIT” menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit Current
[ITHD/UBI I LIMIT] Range 0 ~ 630 A
>Limit Current: 60
Default 60 Step 1A
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element
and current harmonic distortion element.
[0~630:1A]
If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current
THD status point does not maked.
7.1.2.7. TD Monitor
Place the cursor on “TD MONITOR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. It is to set Transducer to monitor DC Analog input.

NOTE :
This menu is applicable only when a transducer (TD) input port and an external tranducer
input port are installed.
In the case of OFF on ‘EXT. I/O Use’ and ‘TD Input use” of “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL
SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION”, TD Monitor function of this menu does
not work.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Rate

[TD MONITOR] Range 1 ~ 200
>TD1 Rate: 40
>TD1 Ratio: 1 Default 40 Step 1
TD1 Offset: +0
TD1-1 Type: UNDER
>TD1-1 PU: OFF
Set Transducer 1(TD1) monitoring range.
[1~200:1]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Ratio

[TD MONITOR] Range 1 ~ 3000
>TD1 Rate: 40
TD1 Offset: +0
TD1-1 Type: UNDER Set the ratio of transducer 1(TD1) input channel.
>TD1-1 PU: OFF
The TD1 measurement value is the ratio x TD1 input channel input
[1~3000:1]
value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Offset

[TD MONITOR] Range -10000 ~ +10000
>TD1 Rate: 40
>TD1 Offset: +0
TD1-1 Type: UNDER Set the offset of transducer 1(TD1) input channel.
>TD1-1 PU: OFF
When calculating TD1 measurement value, calculate by applying offset
[-10000 ~ +10000:1]
value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Type

[TD MONITOR] Range UNDER, OVER
>TD1 Rate: 40
>TD1 Ratio: 1 Default UNDER Step ~
TD1 Offset: +0
>TD1-1 Type: UNDER Set the alarm type(under or over) for Transducer 1-1(TD1-1). Under
>TD1-1 PU: OFF
setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses under the pickup
[UNDER/OVER]
value. Over setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses over the
pickup value.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 PU

[TD MONITOR] Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
>TD1 Rate: 40
>TD1 Ratio: 1 Default OFF Step 0.1
TD1 Offset: +0
>TD1-1 Type: UNDER Set TD1-1 pickup value.
>TD1-1 PU: OFF
Dropout value of TD1 is 10% of pickup value. Alarm ocurrs when
0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1
TD1-1 Type setting is UNDER and TD1 input is lower than pickup
value. And it is reset when TD1 input is higher than 110% of pickup
value.
Alarm ocurrs when TD1-1 Type setting is OVER and TD1 input is
higher than pickup value. And it is reset when TD1 input is lower than
90% of pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Delay

[TD MONITOR] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TD1-1 Delay: 2.00
TD1-2 Type: UNDER Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
TD1-2 PU: OFF
TD1-2 Delay: 2.00 Set a delay time of TD1-1 for pickup delay time and dropout delay
TD2 Rate: 40
time.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
When TD1-1 alarm occurs, "DC11T" event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Type

[TD MONITOR] Range UNDER, OVER
>TD1-1 Delay: 2.00
>TD1-2 Type: UNDER Default UNDER Step ~
TD1-2 PU: OFF
TD1-2 Delay: 2.00
TD2 Rate: 40
Set the alarm type(under or over) for Transducer 1-2(TD1-2).
[UNDER/OVER]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 PU

[TD MONITOR] Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
>TD1-1 Delay: 2.00
TD1-2 Type: UNDER Default OFF Step 0.1
>TD1-2 PU: OFF
TD1-2 Delay: 2.00
TD2 Rate: 40 Set TD1-2 pickup value.
0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1 Dropout value of TD1 is 10% of pickup value.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Delay

[TD MONITOR] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TD1-1 Delay: 2.00
TD1-2 Type: UNDER Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
TD1-2 PU: OFF
>TD1-2 Delay: 2.00 Set a delay time of TD1-2 for pickup delay time and dropout delay
TD2 Rate: 40
time.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
When TD1-2 alarm occurs, "DC12T" event occurs.
*. NOTE ) The setting items and application for TD2 ~ 4, ETD1 ~ 4 chanels are the same as above
TD1.
Table 7-2. Input Ports and Events related to TD Monitor function

TD Monitor Alarm Event Monitoring
Remark
Items Name TD Chanel*
TD1-1 DC11T
TD1
TD1-2 DC12T
TD2-1 DC21T
TD2
TD2-2 DC22T If 'TD Input Use' is OFF,
TD3-1 DC31T Monitoring does not work
TD3
TD3-2 DC32T
TD4-1 DC41T
TD4
TD4-2 DC42T
ETD1-1 EXTDC11T
External TD1
ETD1-2 EXTDC12T
ETD2-1 EXTDC21T
External TD2
ETD2-2 EXTDC22T
If 'EXT. I / O Use 'setting is
ETD3-1 EXTDC31T
External TD3 OFF, Monitoring does not work
ETD3-2 EXTDC32T
ETD4-1 EXTDC41T
External TD4
ETD4-2 EXTDC42T
*. NOTE ) The measurement values of each TD chanel can be checked in the “MAIN MENU/
METERING/ TD” menu.

7.1.2.8. System Power

Place the cursor on “SYSTEM POWER” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. System power monitoring elements are set in this menu. If there is a problem with
system power, it does not perform the correct measurement and functions.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Function

[SYSTEM POWER] Range OFF, ON
>Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default ON Step ~
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 Select whether to use System Power monitoring.
[OFF/ON]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / +12V Pickup

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V
Function: ON
>+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.0 V Step 0.1 V
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00 Set a pickup value for +12V system power alarm.
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than
[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V] this setting, an alarm is generated.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec
Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 Set delay time of +12V system power alarm.
[ 0.01~10.00:0.01 s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / -12V Pickup

Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.0 V Step 0.1 V
Time Delay: 1.00
>-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00 Set a pickup value for -12V system power alarm.
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than
[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V] this setting, an alarm is generated.


Function: ON
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
>Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 Set delay time of -12V system power alarm.
[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Ref. V Pickup

Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default OFF Step 0.01 V
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00 Set a pickup value for reference voltage alarm.
>Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 If the error of the reference voltage measurement value deviates more
[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V] than this setting, an alarm is generated.

Function: ON
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
>Time Delay: 1.00 Set delay time of reference voltage alarm.
[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

7.1.3. Loop Control

The ETR300-R supports the LOOP CONTROL function when the controller type is set to
“RECLOSER”.
The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation
area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs.
Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID point
Recloser, TIE point Recloser.
Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage).
Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC)
When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates,
the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence, Sectionalizing
Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the
current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live
line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR Function is operated and the load
side is disconnected.
MIDpoint Recloser(MID)
When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing
Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault,
then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to Alternate setting,
when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During TIEpoint Recloser
closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After recovering the fault,
connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting
and MIDpoint Recloser is closed.
When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects the
load side.
TIEpoint Recloser (TIE)

TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV.
When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and lockouts.
TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side
and when both side becomes DV.

LCD Initial Screen

Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, is displayed on LCD Initial Screen.
Press [ENT] button to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.
Table 7-3. Initial Screen for Loop Control

INITIAL SCREEN
LOOP CONTROL <SEC> ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.

VS STATUS [LIVELINE]  SEC : Sectionalizing Recloser
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]  MID : Midpiont Recloser
AUTO RESTORE [ - ]  TIE : Tiepoint Recloser
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[P-1]
 NON : None Selected
LOOP CONTROL <ⓐ>  - : Since control type is selected as sectinalizer, auto loop control function
VS STATUS [LIVELINE] is not activated.
VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ]
VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ] VS STATUS: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
AUTO RESTORE [ - ]
S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[ⓑ-ⓒ] VL STATUS: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
VS LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to
the dead line of source side
VL LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to

the dead line of load side.
AUTO RESTORE : Displays auto restoring status after loop control

operation. It is only available when SEC and MID status.
 RUNNING : After returning to live line, timmer is running for automatic
reset
S-CNG : When loop control is operating, it can display the possibility of auto
set group change. It is only available when MID and TIE status.
S-GR : It indicats the currently applied set group.

ⓑ It indicates that when currently applied set group as primary(P) or
alternate(A) setting.
ⓒ It indicats the currently applied set group.

LOOP CONTROL Button

Use LOOP CONTROL button to use Loop control on User interface Panel.
LOOP CONTROL ENABLED

When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop
control function is enabled. LED ON Control is possible
only under the conditions as mentioned in “Table 7-6.
“LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control
Conditions”.
LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE

When “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED is ON,
auto restoration function is enabled. In auto restoration
Figure 7-4. Loop Control Button
function, “Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and
restores the preset values after the loop control operation.
LED ON Control of “LOOP CONTROL AUTO
RESTORE” is only possible when the "LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED" LED is ON in SEC and MID type.
Table 7-4. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions

Loop Control Setting
Recloser Status Remark
Function Type Select
ENABLE SEC CLOSE
ENABLE MID CLOSE
ENABLE TIE OPEN

7.1.3.1. Setting
Place the cursor on “LOOP CONTROL” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Function

[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Type Select : NONE Default DISABLE Step ~
>VRS to S/M : VS
>VRS to Tie : VS
>VS Wire: 3PN
Set whether to use loop control function.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select

[LOOP CONTROL] Range NONE, SEC, MID, TIE
>Function: DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE Default NONE Step ~
>VRS to S/M : VS
>VRS to TIE : VS Set whether to use Recloser type and loop control function.
>VS Wire: 3PN
After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp
[NONE/SEC/MID/TIE]
ON) to operate this function.
 NONE : Loop control is not in use.

 SEC : It is used for SECtionalizing recloser.
 MID : It is used for MIDpoint.
 TIE : It is used for TIEpoint.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M

[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
>Function: DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE Default VS Step ~
>VRS to S/M : VS
>VRS to TIE : VS Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used
>VS Wire: 3PN
in SEC, MID.
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to TIE

[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
>Function: DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE Default VS Step ~
>VRS to S/M : VS
>VRS to TIE : VS Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE.
>VS Wire: 3PN
TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
 VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load
side voltage becomes dead line voltage
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)
>Function: DISABLE
>Type Select : NONE Default 3PN Step ~
>VRS to S/M : VS
>VRS to Tie : VS Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage
>VS Wire: 3PN
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
CVD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.
 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)
>VL Wire: 3PN
Primary: GROUP1 Default 3PN Step ~
Alternate: GROUP2
Cng Alt-MID: OFF Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage
Cng Alt-TIE: OFF
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure
dead/live line voltage. Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for
CVD type Control S,T phase are not measured.
 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Primary

[LOOP CONTROL] Range GROUP 1 ~ GROUP 6
>VL Wire: 3PN
>Primary: GROUP1 Default GROUP 1 Step ~
Alternate: GROUP2
Cng Alt-MID: OFF Set which the number of group is primary setting for LOOP
Cng Alt-TIE: OFF
CONTROL function.
[OFF/ON]
When the LOOP CONTROL function is active, it is automatically
applied to the set goup of this setting. In case of SEC type, it is always
applied as the set group of this setting (applied as the primary setting).
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Alternate

[LOOP CONTROL] Range GROUP 1 ~ GROUP 6
>VL Wire: 3PN
Primary: GROUP3 Default GROUP 2 Step ~
>Alternate: GROUP4
Cng Alt-MID: OFF
Cng Alt-TIE: OFF Set which the number of group is alternate setting for LOOP
[OFF/VS/VL/BOTH] CONTROL function.
NOTE :
When the Loop Control function is activated, the “GROUP SELECT” command via the field
and remote control is not applied since the set group is applied by the ‘Primary’ and ‘Altrnate’
settings.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt - Mid

[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, ON
>VL Wire: 3PN
>Primary: GROUP1 Default OFF Step ~
Alternate: GROUP2
>Cng Alt-MID: OFF Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point :
Cng Alt-TIE: OFF
Select whether to use automatic setting change in MID type. Dead Line
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
status is remained for ‘Live Line TD’ time, setting group changes from
Primary setting group to Alternate setting group.
 OFF : Turn off auto change.

 ON : Turn on auto change.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt - Tie

[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, VS, VL, BOTH
>VL Wire: 3PN
Primary: GROUP1 Default OFF Step ~
>Alternate: GROUP2
>Cng Alt-MID: OFF Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE.
>Cng Alt-TIE: OFF
Select whether to use automatic setting change in TIE type. Dead Line
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
status is remained for ‘Live Line TD’ time, setting group changes from
Primary setting group to Alternate setting group.
 OFF : Turn off auto change.

 ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS(when VS is Dead
Line status).
 ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL(when VL is Dead
Line status).
 ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL(When
VS or VS is on the Dead Line status).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / LC After CL

>LC After CL:DISABLE
LC After OP:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
OT Both DL: 10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC or MID.
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is
coming from remote or local command. When Loop control function is
set to ENABLE, “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED on User
interface panel is turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not
automatically activated.(Use “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” to
manually activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / LC After OP

>LC After OP:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
OT Both DL: 10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE.
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
opened by manual operation. Manual open is referred when the
operation signal is coming from remote or local commnad. When Loop
control function is set to ENABLE, “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED”
LED on User interface panel is turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is not
automatically activated.(Use “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” to
manually activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>LC After OP:DISABLE Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>OT Both DL: 10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Open Time on Both Dead Line : Setting value is used in TIE.
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
After TIE closed, source and load side voltage become dead line for a
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
certain period, TIE opens by Loop control function.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest’ T

>LC After OP:DISABLE Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>OT Both DL: 10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID.
Dead Line Lv: 0.20
This is active when “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED on
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
User Interface Panel is enabled.
SEC operates Loop control (Automatic Open) if a voltage selected
from “VRS to S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage
becomes Live Line, a certain period (Auto Restoration Time) later,
restores (Automatic Close).
MID operate Loop control if a voltage selected form “VRS to S/M”

becomes dead line (when “Chg Alt-MID” is on, it automatically
changes to alternative Setting). After Loop control operated, When it
returns to the live line in the open state and remains for a certain period
(Auto Restoration Time), the MID re-restores (auto close and change to
primary setting).
The MID’s restore process looks like this:
A voltage selected form “VRS to S/M” becomes dead line and MID
operates.  TIE is closed and on operation fault is occurred and trip
lockout.  The voltage that is dead line is returned to the live line. 
MID is restored.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Dead Line Lv

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
LC After c1: ENABLE
LC After Op: ENABLE Default 0.20 Step 0.01 xVT
OT Both DL: 10.00
Auto Rest’ T: 10.00
>Dead Line Lv: 0.20
Set the dead line level to detect.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line Lv

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
>Live Line Lv: 0.70
Dead Line TD: 50.00 Default 0.70 Step 0.01 xVT
Live Line TD: 50.00
DL Reset TD: 5.00
RBT After LC: 5.00
Set the live line level to detect.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Dead Line TD

>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>Dead Line TD: 50.00 Default 50.00 Step 0.01 sec
Live Line TD: 50.00
DL Reset TD: 5.00 Dead Line Detection Time Delay: It is the delay time for detecting the
RBT After LC: 5.00
dead line in order to operate the SEC, MID and TIE recloser for loop
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
control. If the voltage is kept below 'Dead Line Level', it is considered
as dead line condition. If voltage is not recovered during 'Live Line
TD', loop control operation is performed
Dead Line TD Timer is a cumulate timer that counts the dead line time
when doing reclosing of the upper C / B or recloser. This timer does not
reset the accumulated count even if it becomes live line and it is reset
only by 'DL Reset TD' setting. The set time should be set to be equal to
or greater than the largest time of the sum of the reclosing times of the
upper C/B or recloser.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line TD

>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>Live Line TD: 50.00
DL Reset TD: 5.00 Live Line Detection Time Delay : This is the delay time for detecting
RBT After LC: 5.00
the Live Line. If the live line is not available for the preset time after
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
detection of the dead line status, the SEC, MID and TIE recloser are
loop controlled. For smooth loop control operation, the set time should
be set larger than the SEC setting value, and the MID setting value
should be set to be greater than the SEC setting value for each 5
seconds or more.
The loop control operation by this set time is as follows;

 SEC does open operation.
 In the case of MID, active set group is changed. (In the case of ‘Cng
Alt-MID’ setting is on)
 TIE does close operation, active set group is changed(In the case of
‘Cng Alt-TIE’ setting is on)

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line TD

>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>DL Reset TD: 5.00 Dead Line Reset Time : Dead Line Status and Dead Line TD 'Timer
RBT After LC: 5.00
reset time setting.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
In case of SEC, if the voltage which was in the dead line condition is
maintained over the set time longer than the 'Live Line Level', it is
considered as that the line has returned to normal and automatically
SEC is closed (In the case of that "LOOP CONTROL AUTO
RESTORE" LED is ON)
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / RBT After LC

>Live Line Lv: 0.70
>DL Reset TD: 5.00 Auto Reclosing Block Time after Loop Control Operation : Setting
>RBT After LC: 5.00
values are used in MID, TIE.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
This timer prevents from Auto Reclosing function when recloser
operates due to a fault after Loop control operation.
After ‘Live Line TD’ and changed Settings, while backward

distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set
time, MID recloser. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and
MID trips after a set time, auto reclosing is executed.
After ‘Live Line TD’, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set
time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips
after a set time, auto reclosing is executed.

7.1.3.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED Key
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED LED
Dead Line Lv Dead Line TD
DL Reset TD
Live Line TD
Live Line Lv
LOOP CONTROL
AUTO RESTORE Key
LOOP CONTROL
AUTO RESTORE LED
MANUAL OPEN
Figure 7-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic

LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED Key
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED LED
DL Reset TD
Live Line TD
Live Line Lv
RBT After LC
LOOP CONTROL LOOP CONTROL AUTO

AUTO RESTORE Key RESTORE LED
Figure 7-6. MID Point Recloser Logic

LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED Key
LOOP CONTROL
ENABLED LED
DL Reset TD
Live Line TD
Live Line Lv
Dead Line Lv
Live Line Lv
RBT After LC
Figure 7-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic

7.1.3.3. Loop Control Application

1) 5-Reclosers Loop Control
For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of
MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side
to SEC-MID-TIE.
In “Table 7-5. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for
CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side.
Table 7-5. 5-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 CB2
Type Select - SEC MID TIE MID SEC -
VRS to S/M - 

VS

VS
X 
VS

VS
-
VRS to Tie - X X VS&VL X X -
VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN -
VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -
Cng Alt-Mid - X ON X ON X -
Cng Alt-Tie - X X ON X X -
LC After CL - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -
LC After OP - - X ENABLE X - -
OT Both DL - X X 10.00 X X -
Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
Dead Line Lv(xVT) - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 -
Live Line Lv(xVT) - 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 -
Dead Line TD(sec) - 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 -
Live Line TD(sec) - 5.00 10.00 15.00 10.00 5.00 -
DL Reset TD(sec) - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
RBT After LC(sec) - X 10.00 10.00 10.00 X -
LOOP CONTROL
- ON ON ON ON ON -
ENABLED
LOOP CONTROL
- ON ON OFF ON ON -
AUTO RESTORE
Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.

5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Figure 7-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates.
“Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate.
To operate “Live Line TD” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time
set than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “Live Line TD” is enable,
SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to alternate set group setting.
Step3 : When “Live Line TD” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to alternate group setting
automatically, and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the
rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.
Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after Auto-
Restoration Time.
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to primary group setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When the line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD”
operates.
MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time.
MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “Live Line TD” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than MID.
When “Live Line TD” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to alternate group setting automatically.
Step3 : When “Live Line TD” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to
alternate group setting.
Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault.
F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to
alternate group setting after Auto Restoration Time.
Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to primary group setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When the line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD”
operates.
TIE(RC3) operate. When “Live Line TD” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to alternate group
setting automatically.
Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault.
distributing line.
Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3)
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous
normal line.

2) 3-Reclosers Loop Control

For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of
TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE.
In “Table 7-6. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1
side. And the source side bushings of RC3 is installed for CB2 side.
Table 7-6. 3-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 CB2
Type Select - SEC TIE SEC -
VRS to S/M - VS

X VS
-
VRS to Tie - X VS&VL X -
VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN -
VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -
Cng Alt-Mid - X X X -
Cng Alt-Tie - X ON X -
LC After CL - ENABLE X ENABLE -
LC After OP - - ENABLE - -
OT Both DL - X 10.00 X -
Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
Dead Line Lv(xVT) - 0.50 0.50 0.50 -
Live Line Lv(xVT) - 0.70 0.70 0.70 -
Dead Line TD(sec) - 22.0 22.0 22.0 -
Live Line TD(sec) - 5.00 10.00 5.00 -
DL Reset TD(sec) - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
RBT After LC(sec) - X 10.00 X -
LOOP CONTROL
- ON ON ON -
ENABLED
LOOP CONTROL
- ON OFF ON -
AUTO RESTORE
Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.

Figure 7-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates.
SEC, TIE has the same setting time.
SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “Live Line TD” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than SEC.
When “Live Line TD” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2)
automatically changes to alternate group setting and close.
distributing line.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto
Restoration Time.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

Figure 7-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated
time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates.
TIE(RC2) automatically changes to alternate group setting and close.
When closing TIE(RC2), TIE(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1).
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

7.1.4. Passcode
Place the cursor on “PASSCODE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
When entering to “PASSCODE” menu, Passcord 3 certification is necessary.
ETR300-R has 3 (three) Passcods, Passcords can be changed in this menu.
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and Passcode 2
is applied when communication setting is changed. Passcode 3 is applied when clearing or resetting
registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.
The setting range and the procedure for changing the three passcods are the same.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 ~3

[PASSCODE 1] Range 0000 ~ 9999
>PASSCODE 1: 0000
Default 0000 Step 1
Put Passcode 1.
[0000~9999:1]
7.1.5. PLC
Place the cursor on “PLC” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[PLC]
>1.LOGIC TIMER
2.PULS TIMER
3.PULS COUNT
4.INPUT PORTS
5.OUTPUT PORTS
6.LATCH LOGIG
7.1.5.1. LOGIC TIMER

Place the cursor on “LOGIC TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
 PLC has 8 logic timer.

 If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is
disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Fgure 7-13. Logic Timer
symbol”.
 X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.
 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM□.
 In PLC, B is output for TM□.

TM□
X
A B
Y
0s/0s
Figure 7-13. Logic Timer Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU

[LOGIC TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TM01-Pickup: 0.05
TM01-Dropout: 0.05 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
TM02-Pickup: 0.05
TM02-Dropout: 0.05
TM03-Pickup: 0.05
Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO

[LOGIC TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
TM01-Pickup: 0.05
>TM01-Dropout: 0.05 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
TM02-Pickup: 0.05
TM02-Dropout: 0.05
TM03-Pickup: 0.05
Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) TM02~TM08 are sam as TM01 above.
7.1.5.2. PULSE TIMER

Place the cursor on “PULSE TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
 PLC has 8 pulse timer.

 When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time.
Please refer to “Figure 7-14. Pulse Timer Symbol”
 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM□.
 In PLC, B is output for PTM□.

PTM□
A B
Y
0s
Figure 7-14. Pulse Timer Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE TIMER / PTM1

[PULSE TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>PTM01 Output: 0.01
PTM02 Output: 0.01 Default 0.01 Step 0.01 sec
PTM03 Output: 0.01
PTM04 Output: 0.01
PTM05 Output: 0.01
Set a output time of pulse timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) PTM02~PTM08 are sam as PTM01 above.
7.1.5.3. PULSE COUNTER

Place the cursor on “PULSE COUNTER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
 PLC has 8 pulse counters.

 Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it
reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and
increased count becomes 0. Please refer to “Fgure 7-15. Pulse Counter Symbol”.
 It can be checked counter value about Input A on “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/
COUNT/ USER COUNT” menu.
 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET□.
 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST□.
 In PLC, C is output for CLT□
CPC□
L
A TX Q C
B R
0
Figure 7-15. Pulse Counter Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE COUNTER / PTL01 Count

[PULSE TIMER] Range 1 ~ 60000
>CTL01 Count: 1000
CTL02 Count: 1000 Default 1 Step 1
CTL03 Count: 1000
CTL04 Count: 1000
CTL05 Count: 1000
Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).
[1~60000:1]
*. NOTE ) PTL02 Count~PTL08 Count are sam as PTL01 Count above.
7.1.5.4. INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS

Place the cursor on “INPUT PORTS” or “OUTPUT PORTS” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to
[INPUT PORTS] [OUTPUT PORTS]

>1.INPUT DEBOUNCE >1.OUTPUT PULSETIME
1) INPUT DEBOUNCE
Place the cursor on “INPUT DEBOUNCE” in INPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
 Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input.

 Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal.
 In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is
disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-16. Input Debounce
Timer Symbol”.
 In PLC, A is IN101~IN□ of Control Input, B is output for IN□.
IN□
X
A B
X
0s
Figure 7-16. Input Debounce Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / INPUT PORTS / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101

[INPUT DEBOUNCE] Range 0.005 ~ 300.000 sec
>IN101 : 0.020
IN102 : 0.020 Default 0.020 Step 0.001 sec
IN103 : 0.020
IN104 : 0.020
IN105 : 0.020
Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.
0.005~300.000:0.001s
*. NOTE ) ① IN102 ~ IN112 and IN201 ~ IN216 are the same as IN101 above.
② IN101 ~ IN112 are the SCADA input ports of the side panel, so the IN101 ~ IN112
settings do not apply unless the Scada I / O board is installed (‘SCADA I / O Use’
setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is
ON)
③ IN301 ~ IN308 are the same as IN101 above. If the ETIO10 unit is not installed, the
IN301 ~ IN308 settings will not be applied, since the IN301 ~ IN308 are external
input ports of the ETIO10 unit (‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting in the “GLOBAL SETTING/
GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON, it is applied)
2) Output Pulse Timer

Place the cursor on “OUTPUT PULSE TIME” in OUTPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to
 Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually.

 In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When
Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending
on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C
becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to “Figure 7-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol’.
 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT□.
 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT□.
 In PLC, C is output for OUT□ and this output operates RELAY.
OUT□
A
Y C
B R
0s
Figure 7-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101

[OUTPUT PULSE TIME] Range 0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec
>OUT101 : 0.50
OUT102 : 0.50 Default 0.50 Step 0.01 sec
OUT103 : 0.50
OUT104 : 0.50
OUT105 : 0.50
Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.
0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s
*. NOTE ) ① OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT216 are the same as OUT101 above.
② OUT101 ~ OUT108 is the scada output port of the side panel. Therefore, OUT101 ~
OUT108 settings are not applied unless the Scada I / O board is installed (‘SCADA
I/O Use’ setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION”
menu is ON)
③ OUT301 ~ OUT308 are the same as OUT101 above. OUT301 ~ OUT308 is the
external output port of the ETIO10 unit. If the ETIO10 unit is not installed, the
above OUT301 ~ OUT308 settings will not be applied (‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting in the
“GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON, it is
applied)
7.1.5.5. Latch Logic

Place the cursor on “LATCH LOGIC”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
 PLC has 8 latch logics.

 When input B is 0 and input A is 1 then output C is 1 and even when input A becomes 0,
output C does not become 0. When input B is 1 then output C becomes 0.
 A is input into user logic “LSET□”.
 B is input into user logic “LRST□”.
 C is output as “LT□”.
LT□
A S
Q C
B R
Figure 7-18. Latch Logic Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LATCH LOGIG / NV Function

[LATCH LOGIG] Range OFF, ON
>NV Function: OFF
Default OFF Step ~
Sets the non-volatility of the latch logic.
If set to ON, latch logic will remain set(‘1’) status by restarting
[OFF/ON]
ETR300-R.
But, when set to OFF, the set(‘1’) status of the latch logic is
cleared(‘0’) when ETR300-R restarts.
7.1.5.6. Oneshot Logic
 PLC has 8 oneshot logics.

 Each time input A is 1, output B outputs 1 Pulse. Even when input A is 1 continuously, output
B does not output.
 A is input into user logic “IOS□”.
 B is output as “OS□”.
OS□
A B
Figure 7-19. Oneshot Logic Symbol

7.1.5.7. PLC Setting Example

The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur
within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical
mapping, refer to “Table 7-7. Operator Symbols”.
Table 7-7. Operator Symbols

OPERATOR DESCRIPTION
* “AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.
+ “OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..
! “NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.
( ) - This operation is performed first.

1 - When outputting directly, the output is 1.
0 - When outputting directly, the output is 0.
- Buffer output.

PLC logic setting example is as follows;
If user wants pulse signal output at OUT101 port during Phase Time OverCurrent(Fast/Delay) fault
occurrence, set the PLC logic as the formula below.
Example: Logical Expression

1) ITM01 = 151P1T+151P2T+251P1T+251P2T
When any one of following : Phase Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault occurs, Logic Timer
01(TM01) is outputted. The Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic Timer 01 is set in
“GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ LOGIC TIMER” menu.
※. NOTE ) Time Over Current Element related Logic Bit designation
① 151P1T : (+) Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase
② 151P2T : (+) Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase
③ 251P1T : (-) Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase
④ 251P2T : (-) Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase
2) IOUT101 = TM01
Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output101 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse
Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in “GLOBAL
SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ OUTPUT PULSE TIME” menu.
3) BOUT101 = 0
As there is no block condition for Output101 port, 0 is always inputted.
The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as “Figure 7-20. OUT101 Output
Signal Logic Diagram”.
Logic Timer
151P1T Output Pulse Timer
151P2T X TM01
251P1T OUT101
Y
251P2T R Y
0s/0s
0.1s
0
Figure 7-20. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram

PLC Editting Example

As shown in “Figure 7-21. PLC Edit Screen”, input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen
operating program then upload PLC data to ETR300-R. For more info, consult “ETR300-R-600
ETIMS Interface Software User Manual”.
Logic Timer
151P1T
151P2T X TM01
251P1T
Y
251P2T
0s/0s
0
: : : :
: : : :
Figure 7-21. PLC Edit Screen
NOTE : 1. When editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.
2. When editing PLC logic, you can see the list of logic that can be input to the
equation by pressing the ‘F1’ key.

7.1.6. Device
Place the cursor on “DEVICE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[DEVICE]
>1.CONTROL TYPE
2.OPERATION TIME
3.H/W OPTION
4.GAS SENSOR
5.MANUAL CLOSE
6.LCD DISPLAY
7.PANEL SLEEP
8.TIME ZONE
9.OTHERS
10.FACTORY DEBUG
7.1.6.1. Control Type

Place the cursor on “CONTROL TYPE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE / Type
[CONTROL TYPE] Range RECLOSER, SECCTIONALIZER
>Type: RECLOSER
Default RECLOSER Step ~
Set the control type according to the installed body.
ETR-300R has two control types (Recloser and Sectionalizer type). The
[REC/SEC]
control type must be selected according to the installed body. If the
selected control type and the body type do not match, erroneous
operation or non-operating occurs.
The menu of the group setting to be applied depends on the control

type. When set to RECLOSER, “GROUP SETTING/ RECLOSER”
menu is applied and trip operation is performed in case of fault. When
set to SECTIONALIZER, "
“GROUP SETTING/ SECTIONALIZER”
menu is applied. In case of fault, only fault indication is performed and
trip operation is not performed.
For detailed application function according to control type, refer to “"3.
APPLICATION”.
NOTE : Be sure to set the control type according to the

characteristics of the main body. Otherwise, the ETR300-R will
not only operate normally, but it will also cause demage to the
mainframe.

7.1.6.2. CB Operation Time

Place the cursor on “OPERATION TIME” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu. In this menu, the operation time of thet tank is set. The time set in this menu is used to
compensate the T-C curve trip time and reclosing time.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Open Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.000 ~ 1.000 sec
>Open Time: 0.026
Close Time: 0.050 Default 0.026 Step 0.001 sec
OP Fail Time: 1.00
CL Fail Time: 1.00 Set actual circuit breaker’s opening time.
Circuit breaker’s complete opening time is calculated as follows.
[0.000~1.000:0.001s]
Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time

+ CB Trip Time
(CB Opening Time + Arcing Time)
*. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ERT300-R is 1.00sec

and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s
Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The
difference between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec
needs to be set for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time
compensates CB Trip Time.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Close Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.000 ~ 10.000 sec
>Open Time: 0.026
>Close Time: 0.050 Default 0.050 Step 0.01
OP Fail Time: 1.00
CL Fail Time: 1.00
Set actual circuit breaker’s closing time.

[0~10.000:0.001s]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ OP Fail Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.05~100.00 sec
Open Time: 0.026
>OP Fail Time: 1.00
CL Fail Time: 1.00
[0.05~100.00:0.01 s] Set fail time for decision Circuit Breaker’s opening operation fail.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ CL Fail Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.05~100.00 sec
Open Time: 0.026
OP Fail Time: 1.00
>CL Fail Time: 1.00
[0.000~1.000:0.001s] Set fail time for decision Circuit Breaker’s closing operation fail.
7.1.6.3. H/W Option

Place the cursor on “H/W OPTION” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
In this menu, set the H / W option of ETR300-R. Unlike the actual options, if set, the item may
behave incorrectly.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / SCADA I/O Use

[H/W OPTION] Range OFF, ON
>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF Default ON Step ~
>TD Input Use: OFF
>IRIG Use: OFF Select whether the SCADA I/O board is installed.
>Wifi Use: OFF
When set to OFF, input / output control of IN101 ~ IN112 and OUT101
[OFF/ON]]
~ OUT108 ports is disabled and port stauts is always “OFF”.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / EX. I/O Use

>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>EXT. I/O Use: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>TD Input Use: OFF
>IRIG Use: OFF Select whether the external I/O unit ETIO10 is installed.
>Wifi Use: OFF
[OFF/ON]]
When set to OFF, the following applies;
 Input / output control of IN301 ~ IN308 and OUT301 ~ OUT308
ports is disabled and port status is always “OFF”
 External TD is measured always as 0.
 Monitor function doesn’t work about External TD input port.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / TD Input Use

>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>TD Input Use: OFF
>IRIG Use: OFF Select whether the TD(DC) input boad is installed.
>Wifi Use: OFF
[OFF/ON]]
When set to OFF, the following applies;
 TD is measured always as 0.
 Monitor function doesn’t work about TD input port.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use

>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>TD Input Use: OFF
>IRIG Use: OFF
>Wifi Use: OFF Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is
[OFF/ON]] installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / Wifi Use

>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>TD Input Use: OFF
>IRIG Use: OFF
>Wifi Use: OFF
Select whether the wifi is installed.
[OFF/ON]]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / EXT. Temper’ Use

>EXT. I/O Use: OFF
>TD Input Use: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>IRIG Use: OFF
>Wifi Use: OFF
>EXT.Temper’ Use:OFF
Select whether the external temperature is installed.
[OFF/ON]]

7.1.6.4. GAS Sensor Type

Place the cursor on “GAS SENSOR” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / GAS SENSOR

[GAS SENSOR] Range NONE, INSTALL
>Sensor: NONE
Opr’ Block GPF; OFF Default NONE Step ~
Set whether the gas sensor of the main body is installed or not.
[NONE/INSTALL] Set to INSTALL when the main body is a gas type, and set to NONE
if it is a polymer type.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / Opr’ Block GPF

[GAS SENSOR] Range ON, OFF
>Sensor: NONE
>Opr’ Block GPF; OFF Default OFF Step ~
In case of gas pressure failure (pressure low or high), it sets whether
or not the close operation block.
[OFF/ON]
This setting is applied only when the above 'Sensor' setting is
INSTALL.
7.1.6.5. Manual Close

Place the cursor on “MANUAL CLOSE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / MANUAL CLOSE / Time Delay

[MANUAL CLOSE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Using the CLOSE button on the front panel, set the closing delay time
to be applied to the main body when the close control is performed in
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
the field.
When OPEN button is pressed during close delay time, the delay timer
will stop and close operation will not be performed.
If the CLOSE button is pressed again during the close delay time, the
close operation is immediately done even if the delay time remains.

7.1.6.6. LCD Display

Place the cursor on “LCD Display” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
In this menu, items related to the LCD screen display method of the front panel are set.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Date Disp’ Type

[LCD DISPLAY] Range YMD, MDY
>Date Disp’type: MDY
Init Main Screen: 2 Default MDY Step ~
Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
Set the display type of the date displayed on the LCD screen such as
the event menu.
[YMD/MDY]
 YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date

 MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Init Main Screen

[LCD DISPLAY] Range 1~8
>Init Main Screen: 2 Default 2 Step 2
Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
The ETR300-R has 8 initial screens. Set the main screen of 8 initial
screens. The set screen is displayed for the first time after booting or
[1~8:1]
deviating from main menu, when sleep mode is released.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Flt Pop-up Msg

[LCD DISPLAY] Range OFF, ON
>Init Main Screen: 2 Default OFF Step ~
>Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
Set whether to display the fault pop-up screen when a fault occurs.
[OFF/ON] The fault pop-up screen is shown in “"Table 7-8. Fault Pop-up Screen”.

Table 7-8. Fault Pop-up Screen

FAULT POP-UP SCREEN
[ALERT] FAULT INFO

① Fault sequence (shot count) is indicated
② Indicate fault target
SEQ: 1 ABCNSQ
TYPE: 51  A, B, C : each phase fault (Phase fault)
A: 00000 B: 00000  N : Ground fault
C: 00000 N: 00000
Q: 00000 S: 00.00  Q : Negative Sequence fault
2017/01/01 00:00:00
 S : Senstive Earth Fault
③ Indicate fault element
[ALERT] FAULT INFO
 - : Sectionalizer type, Fault Indication
SEQ: ① ②
TYPE: ③  51 : Time Overcurrent Trip
A: ④ B: ④  50 : Insantaneous Overcurrent Trip or Insantaneous Overcurrent Lockout

C: ④ N: ④
 27 : Under Voltage Trip
Q: ④ S: ④
⑤  59 : Over Voltage Trip
 64 : Neutral Over Voltage Trip
 81 : Under Frequency, Over Frequency or Frequency Decay Trip
 32 : Forward Power or Direction Power Trip
 46 : Broken Conduct Trip
 D : Demand Trip
 21 : Z0 Admitance Trip
 47 : Negative Sequence Over Voltage Trip
④ Indicate each phase and negative sequence, S.E.F fault current
⑤ Indicate fault current occurring time
*. Whenever fault is occurred, fault pop-up screen is accumulated, the latest

fault screen is displayed at first.
*. Using [ENT] button, accumulated fault pop-up screen is checked.
*. Using [ESC] button, you can clear the pop-up screen without checking all
fault pop-up screens.

7.1.6.7. Panel Sleep Time

Place the cursor on “PANEL SLEEP” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Sleep Time

[PANEL SLEEP] Range OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
>Sleep Time: OFF
Awake Method: BOTH Default 5 Step 1 min
Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key
[0(OFF),1~100:1m]
operation on interface panel, ETR300-R goes into sleep mode.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method

[PANEL SLEEP] Range KEY, DOOR, BOTH
Sleep Time: OFF
>Awake Method: BOTH Default BOTH Step -
This setting value is affected to display wake-up method
[KEY/DOOR/BOTH]
 DOOR : Using door pin attached on the control door, when the
door is open, the control panel is awaken from sleep mode.
 KEY : When “AWAKE” key button on the front panel is pushed, the
control panel is awaken from sleep mode.
 BOTH : DOOR and KEY are all used.

7.1.6.8. Time Zone

Place the cursor on “TIME ZONE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time
Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module
option is installed.
Select standard time zone for user county. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synchronization by
Time Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Sign

[TIME ZONE] Range +, -
>GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default + Step -
GMT Offset-Min: 0
Time SyncType: GMT
Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction.
[+/-]
Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Hour

[TIME ZONE] Range 0~23 hour(s)
GMT Offset-Sign: +
>GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default 9 Step 1 hour
GMT Offset-Min: 0
Time SyncType: GMT
Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time.
[0~23:1hr]
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Min

[TIME ZONE] Range 0~59 min
GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default 0 Step 1 min
>GMT Offset-Min: 0
Time SyncType: GMT
[0~59:1min] Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.
NOTE : Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00);
Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0
The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type.

NOTE :
If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be
happened as follows.
- If the "Time Sync Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in ETR300-R
can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
- If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event
transmitted is not correct.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type

[TIME ZONE] Range LOCAL, GMT
GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default GMT Step ~
GMT Offset-Min: 0
>Time SyncType: GMT
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized
[LOCAL/GMT] with Time Synchronization module.
NOTE :
In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if “IRIG Use” setting is set
with "NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION” menu, the
time synchronization module is not able to be used.
7.1.6.9. Others
Place the cursor on “OTHERS” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Count Use

[OTHERS] Range OFF, ON
>16bit Count Use:OFF
16bit Ener’ Use:OFF Default ON Step ~
Set the count data format that ETR300-R registed.
[OFF/ON]
 OFF : Use 32bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000.
 ON : Use 16bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Ener’ Use

>16bit Count Use:OFF
16bit Ener’ Use:OFF Default ON Step ~
Set the energy data format that the ETR300-R registed.
[OFF/ON]
 OFF : Use 32bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled
over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 999,999,999.
 ON : Use 16bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled
over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 60,000.
7.1.6.10. Factory Debug

This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.
7.1.7. Save Setting

From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GENERAL menu. The procedure
for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

7.2. Communication
Place the cursor on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has sub-
menu as below.
[COMMUNICATION]
>1.PROTOCOLS
2.PORTS
3.DIALUP MODEM
4.FTP-SSL
5.WIFI
6.EVENT&ETC
*.SAVE SETTINGS
saved message’.
7.2.1. Protocol Setup

Place the cursor on “PROTOCOL SETUP” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETR300-R is set and it has sub-menus as below.
[PROTOCOLS]
>1.DNP3
2.IEC60870-5
3.MODBUS
4.IEC61850
5.SNTP
6.SNMP
7.ETIMS
8.MULTI-BIT
ETR300-R supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104, MODBOUS, IEC61850, SNTP,

SNMP, ETIMS and Multi-Bit Communication protocol. This menu may be changed depending on
User’s request. Each protocol setting details are as below.

7.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup

1) DNP3 Slave 1 and DNP3 Slave 2
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/
DNP3 S1 or DNP3 S2” to select setting for DNP3 Protocol.
Setting items of “DNP3 SLAVE 1” and “DNP3 SLAVE 2” menu are same as following;
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Function

Range DISABLE, ENABLE
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries: 0
[DISABLE/ENABLE] To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / COM Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETH1, ETH2
Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1 Default RS232-1 Step ~
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries: 0
Select DNP3 communication port.
[PORT1~PORT5]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Confirm

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range NO, YES, SOME
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default SOME Step ~
>D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100 Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.
D/L Retries: 0
 NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.
[NO/YES/SOME]
 YES : Data Link Confirm is used.
 SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.
When Data Link Confirm is used, it shall be set same as the Host
setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication
may be failed due to Data Link Reset.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L FrameDly

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 5000 msec
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 100 Step 10 msec
D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L FrameDly: 100 Set Data Link frame Delay Time.
D/L Retries: 0
In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time
[0~5000:10ms]
when multi-frame occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Retries

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0~ 2
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 0 Step 1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
>D/L Retries: 0 Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
[0~2:1] layer.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
Port Select: PORT1
D/L Confirm: SOME Default 10 Step 1 sec
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries: 0 Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive
>D/L Timeout: 10
Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm
[1~255:1s]
receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETR300-R will send Data
Link Frame again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Retries

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 255
>A/L Retries: 0
A/L Timeout: 30 Default 0 Step 1
Master Addr: 60000
Slave Address: 1
SBO Timeout: 15
Enter the number of retries of retransmission of unsol message
[1~255:1s]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1~ 255 sec
>A/L Retries: 0
>A/L Timeout: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address: 1 Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive Application layer
>SBO Timeout: 15
Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is
[1~255:1s]
requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master
Application.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master Address

A/L Retries: 15
A/L Timeout: 30 Default 60000 Step 1
>Master Addr: 60000
Slave Address: 1
SBO Timeout: 15
Enter the master station address.
[0~65534:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Slave Address

>A/L Retries: 15
>A/L Timeout: 30 Default 1 Step 1
Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address: 15
>SBO Timeout: 15
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address.
[0~65534:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SBO Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>A/L Retries: 15
>A/L Timeout: 30 Default 15 Step 1 sec
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address: 15 Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If
>SBO Timeout: 15
there is no operation command during set time, Select command is
[1~255:1s]
cancelled.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Init Unsol

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
Unsol Time: 5 Default ENABLE Step ~
Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Class1: ENABLE Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.
Class2: ENABLE
 ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
transferred.
 DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
not transferred.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol Time

Range 0 ~ 60 sec
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Init Unsol: ENABLE Default 5 Step 1 sec
>Unsol Time: 5
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1: ENABLE
>Class2: ENABLE Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is occurred.
[0~60:1s] Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within the time.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 /Unsol Type

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range NOTRIG, PERIOD
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time: 5 Default NOTRIG Step -
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Class1: ENABLE Set the method to Unsolicited Message.
Class2: ENABLE
[NOTRIG/PERIOD]
 NOTRG: If there is no event occurrence during setting unsolicited
time after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted.
 PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event
data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing
when the first event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 1

>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time: 5 Default ENABLE Step ~
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1: ENABLE
Class2: ENABLE Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
[DISABLE/ENABLE] that Class 1 event is occurred.

>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time: 5 Default ENABLE Step ~
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1: ENABLE
>Class2: ENABLE Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case

>Class3: ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default ENABLE Step ~
TCP Port: 20000
UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0 Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/UDP Select

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range TCP, UDP
>Class3: ENABLE
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default TCP Step ~
TCP Port: 20000
UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.
[TCP/UDP]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP Port

>Class3: ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default 20000 Step 1
>TCP Port: 20000
UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300-R for TCP communication.
[1~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / UDP Port

>Class3: ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default 20001 Step 1
TCP Port: 20000
>UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300-R for UDP communication.
[1~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master IP Oct 1~4
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Range 0 ~ 255
>Master IP Oct1: 0
Master IP Oct2: 0
Default 0* Step 1
Master IP Oct3: 0
Master IP Oct4: 0
Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
[0~255:1] ① ② ③ ④
Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according o

the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / K-Alv Check Tm

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
>Master IP Oct4: 0
>K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default 4 Step 1sec
Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m): OFF
Retry Type: REGEN Set the time period that checks the communication connecting status
[O(OFF),1~600:1s] during the idle status.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Fragment Size

>Master IP Oct4: 0
>K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default 2048 Step 1
>Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m): OFF
Retry Type: REGEN
Set the size of DNP fragment.
[64~2048:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Time Req(m)

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
>Master IP Oct4: 0
K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default OFF Step 1
Fragment Size: 2048
>Time Req(m): OFF
Retry Type: REGEN Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
[0(OFF),1~30000:1] received from master station.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Retry Type

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range IDENT, REGEN
>Master IP Oct4: 0
K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default REGEN Step ~
Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m): OFF
>Retry Type: REGEN
Set the Retry Type(Indentical, Regenerated).
[REGEN/IDENT]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SA Func

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range DISABLE, SAv2, SAv5
>SA Func: DISABLE
TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Unsol off TO: OFF
Set whether DNP Secure Authenitication is used i.e, SAv2, SAv5 or not
[DISABLE/SAv2/SAv5]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/IP TLS

SA Func: DISABLE
>TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Unsol off TO: OFF
Set the DNP TCP/IP Transport Layer Security is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol off TO

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0(OFF), 0~65535 sec
SA Func: DISABLE
TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE Default OFF Step 1 sec
>Unsol off TO: OFF
Set final confirmation timeout period.
When unsolicited message transmit is failed, the transmittion retries
[0(OFF),0~65535:1s]
repeat. After final retry is done, it waits during this set time and then
another unsolicited response series will be started.
2) DNP3 Protocol Common

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/
COMMON” menu. This setting is applied to the DNP3 Save 1 and DNP3 Save 2 protocols.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BI Obj1 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 0~2
>BI Obj1 Var : 1
BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 1 Step 1
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Set Variation of Binary Input Object 01
[0(NONE), 0~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BO Obj10 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2
BI Obj1 Var : 1
>BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 2 Step 1
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Set Variation of Binary Output Object 10
[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ CI Obj20 Var

BI Obj1 Var : 1
BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 4 Step -
>CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Set Variation of Countr Object 20
[NONE/1/2/5/6]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/COMMON/FRZ Obj21 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10
BI Obj1 Var : 1
CI Obj20 Var : 4
>FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Set Variation of Frozen Countr Object 21
[NONE/1/2/5/6/9/10]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ AI Obj30 Var

BI Obj1 Var : 1
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
>AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Set Variation of Analog Input Object 30
[0(NONE), 0~4:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ AO Obj40 Var

BI Obj1 Var : 1
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
>AO Obj40 Var : 2 Set Variation of Analog Output Object 40
[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

7.2.1.2. IEC60870-5 Protocol Setup

1) IEC60870-5-101
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC60870-
5/ IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-5-101.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function

[IEC870-5-101] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default DISABLE Step ~
Link Address 1
ASDU Address 0
Cyclic Period 60
Set whether IEC60870-5-101 protocol is used for communcation.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COM Port

[IEC870-5-101] Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1 Default RS232-1 Step ~
Link Address: 1
ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
[PORT1-PORT3]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address

[IEC870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 65535
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1 Default 1 Step 1
>Link Address: 1
ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60 Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address for IEC60870-5-101 comm-
[1~65535:1] unication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~65535
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 0 Step 1
Link Address: 1
>ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
[1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1~60000 sec
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 60 Step 1 sec
Link Address: 1
ASDU Address: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Select the Cyclic Period.
[0(OFF),1~60000:1s] It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 0~255 sec
>Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 15 Step 1sec
Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10
ASDU Addr Size: 2 Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
[0~255:1s] events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/D/L Retries

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 0 ~ 255
>Event Period: 15
>D/L Retries: 0 Default 0 Step 1
Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10
ASDU Addr Size: 2
Set the number of Data retry.
[0~255:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 10 Step 1 sec
>Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10
ASDU Addr Size: 2 Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after
[1~255:1s]
transfer the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time
and Data retries is available, ETR300-R transfers the Data again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 10 Step 1 sec
Conf.Timeout: 10
>Max Poll Time: 10
ASDU Addr Size: 2
Set the Data Polling period time.
[1~255:1s]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ADSUAddr Size

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 1~2
Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 2 Step 1
Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10
>ASDU Addr Size: 2
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
[1~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Confirm

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NEVER, ALWAYS
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default ALWAYS Step ~
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
[NEVER/ALWAYS]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Addr Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
>Link Addr Size: 1 Default 1 Step 1
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the size of link address.
[1~2:1]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default 261 Step 1
>Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
[0~261:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 255 sec
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default 15 Step 1 sec
Rx Frame Size: 261
>Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261 Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
[0(OFF),0~255:1s] receiving the frame sync.

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default 261 Step 1
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
>Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
[0~261:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COT Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 1 Step 1
One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout: 5
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
[1~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ IOA Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~3
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 2 Step 1
One Ch Response: NO
Select Timeout: 5
Enter the size of information object address.
[1~3:1]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ One Ch Response

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NO, YES
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default NO Step ~
>One Ch Response: NO
Select Timeout: 5 This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length
[NO/YES] NACK when no response data available.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Fram Repet’TO

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 0~255sec
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 30 Step 1 sec
One Ch Response: NO
>Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout: 5 Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application
[0(OFF),0~255:1s] layer timeout).

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Select Timeout
[IEC60870-5-101]
Range 0(OFF), 0~255
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2
Default 5 Step 1 sec
One Ch Response: NO
>Select Timeout: 5
[0(OFF),0~255:1]
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CMD Termination

>CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
[NO/YES] commands other than set point commands.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CSE Termination

CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
[NO/YES] point commands.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Clock Sync’Evt

CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSPTime-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
[NO/YES]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MSPTime-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default CP56 Step ~
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
CMD Termination:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56/CP24]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default CP56 Step ~
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
[CP56/CP24]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Flt Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
[CP56/CP24]
2) IEC60870-5-104
5/ IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-5-104.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function
[IEC870-5-104]
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select: ETH1
ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0): 120
Set whether IEC60870-5-104 protocol is used for communcation.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Port Select

[IEC870-5-104] Range ETH1, ETH2
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select: ETH1 Default ETH1 Step ~
ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0): 120
Select IEC60870-5-104 communication port.
[ETH1/ETH2]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~65535
Function: DISABLE
>Port Select: ETH1 Default 0 Step 1
>ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0): 120
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
[1~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0(OFF), 1~60000 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Port Select: ETH1 Default 60 Step 1 sec
ASDU Address: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0): 120 Select the Cyclic Period.
[0(OFF),1~60000:1s] It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Port Select: ETH1 Default 120 Step 1
ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
>Timeout(t0): 120
Select the Timeout for connection establishment.
[1~255:1s]

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 15 Step 1
Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.
[1~255:1s]


[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
Time Out(t1): 15
Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404 Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message
[1~255:1s] ( t2<t1).

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
Time Out(t1): 15
Time Out(t2): 10 Default 20 Step 1
>Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
[1~255:1s]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~255 sec
Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 15 Step 1sec
Time Out(t2): 20
>Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404 Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
[0~255:1s] events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~65535
Time Out(t1): 15
Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
>TCP Port: 2404 Set the TCP/IP Port of ETR300 for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
[1~65535:1] communication.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
[0~255:1]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
[0~255:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ SBO Timeout

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0(OFF), 0~255
Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 5 Step 1sec
>SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
[0(OFF),0~255:1]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CMD Termination

Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default YES Step ~
SBO Timeout: 5
CSE Termination:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
[NO/YES] commands other than set point commands.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CSE Termination

Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default YES Step ~
SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
[NO/YES] point commands.
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Clock Sync’Evt

>CSE Termination:YES
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Default YES Step ~
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
MME Time-Tag: CP56
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
[NO/YES]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MSPTime-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56/CP24]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MIT Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
CMD Termination:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56/CP24]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
k(Max Tx): 12
w(Max Rx): 8 Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
[CP56/CP24]
GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Flt Time-Tag
[IEC60870-5-104]
Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56
Default CP56 Step ~
k(Max Tx): 12
w(Max Rx): 8
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
[CP56/CP24]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ k(Max Tx)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1 ~ 32767
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default 12 Step 1
>k(Max Tx): 12
>w(Max Rx): 8
Set the maximum difference receive sequence number to send state
[ 1~32767:1 ] variable.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ w(Max Rx)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1 ~ 32767
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default 8 Step 1
>k(Max Tx): 12
>w(Max Rx): 8
Set the atest acknowledge after receiving w I format APDUs.

[ 1~32767:1 ]
3) IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104 Common

5/ COMMON” to select setting for common requirement of IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-
104.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MPS Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MSP Start: 1000
MDP Start: 1500 Default 1000 Step 1
MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Single-point Information for IEC60870-5-
[0~65535:1] 101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MDP Start

>MSP Start: 1000
>MDP Start: 1500 Default 1500 Step 1
MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Double-point Information for IEC60870-5-
[0~65535:1] 101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENA Start

>MSP Start: 1000
>MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Measured Value, Normalized Value for
[0~65535:1] IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENB Start

>MSP Start: 1000
>MDP Start: 1500 Default 2500 Step 1
MMENA Start: 2000
>MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Measured Value, Scaled Value for IEC60870-5-
[0~65535:1] 101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENC Start

>MSP Start: 1000
MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
>MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Measured Value, Short Floating Point Number
[0~65535:1] for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMEND Start

>MMEND Start: 6000
MIT Start: 3000 Default 6000 Step 1
CSC Start: 21000
CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Measured value, Normalized Value without
[0~65535:1] Quality Desctiptor for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / MIT Start

>MMEND Start: 6000
>MIT Start: 3000 Default 3000 Step 1
CSC Start: 21000
CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Integrated Totals for IEC60870-5-101/104
[0~65535:1] protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / CSC Start

>MMEND Start: 6000
>CSC Start: 21000
CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Single Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
[0~65535:1] protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CDC Start

>MMEND Start: 6000
CSC Start: 21000
>CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Double Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
[0~65535:1] protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON / CSEMA Start

>MIT Start: 3000
CSC Start: 21000 Default 26000 Step 1
CDC Start: 32000
>CSEMA Start: 26000
Set the start address of Set-point Command, Normalized Value for
[0~65535:1] IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CSEMB Start
[COMMON]
Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
Default 27000 Step 1
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Set-point Command, Scaled Value for
[0~65535:1]
IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENA Start
[COMMON]
Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values,
[0~65535:1] Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENB Start
[COMMON]
Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values, Scaled
[0~65535:1]
Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENC Start
[COMMON]
Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating
[0~65535:1]
Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENC Start
[COMMON]
Range MODE B , MODE D
PMENA Start: 10000
PMENB Start: 12000
Default MODE B Step -
PMENC Start: 14000
>MIT Mode : MODE B
Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating
[MODE B/MODE D] Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.
7.2.1.3. MODBUS Protocol Setup

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MODBUS/ Function

[MODBUS] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default DISABLE Step ~
Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Port Select

[MODBUS] Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETH1, ETH2
Function: DISABLE
>Port Select: RS485 Default RS485 Step ~
Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Select MODBUS communication port.
[PORT1 – PORT5]

GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Slave Address

[MODBUS] Range 1 ~ 254
Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default 1 Step 1
>Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address
[1~254:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS / TX Delay

[MODBUS] Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default 0.05 sec Step 0.01
Slave Address: 1
>TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Set TCP port number of ETR300-R.
[0(OFF),0.00~300s]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS /TCP/UDP select

[MODBUS] Range TCP, UDP
Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default TCP Step 1
Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Select to use between TCP and UDP.
[TCP/UDP]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ TCP Port

[MODBUS] Range 1 ~ 65535
>TCP Port: 502
>UDP Port: 503 Default 502 Step 1
Enter the Modbus address for TCP Port.

[1~65535:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ UDP Port

[MODBUS] Range 1~65535
TCP Port: 502
>UDP Port: 503 Default 503 Step 1
Enter the Modbus address for UDP Port.

[1~65535:1]

7.2.1.4. IEC61850 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC61850 through Ethernet
ports(Eth1 or Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/

IEC61850” to select setting for IEC61850 Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Function

[IEC61850]
>Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Goose Msg’: DISABLE
Select whether to use IEC 61850 Protocol.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Goose Msg’

[IEC61850] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
>Goose Msg’: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Select whether to use GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation

[DISABLE/ENABLE] Event).
7.2.1.5. SNTP Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the SNTP through Ethernet ports(Eth1
and Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNTP” to

select setting for SNTP Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP/ Function

[SNTP] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
T-S Period: 3600 Default DISABLE Step ~
SNTP IP 1: 0
SNTP IP 2: 0
SNTP IP 3: 0
Select whether to use SNTP Protocol for Time Synchronization.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / T-S Period

[SNTP] Range 1~60000
Function: DISABLE
>T-S Period: 3600 Default 3600 Step 1
SNTP IP 1: 0
SNTP IP 2: 0
SNTP IP 3: 0 Enter the time period for requesting time synchronization with the time
[0~60000:1s] server.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / SNTP IP 1 ~4

[SNTP] Range 0~255
Function: DISABLE
T-S Period: 3600 Default 0 Step 1
>SNTP IP 1: 0
SNTP IP 2: 0
SNTP IP 3: 0
Enter the IP Address 1~4 for SNTP server.
[0~255:1]
7.2.1.6. SNMP Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the SNMP through Ethernet ports(Eth).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNMP” to

select setting for SNMP Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Function

[SNMP] Range DISABLE / ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Accept PW: 00000000 Default DISABLE Step ~
Set whether SNMP Protoctol Function is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE] This setting supports SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Accept PW

Range 0~z
[SNMP]
Function: DISABLE Default 0 Step ~
>Accept PW: 00000000
Set the accept password of SNMP Protoctol for SNMPv3, only.

[0~Z]

7.2.1.7. ETIMS Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be setup for communication with interface software ETIMS through Serial
ports(RS232-1 or RS232-2) or Ethernet ports(Eth1 or Eth2).
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ ETIMS”.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ TCP Port No

Range 30000 ~ 40000
[ETIMS]
>TCP Port No: 30000 Default 30000 Step 1
Serial Func: OFF
Serial Port:RS232-1
Set the number of TCP Port for ETIMS Inteface Software.

[30000~40000:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial Func

Range OFF, ON
[ETIMS]
TCP Port No: 30000 Default ON Step ~
>Serial Func: OFF
Serial Port:RS232-1
Set whether to use ETIMS through serial port.

[OFF/ON]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial port

Range RS232-1, RS232-2
[ETIMS]
TCP Port No: 30000 Default RS232-1 Step ~
Serial Func: OFF
>Serial Port:RS232-1
Select Serial Communication Port for ETIMS

[RS232-1/RS232-2]

7.2.1.8. Multi-Bit Protocol

Multi-Bit communication protocol is a protocol used for Peer-to-Peer communication between the
ETR300-R. The exchange of digital information between the ETR300-R (Fault event information
and interlock information, Open/Close status information, etc.) makes it possible in real time to
apply an advanced protection coordination such as isolation of the fault section and self-healing.
ETR300-R has two Multi-Bit Protocol (Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit-B) in order to transmit and
receive individually with Upstream and Downstream device.
Multi-Bit communication protocol is transmitted and received continuously in real-time messages
in each predetermined period, and transmits the message according to a communication
transmission period setting.
Features of the Multi-Bit communication protocol

 CRC checking, ID checking, status checking and debounce check of each bit through step-by-
step to increase accuracy.
 It makes distinguish communication error types and configure the corresponding methods and
procedures of the respective error.
 It can be checked correctly communication status through communication status test which
uses communication data frame.
1) Communication Connection
The ETR300-R can accept Multi-Bit Protocol Communication with the maximum two ETR300-R
through two Multi-Bit Protocol(Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit B).
Each Multi-Bit Protocol is exchanging in real time Receiving Date 8 bit and Transmitting Date 8
bit with connected ETR300-R. Each Multi-Bit Protocol can select transmitted ID(Tx ID) and the
received ID(Rx ID). Tx ID must be same to the peer Rx ID, Rx ID must be same to the peer Tx ID.
It will be detected correct communication connection through Tx ID and Rx ID.
ETR300-R #1 ETR300-R #2 ETR300-R #3

Rx
Rx ID
ID =
= 11 Rx
Rx ID
ID =
= 22 Rx
Rx ID
ID =
= 33 Rx
Rx ID
ID =
= 44
Tx
Tx ID
ID =
= 22 Tx
Tx ID
ID =
= 11 Tx
Tx ID
ID =
= 44 Tx
Tx ID
ID =
= 33
B A A B B A
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx
Multi-Bit Multi-Bit Multi-Bit
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx
*. Rx : Receiving Data (8 bit), Tx : Transmitting Data (8 bit)

Figure 7-22. Multi-Bit Communication Protocol Communication Connection

For example, in Figure 7-22, ETR300-R #2 can communicate with ETR300-R #1 using Multi-Bit A
protocol, and can communicate with ETR300-R #3 using Multi-Bit B protocol. (ETR300-R #1 can
communicate using Multi-Bit A protocol, ETR300-R #3 uses Mult-Bit B protocol)
It means that, Mult-Bit A protocol’s Rx ID on ETR300-R #1 and Mult-Bit A protocol’s Tx ID on
ETR300-R #2 must be same, Tx ID and Rx ID have to be equal. Rx ID and Tx ID of Multi-Bit B
protocol on ETR300-R #2 have to be same to the peer things.
The Multi-Bit Protocol checks whether there is communication error by checking error such as
CRC error, ID error and reception error on received data. If a communication error is detected, the
received data is ignored. If the received data is recovered to normal, data transmission / reception
proceeds normally. When occurring CRC error, ID error and reception error, ETR300-R records the
event and supports the corresponding BI point, so that the master station can monitor the
information by remote communication.
2) PLC Configuration Example

The logic names for 8 bits of reception data and 8 bits of transmit data of Multi-Bit Protocol are as
follows. Each bit of data is recorded as an event when set ('1') and clear ('0'), and BI point is
supported for each data bit, so that information about each bit state can be transmitted to the master
station by remote communication.
 Multi-Bit A Protocol
 Reception bit name : RMBA01 ~ RMBA08
 Transmission bit name : TMBA01 ~ TMBA08
 Multi-Bit B Protocol
 Reception bit name : RMBB01 ~ RMBB08
 Transmission bit name : TMBB01 ~ TMBB08
Reception Data PLC Configuration

All the reception data logic can be used as input elements of PLC equation. Please configure
reception data logic on PLC equation which will be applied by user.
For example, when Multi-Bit A Protocol’s reception bit 01(RMBA01) is set(‘1’), if open operation
is required, please put ‘RMBA01’ logic on External Trip Command(EOPEXT) logic.
EOPEXT = RMBA01

Transmission Data PLC Configuration

All transmission data has PLC equation logic, so the user can configure the data state to send.
For example, if recloser closing status(CLST) wants to be sent to Multi-Bit A Protocol’s
transmission bit 01(TMBA01), please put ‘CLST’ on TMBA01 logic. When Recloser is on closing
status, transmission bit 01 is set(‘1’) and sent.
TMBA01 = CLST
: : : :
Figure 7-23. PLC Edit Screen

3) Application : Auto Source Transfer Function using Multi-Bit Protocol

When Main Source supplying from the dual Source lose their power in line, by using the Multi-Bit
protocol it can automatically transfer the Source. For example, Main Recloser (R1) is open and can
secure a stable power supply by switching the line to send a signal to the circuit breaker by
Recloser Stand (R2) when the voltage on the Source 1(SRC #1) lost on the track shown in “Figure
7-24. Auto Source Transfer applications”.
In addition, when the Main Source return to normal Main Recloser may be added to return the line
to send a release signal to Stand by Recloser.
Tx: Tx:
R1(Main, N/C) R2(Stand by, N/O)
Rx: Rx:
SRC#1 SRC#2
Load
Figure 7-24. Auto Source Transfer applications

Main Recloser Stand by Recloser

Logic Example (RC1) TMB-A TMB-A Logic Example (RC2)
Mulit-Bit Communication Healthy 01 01 Mulit-Bit Communication Healty
CB Status(Closed) 02 02 CB Status(Closed)
N/C 03 03 Auto Transfer Function Enabled
N/C 04 04 Live Line in Load Side (SRC #2)
N/C 05 05 N/C
N/C
Opening by Dead Line AND RMBA02 is ＂0" 06 06 N/C
Closing by Live Line Restoration AND RMBA02 is “1” 07 07 N/C
Control Healthy 08 08 Control Healthy
Logic Example (RC1) RMB-A RMB-A Logic Example (RC2)
RC2 Link Healthy 01 01 RC1 Link Healthy
RC2 Closed Status 02 02 RC1 Closed Status
RC2 Auto Transfer Function Enabled 03 03 N/C
RC2 Live Line in Load Side (SRC #2) 04 04 N/C
N/C 05 05 N/C
N/C 06 06 External Close
N/C 07 07 External Trip
RC2 Control Healthy 08 08 RC1 Control Healthy
Main Recloser PLC Configuration Stand by Recloser PLC Configuration

Logic PLC Example (RC1) Logic PLC Example (RC2)
TMBA01 MBPAOK TMBA01 MBPAOK
TMBA02 CLST TMBA02 CLST
TMBA06 LT02 TMBA03 EATRF
TMBA07 LT03 TMBA04 27BL2T
TMBA08 !DIGERR TMBA08 !DIGERR
LSET02 27BDT*27BD2T*OPST*!RMBA02 EOPEXT RMBA07*RMBA02*RMBA01*RMBA08
LRST02 RMBA02+!RMBA01+!RMBA03+!RMBA04+!RMBA08 ECLEXT RMBA06*!RMBA02*RMBA01*RMBA08
LSET03 27BLT*CLST*RMBA02
LRST03 !RMBA02+!RMBA01+!RMBA03+!RMBA08
EOPEXT 27BDT*27BD2T*CLST*RMBA04
ECLEXT 27BLT*OPST
*. NOTE ) Logic Description

- MBPAOK : Multi-Bit Communication OK - 27BLT : Live Line Status in Source Side
- DIGERR : System Diagnostic Error Status - 27BD2T : Live Line Status in Dead Side
- CLST : Recloser CLOSE Status - 27BDT : Dead Line Status in Source Side
- OPST : Recloser OPEN Staus - 27BD2T : Dead Line Status in Dead Side
- ECLEXT : External CLOSE Command - LT## : Latch Logic
- EOPEXT : External OPEN Command - LSET## : Latch Set Condition
- CLOSE : Recloser CLOSE Signal - LRST## : Latch Reset Condition
- TRIP : Recloser TRIP Signal
Figure 7-25. Examples of logic configuration for using Multi-Bit Protocol

4) Multi-Bit Protocol Setup

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-
BIT /MULTI-BIT A or MULTI-BIT B” to select setting for Multi-Bit Protocol.
Setting items of “MULT-BIT A” and “MULTI-BIT B” menu are same as following;
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Function

[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1
TX ID: 1
RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50
To use Multi-Bit protocol, set ENABLE.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Port Select

Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETH1, ETH2
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1
Default RS232-1 Step ~
TX ID: 1
RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50
Select Multi-Bit procotol communication port.
[RS232/RS485/ETH]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Tx ID

Range 1~8
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
Default 1 Step ~
>TX ID: 1
RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50 Set the transmission ID. It should be the same as reception ID of the
[1~8 : 1] other party.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx ID

Range 1~8
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
Default 1 Step ~
>TX ID: 1
>RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50 Set the reception ID. It should be the same as the transmission ID of the
[1~8 : 1] other party.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Comm.Period

Range 10 ~ 60000 msec
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
Default 1 Step 50 msec
>TX ID: 1
>RX ID: 2 Set Multi-Bit protocol communication cycle(period). It should be the
>Comm.Period: 50
same as the other party communication cycle(period).
[ 10~60000: 1 ms]
When the serial communication port is used, the communication cycle

is restricted according to the communication baud rate as follows.
 For 1200 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 100 ms.
 For 9600 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 12.5 ms.
 For 19200~115200 bps, no restrictions.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP/UDP Select

Range TCP, UDP
[MULTI-BIT A]
TCP Port: 21000
Default TCP Step ~
UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.
[TCP/UDP]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535
[MULTI-BIT A]
>TCP Port: 21000
Default 2100 Step 1
UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0
Set the TCP/IP Port number at the use of TCP communication.
[ 1~65535:1 ]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / UDP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535
[MULTI-BIT A]
>TCP Port: 21000
Default 2101 Step 1
>UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0
Set the UDP Port number at the use of UDP communication.
[ 1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / M/S Mode

Range SLAVE, MASTER
[MULTI-BIT A]
>TCP Port: 21000
Default SLAVE Step ~
>UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0 When using TCP or RS485 communication, select Slave or Master
[ SLAVE/MASTER ] mode.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link IP Oct 1~4

Range 0 ~ 255
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Link IP Oct1: 0
>Link IP Oct2: 0
Default 0 Step 1
>Link IP Oct3: 0 Set other party IP address at the use of Ethernet port.
>Link IP Oct4: 0
>Link Timeout: 15 IP Address : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
[ 0~255: 1 ]
Link IP Oct 1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link Timeout

[MULTI-BIT A] Range 1 ~ 60000 msec
>Link IP Oct1: 0
>Link IP Oct2: 0 Default 15 Step 1 msec
>Link IP Oct3: 0
>Link IP Oct4: 0 On Ethernet communication, set the communication link timout time.
>Link Timeout: 15
If communication link is not established during the set time, it is
[ 1~60000: 1 ms ]
determined that the communication is disconnected.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / RMB Debounce

[MULTI-BIT A] Range 1 ~ 100
>Link Timeout: 15
>RMB Debounce: 10 Default 10 Step 1
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10
Set pickup and dropout debounce count of the reception bit.
[ 1~100: 1 ]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / ID Error Cnt

>Link Timeout: 15
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10 Set the ID Error Count. If ID is received by this count, it is detected as
[ 1~100: 1 ] ID Error.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / CRC Error Cnt

>Link Timeout: 15
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10 Set the CRC Error Count. If CRC error is received by this count, it is
[ 1~100: 1 ] detected as CRC error.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx Error Cnt

>Link Timeout: 15
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10 Set the Reception Error Count. If the received data is equal to this
[ 1~100: 1 ] count, it is detected as reception error.

7.2.2. Port Setup

Place the cursor on “PORT SETUP” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. ETR300-R communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has sub-
menu as below.
[PORT SETUP]
>1.RS232-1
2.RS232-2
3.RS485
4.ETHERNET1
5.ETHERNET2
7.2.2.1. RS232-1 and RS232-2 Ports Setup

ETR300-R side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 ports and related elements are set.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1” to

select setting for RS232-1 port. Also, settings for RS232-2 port are same as below.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1/ Baud Rate

[RS232-1] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 9600 Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select the baud rate for RS232-1 port.
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Parity Bit

[RS232-1] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
>Baud Rate: 9600
>Parity Bit: NONE Default NONE Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select whether to use Parity Bit.
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Data Bit

[RS232-1] Range 7, 8
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 8 Step 1
>Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select the Data Bit.
[7~8:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Stop Bit

[RS232-1] Range 1, 2
>Baud Rate: 9600
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select the Stop Bit.
[1~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Modem Sel

[RS232-1] Range 2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 4W Step ~
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1 Select a modem for communication.
>Modem Sel: 4W
[2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]
 2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is
monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).
 4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and
CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
 DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used.
 NONE : Not used.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS Usage

[RS232-1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Select whether to use CTS signal or not.
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
 ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming CTS signal is
Asserted.
 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of CTS signal.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD Usage

[RS232-1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Set whether to use DCD signal.
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
 ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming DCD signal is
Deasserted.
 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of DCD signal
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ RTS Usage

[RS232-1] Range OFF, ON, AUTO
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default AUTO Step ~
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2  ON : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always ON(Assert).
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
 OFF : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always OFF(Deassert).
[OFF/ON/AUTO]
 AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of
ETR300-R is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of
ETR300-R is off.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS CheckOut

[RS232-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default 2 Step 1 sec
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
which informs that ETR300-R is ready to transfer a data. If there is no
[1~255:1s]
CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not
transfer the data.
It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD BackOffDly

[RS232-1] Range 10 ~ 30000 msec
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default 5000 Step 10 msec
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Set a delay time of DCD signal checks which determine modem status
>DCD BackOffDly:5000
[10~30000:10ms]
before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set
time, if DCD signal is ON, ETR300-R does not transfer the data and
treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PreDelay

[RS232-1] Range 0 ~ 20000 msec
>TX PreDelay: 50
>TX PostDelay: 10 Default 50 Step 1 msec
>BackOffRandom: OFF
Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.

[0~20000:1ms]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PostDelay

[RS232-1] Range 0 ~ 20000 msec
>TX PreDelay: 50
>TX PostDelay: 10 Default 10 Step 1 msec
>BackOffRandom: OFF
Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.

[0~20000:1ms]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ BackOffRandom

[RS232-1] Range 0(OFF) 1~ 65535 msec
TX PreDelay: 10
TX PostDelay: 50 Default OFF Step 1 msec
>BackOffRandom: OFF
Set random back off time.

[0(OFF),1~65535:1ms]
7.2.2.2. RS485 Port Setup

Related elements with RS485 port in side panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS485” to select setting for RS485 port.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Baud Rate

[RS485] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 9600 Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Select the baud rate for RS485 port.
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Parity Bit

[RS485] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
>Baud Rate: 9600
>Parity Bit: NONE Default NONE Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Data Bit

[RS485] Range 7, 8
>Baud Rate: 9600
>Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Select the Data Bit.
[7~8:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Stop Bit

[RS485] Range 1, 2
>Baud Rate: 9600
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Select the Stop Bit.
[1~2:1]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ CA Delay

[RS485] Range 0.00 ~ 240.00
>Baud Rate: 9600
>Parity Bit: NONE Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
>CA Delay: 1.00
Set a delay time from data reced till transferring a reply data.
[0.00~240.00:0.01]

7.2.2.3. EHTERNET Ports Setup

Related elements with Eth1 and Eth2 ports in side panel of ETR300-R are set Move to “MAIN
MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ ETHERNET1 or EHTERNET2”
to select setting.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ DHCP Func

[ETHERNET1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>DHCP Func :DISABLE
IP Addr Oct1: 0 Default DISABLE Step -
IP Addr Oct2: 0
IP Addr Oct3: 0 Select Whether to use DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
>IP Addr Oct4: 0
function or not. if DHCP is enable, element is invalid below (IP,
[0~255:1]
gateway, subnetmask)
The IP address information provided by the DHCP function can be
found in the "
MAINNTENACE / IP INFORMATION"menu. See "
10.6.
IP INFORMATION".
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4

[ETHERNET1] Range 0 ~ 255
>IP Addr Oct1: 0
IP Addr Oct2: 0 Default 0* Step 1
IP Addr Oct3: 0
>IP Addr Oct4: 0 Select the IP Address for ETR300-R ETH1 port.
>Gateway Oct1: 0
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
[0~255:1] ① ② ③ ④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4

>Gateway Oct1: 0
Gateway Oct2: 0 Default 0* Step 1
Gateway Oct3: 0
>Gateway Oct4: 0 Select the Gateway Address.
Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
[0~255:1] ① ② ③ ④
Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ Subnet Mask Oct1 ~ 4

>SubnetMask Oct1: 0
SubnetMask Oct2: 0 Default 0* Step 1
>SubnetMask Oct3: 0
>SubnetMask Oct4: 0 Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETR300-R ETH1 port.
Subnet Mask Address : 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
[0~255:1]
① ② ③ ④
Subnet Mask Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ K-Alv Function

[ETHERNET1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default ENABLE Step ~
K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3
Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting
[DISABLE/ENABLE] status check function.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ K-Alv Idle Time

[ETHERNET1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default 4 Step 1sec
K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3
If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the
[0(OFF),1~600:1s] communication connecting maintainance status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ K-Alv Interval

[ETHERNET1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default 2 Step 1sec
>K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3
After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any
[0(OFF),1~600:1s] reply during the setting time, check again the status.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET1/ K-Alv Retry

[ETHERNET1] Range 0~255
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default 3 Step 1
K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3 Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as
the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail
[0~255:1]
and close the communication connection.

7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup

ETR300-R can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through RS232-1 port
and RS232-2 when their port types are both RS232.
7.2.3.1. Configure modem with AT commands

Before using Modem connected with ETR300-R, following setting shall be confirmed.
Configure port speed(must be done)

Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between ETR300-R and Modem, and set
DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems.
Configure answer mode(frequently)

The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2.
Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done)

Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.
The AT command is AT&C1.
Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done)

Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is ready to receive
calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any existing
call.
The AT command is AT&D2.
Configure Data Set Ready(must be done)

Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON.
The AT command is AT&S0.
Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done)

A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:
CONNECT 9600
The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.
The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this command.

Configure no echo of commands(must be done)

Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing.
The AT command is ATE0.
Configure silent connection(must be done)

Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and
negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents a
human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering modems.
The AT command is ATM1.
7.2.3.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem

Transmitting a Communication Packet
 Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
 The Communication packet is transmitted
※. Dial when DCD is Deassert
Receiving a Communication Packet

 Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
 The Communication packet is received
※. if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.
Dialing
 The user should insert an order for Reset.
 Wait 0.5 second
 Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.
 Checks DCD is Asserted
※. Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.

Hang up
 DTR Line is deasserted
 Wait 2 second
 DTR Line is asserted
 Wait 2 second
※. ETR300-R will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received or
transmitted.
7.2.3.3. Dialup Modem Setup

Place the cursor on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
[DIALUP MODEM]
>1.RS232-1 MODEM
2.RS232-2 MODEM
Modem settings can be made individually for the RS232-1 and RS232-2 ports. Move the cursor to
the port you want to set and press [ENT] to enter. (These ports have same settings.)
[RS232-1 Modem]
>1.CALLING STRING
2.CALLING NUMBER
3.INITIAL STRING
4.CONNECTION

The settings for the dialup modem are shown below;
1) Calling String
In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ CALLING STRING”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING

[CALLING STRING] Range ATD, ATDT, ATDP
>CS: ATD
Default ATD Step ~
Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them.
[! ~ z]
 ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
 ATDT : Tone Dial
 ATDP : Pulse Dial
2) Calling Number
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/
CALLING NUMBER”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER

[CALLING NUMBER] Range ~
>CN:0123456789XXXXXX
Default ~ Step ~
Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number].
Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space
[! ~ z]
shall be filled up by ‘X’.

3) Initial String
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM / INITIAL
STRING”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING

[INITIAL STRING] Range ~
>IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
&D2 +CRM=129 AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
Default Step ~
&D2 +CRM=129
Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
[space ~ z]
character, space or special character.
ETR300-R should be reset before making a phone call(connection).
NOTE : Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.
4) Connection
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/
CONNECTION”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res’ TO

[CONNECTION] Range 0 ~ 255 sec
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2
Connect TO: 30 Default 2 Step 1 sec
Idle Time: 60
Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
[0~255:1s]
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO

>Cmd Res’ TO: 2
>Connect TO: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec
Idle Time: 60
Setting the Modem connection waiting time.
If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a
[0~255:1s]
connection failure as the status of modem failure is maintained for the
setting time

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time

Cmd Res’ TO: 2
Connect TO: 30 Default 60 Step 1 sec
>Idle Time: 60
Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
[0~255:1s]
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
7.2.4. FTP-SSL
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL to file transfer in
order to configure protocol SSL.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL / Function

[FTP-SSL] Range DISABLE / ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Admin PW: 00000000 Default DISABLE Step -
User1 PW: 00000000
Set whether FTP-SSL Fucntion is used or not.

[0~255:1s]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/FTP-SSL/Admin PW

[FTP-SSL] Range 0~z
Function: DISABLE
>Admin PW: 00000000 Default 0 Step ~
User1 PW: 00000000
Set the administer password for FTP-SSL.
Administer’s log-in account name is ‘entec_admin’ with read and write
[0~z]
authority.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL/User1 PW

[FTP-SSL] Range 0~z
Function: DISABLE
Admin PW: 00000000 Default 0 Step ~
>User1 PW: 00000000
Set the user password for FTP-SSL.

[0~z] User 1’s log-in account name is ‘entec_user1’with read-only authority.

7.2.5. Wifi (option)

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI” to set related Wifi.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/WiFi SSID

[WIFI] Range 0~z
>WiFi SSID:00000000
WiFi P/W: 00000000 Default Lower 8 digits of Serial Step ~
SSID Hidden: ON
Number
[0~z]
Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wifi for Wifi access.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ WiFi P/W

[WIFI] Range 0~z
WiFi SSID:00000000
>WiFi P/W: 00000000 Default ab3456dc Step ~
SSID Hidden: ON
For wifi access, set WIFI password.

[0~z]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ SSID Hidden

[WIFI] Range OFF, ON
WiFi SSID:00000000
WiFi P/W: 00000000 Default ON Step ~
>SSID Hidden: ON
For selecting whether WIFI SSID is visible or not

[0~z]

7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup

Place the cursor on “EVENT&ETC” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among ETR300-R communication protocol
setting items.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP” to
select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range OFF, TH, DB, BOTH
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default OFF Step ~
DailyMax Ev:DISABLE
Fault AI Ev: 1SHOT This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event
BI EvtBuff Size:256
Active: in DNP point map.
[OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]
 OFF : AI point event is not occurred.

 TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than
Threshold value.
 DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the
Deadband value
 BOTH : TH and DB all used.
 Use ETR300-R interface program to setting the “Event Active”
activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and
Deadband value.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Skip at Ft

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range NO, YES
>AEvt Method: OFF
>AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default NO Step ~
DailyMax Ev:DISABLE
Fault AI Ev: 1SHOT
BI EvtBuff Size:256 Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated
[NO/YES] during Fault pickup.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / DailyMax Ev

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default DISABLE Step ~
>DailyMax Ev:DISABLE
Fault AI Ev: 1SHOT Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current
BI EvtBuff Size:256
transmission.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
 DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event..

 ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Fault AI Ev

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range NO, YES, 1SHOT
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default 1SHOT Step ~
>DailyMax Ev:DISABLE
>Fault AI Ev: 1SHOT When occurring fault, set whether or not record AI point which is
BI EvtBuff Size:256
related with fault such as fault current.
[NO/YES/1SHOT]
 NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event.

 YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence
to Event.
NOTE :
The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when it
becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / BI EvtBuff Size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range 32, 64, 128, 256
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default 256 Step ~
DailyMax Ev:DISABLE
>Fault AI Ev: 1SHOT
>BI EvtBuff Size:256
Set the Binary Queue Size
[32/64/128/256]

GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / AI EvtBuff Size

>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default 256 Step ~
BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL
Set the Binary Queue Size
>[32/64/128/256]
GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / CI EvtBuff Size

>CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default 256 Step ~
BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL Set the binary event mode.
CI Evt Method: ALL
[32/64/128/256]
 ALL : all status is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range ALL, LAST
CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default ALL Step ~
>BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL Set the analog event mode.
CI Evt Method: ALL
[ALL/LAST]
 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Method

BI Evt Method: ALL
>AI Evt Method: ALL Set the analog event mode.
CI Evt Method: ALL
[ALL/LAST]
 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Method

>BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL Set the counter event mode.
>CI Evt Method: ALL
[ALL/LAST]
 ALL : all counter is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / DO Cmd at Local

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range OFF,ON
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL Default OFF Step ~
>DO Cmd at Local:OFF
>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL
Set whether or not to control DO command on local control status.
[ALL/LAST]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Syn’ Ref

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range LOCAL,GMT
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL Default LOCAL Step ~
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time
[LOCAL/GMT] Synching with the master station.
NOTE :
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated
with UTC(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time internal clock in ETR300-R can be changed incorrectly at
time synchronization.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Tag Type

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range LOCAL,GMT
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL Default LOCAL Step ~
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL Set the time type for occurred events in Communication.
[LOCAL/GMT]
NOTE :
This setting is set to be UTC and the setting values associated
with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time of event transmitted is not correct.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Frz Period

[COMMON] Range 0(OFF), 0~60000m
CI Evt Method: ALL
DO Cmd at Local:OFF Default OFF Step 1minute
Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
Time Tag Type:LOCAL
>CI Frz Period: OFF
Set freeze period of CI points.
[0(OFF),0~60000:1m]
7.2.7. Save Setting

This menu allows you to save the changed settings of the GENERAL menu. The procedure for
storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

8. GROUP SETTING
Place the cursor on “GROUP SETTING” in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[GROUP SETTING]
>1.GROUP 1
2.GROUP 2
3.GROUP 3
4.GROUP 4
5.GROUP 5
6.GROUP 6
The GROUP SETTING menu has six identical subgroup settings. The setting group which is
turned on "SET GROUP" LED is applied to the ETR300-R. The [GROUP SELECT] button is used
to select a set group applied to present ETR300-R. Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP
SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group
locally.
the [GROUP SELEC] button.
[GROUP 1]
>1.RECLOSER
2.SECTIONALIZER
3.MONITORING
*.SAVE SETTING
saved message’.
All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into RECLOSER,
SECTIONALIZER and MONITORING sub menus.
When set to "RECLOSER" type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE
/ CONTROL TYPE”, only "RECLOSER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated
("SECTIONALIZER" menu is not operated).
When set to "SECTIONALIZER" type, only "SECTIONALIZER" and "MONITORING" menus
are operated ("RECLOSER" menu is not operated).

8.1. Recloser
Place the cursor on “RECLOSER” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu sets the protection elements that operate when the recloser control type is set.
[RECLOSER]
>1.AUTO RECLOSING
>2.TIME OC-PHA
3.TIME OC-GND
4.TIME OC-NEQ
5.INST OC-PHA
6.INST OC-GND
7.INST OC-SEF
8.INST OC-NEQ
9.INST OCL-PHA
10.INST OCL-GND
11.INST OCL-NEQ
12.INRUSH RES’/CLPU
13.HARMONIC BLOCK
14.DIRECTION
15.BROKEN CONDUCT
16.VOLTAGE
17.FREQUENCY
18.POWER
19.DEMAND
20.Z0 ADMITANCE
21.HOTLINE TAG
22.USER CURVE
23.OTHERS
Protection Elements - ANSI Designations

In case of Recloser control type, the protection elements are as follows;
Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations(1/2)

ANSI
Protective Elements LCD Menu
Designations
Five shot auto reclosing 79 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER /AUTO RECLOSING
Phase fast/delay time overcurrent 51P-1,2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA
Ground fast/delay time overcurrent 51G-1,2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-GND
Negative squence fast/delay time overcurrent 51Q(46)-1,2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ
Phase instantaneous overcurrent 50P-1 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA
Ground instantaneous overcurrent 50G-1 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND
Sensitive Earth Fault protection 50SG GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-SEF
Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent 50Q(46)-1 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC -NEQ
Phase instantaneous lockout overcurrent 50P-2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC-PHA
Ground instantaneous lockout overcurrent 50G-2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC-GND
Negative sequence instantaneous lockout overcurrent 50Q(46)-2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC -NEQ

Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations(2/2)

ANSI
Protective Elements LCD Menu
Designations
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU /
Inrush restraint CLPU-1
INRUSH RESTRAINT
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU /
Cold load pickup CLPU-2
COLD LOAD PICKUP
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HARMONIC BLOCK /
2nd Harmonic Block 2HB
2ND BLOCK
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HARMONIC BLOCK /
5th Harmonic Block 5HB
5TH BLOCK
Phase directional time control 67P GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE
Ground directional time control 67G GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND
Sensitive Earth Fault directional time control 67SG GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / SEF
Negative sequence directional time control 67Q GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ
Broken conduct 46BC GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT
Under voltage 1/2 27-1,2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV
Under voltage restoration 27R
RESTROATION
Over voltage 1/2 59-1,2 GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOL1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / NEUTRAL
Neutral over voltage 1/2 64N-1,2
OVERVOLT1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV
Over voltage restoration 59R
RESTROATION
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / NEQ OVER
Negative sequence over voltage 1/2 47-1,2
VOLT1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/ UNDER
Under frequency 1/2 81U-1,2
FREQUENCY 1, 2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/ OVER
Over frequency1/2 81O-1,2
FREQUENCY 1,2
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/
Frequency decay 81D
FREQUENCY DECAY
GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/
Frequency restoration 81R
FREQUENCY RESTROATION
Forward power 32FP GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER
Direction power 32P GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER
Phase demand current 49P GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE
Ground demand current 49G GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / GROUND
Negative sequence demand current 49Q GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / NEG SEQ’
Active demand power 49W GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / ACTIVE POWER
Reactive demand power 49V GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / REACTIVE POWER
Z0 admitance 21YN GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITANCE
Hotline tag - GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HOTLINE TAG
Sequence coordination - GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / OTHERS / Seq’ Coordi’

Protection Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations
SOURCE ETR300-R Controller
51Q 50Q
OPTION 46BC 49Q
1,2 1,2
Isef
50SG
ZCT
3I0
21YN
In 51G 50G
49G
1,2 1,2
67SG
In
Calc. Calc. Calc. 51P 50P 2HB

49P
CT Ia, Ib, Ic I1 I2 3I0 1,2 1,2 5HB
3WYE
Calc. 32P 49W

67P 67Q 67G
Pow' 32FP 49V
Calc. Calc. Calc. 27 59 81

O/U/D
V1 V2 3V0 1,2 1,2
1,2
3VD
RECLOSER
47 64N
1,2 1,2
CLPU
52 27R 59R 81R 79
1,2
3VD
*. NOTE ) : Overcurrent elements

LOAD
Figure 8-1. Protection Elements Block Diagram
All overcurrent protection function consist of dual-elements ((+) and (-)) of individual operations.
It can be operated in several ways depending on the configuration of the line system and the user's
request. Several application example of dual overcurrent protection elements are as follows;
1) Ring Line System Application
By using directional elements and dual overccurent protection elements ((+) and (-)), it is possible
to protect simultaneously both sides of the source line on ring line system operation. After setting
the directional type as forward, when using the dual-elements (function is set to ENABLE), The (+)
element does fault protection about the forward direction and the (-) element does the fault
protection about the reverse direction.
The (+) element operates as the setting type of the directional element, and the (-) element operates
as the opposite direction to the setting type of the directional element. If the type of the directional
element is set as NONE, the (+) and (-) elements operate simultaneously regardless of the direction
of the fault.

Forward powerflow
S1 S2
ETR300-R
(+) Source Side (-) Source Side
Reverse powerflow
Figure 8-2. Ring Line System Application
2) Radial Line System Application
When working in a radial line system, the directional element does not work and only one of the
(+) or (-) elements is used. ((+) element is recommended)
Powerflow
ETR300-R Load
Source Side
Figure 8-3. Radial Line System Application
3) Overcurrent Alarm elements Application
In the case of time overcurrent function, each element can be used for trip or alarm purposes. Thus,
one of the dual overcurrent protection elements can be operated as the trip element and another one
is operated as the alarm element.

8.1.1. Auto Reclosing (79)

ETR300-R provides Auto Reclosing (79) when a system failure of the line occurs which interrupts
the system at high speed and automatically recloses after a certain period of time passes after
interruption.
When it is a temporay fault due to contact of external object, lightning, or loss of insulation, the
system will automatically reclose after high speed interruption, resulting in minimization of failure
range and power outage period.
Auto Reclosing function is applied when fault current is larger than the fault pickup current, the
system will repeat trip and reclosing according to the sequence. Then, it will be LOCKOUT or
return to the normal sequence status after AUTO Reset TIME.
The sequence of Auto Reclosing consists of ‘Reset’, ‘Cycle’ and ‘Lockout’.
Figure 8-4. Protection Elements Block Diagram

1) LOCKOUT
In the situations stated below, the Lockout occurs. In the Lockout state, the system doesn’t reclose
automatically, so the user should close Recloser(or CB) manually at the site or remotely.
• In case when the failure occurs continuously and the recloser(or CB) has repeated trip for the
number of times set previously. (Permanent failure)
• When the user opens the recloser(or CB) manually
• In case of trip due to Instantaneous lockout overcurrent element
• In case of trip when fault current is larger than pickup current of Inrush Restraint function
during Inrush Restraint
• In case of trip due to the current larger than CLPU pickup current for the period of CLPU
operation
• In case of trip due to protection elements (Voltage(27,59), Frequency(81) and Demand, etc.)
excluding OverCurrent Trip.
• In case of trip due to the Hot Line Tag function
• In case of Overcurrent Trip while Auto Reclosing function is disabled (‘RECLOSE ENABLE’
Lamp OFF)
This “Figure 8-5. Lockout Sequence Operation” shows the typical protection sequence of lockout
after 4 times of OCR trips when the total operation time is set as 4.
AMP
FULT (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

CURRENT
*LOCKOUT*
PICKUP
CURRENT
NORMAL
CURRENT
TIME
Reset Cycle Lockout
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC
Figure 8-5. Lockout Sequence Operation

After Recloser(or CB) is closed manually at site or remote controller from the status of Lockout,
and it passes Lockout Reset Time. Lockout status will convert into reset, then normal reclosing
fucntiond will be activated.
2) RESET
RESET means the system has returned to normal state. The reset occurs in the following
situations.
 Lockout  Reset : In case when Recloser(or CB) is closed manually at the site or remotely and
the Lockout Reset Time has passed.
 Cycle  Reset : While it is in sequence, the over current is removed before lockout as well as
the Auto Reset Time has passed.
The “Figure 8-6. Reset Sequence Operation” shows the sequence where the system return to
normal status because the overcurrent is removed after 2 times of reclosing operations when the
total operation time is set as 4.
AMP
FULT (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

CURRENT
AUTO RESET
TIME
＂Reset T(A.R)＂ *RESET*
PICKUP
CURRENT
NORMAL
CURRENT
TIME
Reset Cycle Reset
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
Figure 8-6. Reset Sequence Operation
If fault occurs during the Auto Reset Time, only remaining reclosing operations will be performed
and then, the system will lockout.

3) CYCLE
It indicates the current sequence status. It occurs when OCR fault trips only except Instantaneous
lockout overcurrent elements, and maintain as cycle until operation time reach to the setting.
During Cycle, Later certain period after fault trip, it automatically operates reclosing function.
(But, Cycle occurs only when Auto Reclosing is enabled(‘RECLOSE ENABLE’ LED ON)
8.1.1.1. Auto Reclosing Setup

After a fault has occurred, the reclosing element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose
interval time expires. The number of lockout operation setting can be programmed from one to
five, and each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer.
If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will
continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the
operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts. At this moment,
if make close operation remotely or locally, Lockout is released and fault detecting is activated.
Also, if the fault is temporary, the Lockout sequence of the Recloser is Rest by Reset logic.
If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic.
The reclosing element can be disabled in the GROUP settings by one operating lockout or by
[RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel.
AUTO RECLOSING menu is classified as below;
[AUTO RECLOSING]
>1.FUNCTION
2.OPERATIONS
3.INTERVALS

Each of the setting items under AUTO RECLOSING menu are described below.
Function Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / Reclose Fun
[FUNCTION] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
>Reclose Fun: ENABLE
Default ENABLE Step -
Select whether to enable or disable the reclsoing function.

[DISABLE/ENABLE] This setting is used to change the reclosing function of ETR300-R.
Operations Setup
Set the operation of phase fault, ground fault, SEF fault and negative sequence fault. The operation
settings are applied individually according to the fault type. OPERATION menu is classified as
below;
[OPERATIONS]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ’
Auto reclosing function of ETR300-R supports maximum of 5 reclosing shots. It is possible to set
the curve (FAST or DELAY) to be applied for each shot. This feature allows to implement the
‘Save Fuse’ scheme by using the combination of 2 Fast and 2 Delay curves (total 4 shots trip
lockout i.e. first and second shot should be fast trip time curves and third and fourth shots should
be delayed trip time curves).

Each of the setting items under the OPERATIONS menu are described below.
1) Operations Setup – PHASE
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / OPERATIONS / PHASE / Lockout Shots

[PHASE] Range 1~5
>Lockout Shots: 4
Sh1 Fast Active:YES Default 4 Step 1
>Sh2 Fast Active:YES
>Sh3 Fast Active: NO Select the total number of the Phase trip operations.
>Sh4 Fast Active: NO
This setting is used to change the total number of the Phase trip
[1~5: 1]
operations.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh1 Fast Active

[PHASE] Range NO, YES
Lockout Shots: 4
>Sh1 Fast Active:YES Default YES Step ~
st
>Sh3 Fast Active: NO For 1 trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
When YES is applied, fast T-C curve of time overcurrent and delay T-C
[NO/YES]
are operated together, on the other hand, when NO is applied, only
delay T-C is operated.

Lockout Shots: 4
Sh1 Fast Active:YES Default YES Step ~
Sh3 Fast Active: NO
Sh4 Fast Active: NO
For 2nd trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE / Sh3 Fast Active

Lockout Shots: 4
Sh1 Fast Active:YES Default NO Step -
Sh2 Fast Active:YES
Sh4 Fast Active: NO
For 3rd trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]


Lockout Shots: 4
Sh2 Fast Active:YES
Sh3 Fast Active: NO
For 4th trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]

Sh1 Fast Active:YES
Sh3 Fast Active: NO
Sh4 Fast Active: NO
For 5th trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.
[NO/YES]
2) Operations Setup – GROUND
The ground operation settings process is the same as the phase operation.
3) Operations Setup – SEF
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / OPERATIONS / SEF / Lockout Shots

[SEF] Range 1~5
>Lockout Shots: 4
Default 4 Step 1
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip
[1~5:1]
operations.
4) Operations Setup – NEG SEQ’
The negative sequence operation settings process is the same as the phase operation.

Intervals Setup
Set the reclosing time of phase fault, ground fault, SEF fault and negative sequence fault. The
reclosing time is applied individually according to the fault type. INTERVALS menu is classified
as below;
[INTERVALS]
>1.PHASE/NEG SEQ’
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.OTHER
Each of the setting items under the INTERVALs menu are described below.
1) Intervals Setup – PHASE/NEG SEQ’
Set the reclosing interval time of phase fault and negative sequence fault at the same time.
However the interval time is applied according to phase fault and negative sequence fault,
respectively.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 1

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Range 0.10 ~ 1800.00 sec
>Reclose 1: 0.60
Reclose 2: 2.00 Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
Reclose 3: 15.00
Reclose 4: 15.00
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
[0.10~1800.00:0.01s] first trip operation and the close operation.

Reclose 1: 0.60
>Reclose 2: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
Reclose 3: 15.00
Reclose 4: 15.00
This setting is used to change the second reclose interval time between
[1.00~1800.00:0.01s] the second trip operation and the close operation.


Reclose 1: 0.06
>Reclose 3: 15.00
Reclose 4: 15.00
This setting is used to change the third reclose interval time between
[1.00~1800.00:0.01s] the third trip operation and the close operation.

Reclose 1: 0.06
Reclose 3: 15.00
>Reclose 4: 15.00
This setting is used to change the fourth reclose interval time between
[1.00~1800.00:0.01s] the fourth trip operation and the close operation.
2) Intervals Setup – GROUND

The ground interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.
3) Intervals Setup – SEF

The SEF interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.
4) Intervals Setup – OTHERS
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reset T(A.R)

[OTHERS] Range 0.10~ 600.00 sec
>Reset T(A.R): 30.00
Reset T(L.O): 10.00 Default 30.00 Step 0.01 sec
Reclose Wait: 60.00
It is to select Reset time during auto reclosing.
During reclosing sequence operation, if current is back to normal for this
[0.10~600.00:0.01s]
set time, recloser sequence is Reset. Generally, Reclosing reset time shall
be set longer than present reclose sequence time. During reclose sequence
time, if a fault current is removed, ‘Reset T(A.R)’ starts and during ‘Reset
T(A.R)’, a fault is detected again, Reset timer is reset.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reset T(L.O)

[OTHERS] Range 0.10~ 600.00 sec
Reset T(A.R): 30.00
>Reset T(L.O): 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
Reclose Wait: 60.00
To set Lockout reset time.
After recloser is closed by locally or remotely, within this set time, auto
[0.10~600.00:0.01s]
reclosing is not activated. It is to eliminate reclosing sequence if a fault
current is detected after manual closing, and to have waiting time for
feeder stabilization. After this set time, Recloser function is activated.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reclose Wait

[OTHERS] Range 0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 600.00 sec
Reset T(A.R): 30.00
Reset T(L.O): 10.00 Default 60.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Reclose Wait: 60.00
Reclose signal is output after reclose interval time, when reclosing
operation does not operate due to close power supply problem, it will
[0(OFF),0.10~600.0s]
set time to maintain recloser signal. If reclosing operation does not
work during this period, it will be directly LOCK OUT even though
reclosing sequence is remained.

8.1.2. Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51P)

The ETR300-R has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element
contained in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current
inputs. The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase
time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus phse fault current for tripping that is used for
an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time
overcurrent element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to
respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external devices
on the distribution system. US, ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current
curves are included in the ETR300-R.
A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the
US, ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the
recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as
mechanical relay reset.
Phase time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent malfunction of
inrush current generated when relcloser or nearby power distribution device is closed.

‘Time OC-PHASE’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[Time OC-PHA]
>1.(+)PHASE FAST
2.(+)PHASE DELAY
3.(-)PHASE FAST
4.(-)PHASE DELAY
Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - PHASE element.
1) (+) PHASE FAST Setup
(+) PHASE FAST setting menu is available for setting (+) PHASE FAST Curve.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / (+)PHASE FAST / Function

[(+)PHASE FAST] Range DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
>Function: TRIP
Pickup: 500 Default TRIP Step -
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Set the function of (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent as enable or
Time Add.: 0.00
disable.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm..
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / (+)PHASE FAST / Pickup

[(+)PHASE FAST] Range 10 ~ 1600A
Function: ENABLE
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00
Set pickup current of (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Curve

[(+)PHASE FAST] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Function: ENABLE
Pickup: 500 Default US-VI
>Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Select desired curve type for (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent
Time Add.: 0.00
element.
[Curves : total 62]
The T-C curves supported by the ETR300-R are as follows;

 US
- US-NI : US Normally Inverse
- US-VI : US Very Inverse
- US-EI : US Extremely Inverse
- US-STI : US Short Time Inverse
- US-STVI : US Short Time Very Inverse
 ANSI /IEEE
- IEEE-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse
- IEEE-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse
- IEEE-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse
 IEC
- IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse
- IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse
- IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse
- IEC-STI : IEC Short Time Inverse
- IEC-LTI : IEC Long Time Inverse
 ES
- ES-NI : KEPCO ESB Normally Inverse
- ES-VI : KEPCO ESB Very Inverse
- ES-EI : KEPCO ESB Extremely Inverse
- ES-LTVI : KEPCO ESB Long Time Very Inverse
 KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
 User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4
 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32
 Fuse curves : RI, HR, FR
For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation

characteristic setting range”.

Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Curve A(101) B(117) C(133) D(116) E(132) IEC-EI K(162) L(107) M(118) N(104)
Setting 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Curve IEC-NI P(115) R(105) T(161) V(137) IEC-VI W(138) Y(120) Z(134) 1(102)
Setting 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Curve 2(135) 3(140) 4(106) 5(114) 6(136) 7(152) 8(113) 8*(111) 9(131) 11(141)
Setting 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Curve 13(142) 14(119) 15(112) 16(139) 18(151) N1 N2 N3 N4 US-NI
Setting 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Curve US-VI US-EI ES-NI ES-VI USER-1 USER-2 USER-3 USER-4 DEF-1S DEF-10S
Setting 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Curve IEEE-NI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-STI US-STVI IEC-LTI IEC-STI ES-LTVI ES-EI RI
Setting 61 62
Curve HR FR
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Time Dial

[(+)PHASE FAST] Range 0.01 ~ 15.00
Function: ENABLE
Pickup: 500 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
Time Add.: 0.00
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
time add application.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Time Add

[(+)PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
Pickup: 500 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
>Time Add.: 0.00
Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA /PHASE FAST / M.R.T

[(+)PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Add.: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
Reset Method: INST
to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
protective device and line fuse coordination.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Reset Method

[(+)PHASE FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default INST Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)PHASE
>Reset Method: INST
FAST overcurrent protection is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT
(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[(+)PHASE FAST] Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00 Default 0(OFF), Step 0.01 sec
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
>Low Set DT: OFF
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.
2) (+) PHASE DELAY Setup
‘(+) PHASE DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.
3) (-) PHASE FAST Setup
‘(-) PHASE FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
4) (-) PHASE DELAY Setup
‘(-) PHASE DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

8.1.3. Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51G)

The ETR300-R has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element in
the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground
time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution
systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The ground time
overcurrent element provides a time delay versus gournd fault current for tripping that is used for
an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time
overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both PROTECTION ENABLED and
GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely
coordinate with other protection elements within the ETR300-R and other external devices on the
distribution system. ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER and non-standard time current curves are
included in the ETR300-R.
A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with
other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the
distribution system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset
instantaneously when the current level measured by the ETR300-R drops below the pickup setting
for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device
necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset.
Ground time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent malfunction of
inrush current generated when relcloser or distribution device is closed.
‘Time OC-GROUND’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[Time OC-GND]
>1.(+)GROUND FAST
2.(+)GROUND DELAY
3.(-)GROUND FAST
4.(-)GROUND DELAY

Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - GROUND element.
1) (+) GROUND FAST Setup
(+) GROUND FAST setting menu is available for setting (+) GROUND FAST Curve.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Function

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM,
>Function: TRIP
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Set the function of (+) GROUND FAST fast time overcurrent as
Time Add.: 0.00
enable or disable.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Pickup

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range 10 ~ 1600A
Function: TRIP
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00
Set pickup current of (+)GROUND FAST time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Curve

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Function: TRIP
>Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Select desired curve type for (+)GROUND FAST time overcurrent
Time Add.: 0.00
element. For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current
[10~1600:1A]
operation characteristic setting range”.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Time Dial

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Function: TRIP
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Time Add

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: TRIP
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
>Time Add.: 0.00
Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~15.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / M.R.T

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
Reset Method: INST
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Reset Method

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level,
>Reset Method: INST
(+)GROUND FAST fast overcurrent protection is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST /Low Set DT

[(+)GROUND FAST] Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00 Default 0(OFF), Step 0.01sec
M.R.T: 0.00
>Low Set DT: OFF
[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]
operation.
2) (+) GROUND DELAY Setup
‘(+) GROUND DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.
3) (-) GROUND FAST Setup
‘(-) GROUND FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
4) (-) GROUND DELAY Setup
‘(-) GROUND DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

8.1.4. Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51Q(46))

The ETR300-R has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence
element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence
overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The
negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus negative sequence fault
current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current
pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent
element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external
devices on the distribution system.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode
applies to the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to
coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment
on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset
instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for
delay time as mechanical relay reset.
Negative sequence time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent
malfunction of inrush current generated when relcloser or nearby distribution device is closed.
‘Time OC-NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[Time OC-NEQ]
>1.(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST
2.(+)NEG SEQ’ DELAY
3.(-)NEG SEQ’ FAST
4.(-)NEG SEQ’ DELAY
Following setting is used to program ‘Time OC-NEQ’ elements.

1) (+) NEG SEQ’ FAST Setup
(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST setting menu is available for setting (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST Curve.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Function

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
>Function: DISABLE
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Set the function of negative sequence fast time overcurrent as enable or
Time Add.: 0.00
disable.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Pickup

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range OFF, 1.0 ~ 1600.0A
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 500 Default 500.0A Step 1A
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00
Set pickup current of (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Curve

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Function: DISABLE
>Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00
Select desired curve type for (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent
[curves : total 62]

element. For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current
operation characteristic setting range”.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Time Dial

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Function: DISABLE
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Time Add

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Pickup: 500
Threshold: 1.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
>Time Add.: 0.00
Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / M.R.T

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Threshold: 1.00
Curve: [US-VI] Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00 T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
>M.R.T: 0.00
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Reset Method

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)NEG
>Reset Method: INST
SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent protection is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 .INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST /Low Set DT

[(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00 Default OFF Step 0.01 sec
M.R.T: 0.00
>Low Set DT: OFF
0(OFF),0.01~600.00s
operation.
2) (+) NEG SEQ’ DELAY Setup
‘(+) NEG SEQ’ DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.
3) (-) NEG SEQ’ FAST Setup
‘(-) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent setting.
4) (-) NEG SEQ’ DELAY Setup
‘(-) NEG SEQ’ DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent
setting.

8.1.5. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P1)

The ETR300-R has a phase instantaneous overccurent element. This element in the ETR300-R, is
set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a
definite time delay versus phse high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED
on user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.
‘INST OC - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[INST OC - PHA]
>1.(+)INST OC-PHA
2.(-)INST OC-PHA
Following settings are used to program ‘INST OC – PHASE’ elements.
1) (+)INST OC-PHA Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Function

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
>Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default ENABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the function (+) INST OC -PHASE as enable or disable.
DISABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function does not operate.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
ENABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function operates.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 4000 Step 1A
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the pickup current for (+) INST OC -PHASE element.
This value is the minimum operating current for (+) INST OC -
[10~20000:1A]
PHASE element

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1
Set time delay of trip operation for (+) INST OC -PHASE element. If
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Active Shot

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Range 1~5 shot
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 1 Step 1shot
Time Delay: 0.00
>Active Shot: 1 Sets the time when this element is activated.
[1~5:1shot]
If Active Shot = 1, then (+)INST OC -PHASE element is enabled for
the first trip operation and next trip operations.
2) (-) INST OC – PHA Setup
(-) INST OC-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OC-PHA settings.

8.1.6. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G1)

The ETR300-R has a ground instantaneous overccurent element. This element in the ETR300-R, is
set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a
definite time delay versus ground high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the ground setting and both PROTECTION
ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.
‘INST OC - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OC - GND]
>1.(+)INST OC-GND
2.(-)INST OC-GND
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –GND’ element.
1) (+) INST OC-GND Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Function

[(+)INST OC-GND] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
>Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the function of ground instantaneous overccurent element as enable
or disable.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
DISABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on the ground does not
operate.
ENABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on ground operates.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-GND] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1
Set the pickup current of ground instantaneous overccurent element.
[10~20000:1A] This value is the minimum operating current of this element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-GND] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
>Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1
Set Time Delay for ground instantaneous overccurent element. If it is
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] set for 0, trips immediately on gorund fault current without delay.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Active Shot

[(+)INST OC-GND] Range 1~5 shot
Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
[1~5:1shot]
If Active Shot = 1, then ground instantaneous overccurent element is
enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.
2) (-) INST OC-GND Setup
(-) INST OC-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC-GND settings.

8.1.7. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SG)

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase
to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity
of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy
of CTs. For SEF element, ETR300-R has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be
connected in series with the provided phase CT’s(standard) or connected to a separate window type
ZCT.
The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus sensitive earth fault current . The SEF
element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED, GROUND ENABLED and
SEF ENABLED on user interface panel.
For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero
sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.
A sensitive earth fault element does not work during the inrush restraint to prevent malfunction of
the inrush current that occurs when the relcloser or nearby distribution device is closed.
‘INST OC-SEF’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OC - SEF]
>1.(+)INST OC-SEF
2.(-)INST OC-SEF

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –SEF’ element.
1) (+)INST OC-SEF Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Function

[(+)INST OC-SEF] Range DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 10.0 Default DISABLE Step ~
>Time Delay: 5.00
Set the function of sensitive earth fault element as enable or disable
when the power flow is in forward direction.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

the alarm..
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-SEF] Range 0.1~160.0 A
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 1A
Time Delay: 5.00
Set the pickup current of sensitive earth fault element.
This value is the minimum operating current of sensitive earth fault
[0.1~160.0:1A]
element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-SEF] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 10.0 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 5.00
Set Time Delay for sensitive earth fault trip. If it is set for 0, trips
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] immediately sensitive earth fault current without delay.
2) (-) INST OC – SEF Setup
(-) INST OC- SEF settings are very similar to the (+)INST OC- SEF settings.

8.1.8. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q1(46))

The negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT
secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay
versus negative sequence high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION on user
interface panel.
‘INST OC - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OC - NEQ]
>1.(+)INST OC-NEQ
2.(-)INST OC-NEQ
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC – NEQ’ element.
1) (+)INST OC-NEQ Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Function

[(+)INST OC-NEQ] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the function of negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element as enable or disable.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
DISABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on the negative sequence
does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on negative sequence
operates.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-NEQ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the pickup current of negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element.
[10~20000:1A]
This value is the minimum operating current of negative sequence
instantaneous overccurent element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-NEQ] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set Time Delay for negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative sequence fault
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
current without delay.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Active Shot

[(+)INST OC-NEQ] Range 1~5 shot
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 4000 Default 1 Step 1shot
Time Delay: 0.00
[1~5:1shot]
If Active Shot = 1, then negative sequence instantaneous overccurent
element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip
operation.
2) (-) INST OC – NEQ Setup
(-) INST OC- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC- NEQ settings.

8.1.9. Phase Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50P2)

The ETR300-R has a phase instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This element in the
ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element
provides a definite time delay versus phase high fault current.
When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other phase overcurrent
elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated.
This element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout,
time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of
permanent fault.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and phase instantaneous
overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED
in user interface panel.
This element element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme
‘INST OCL - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow:
[INST OCL-PHA]
>1.(+)INST OCL-PHA
2.(-)INST OCL-PHA
Following settings are used to program ‘INST OCL – PHASE’ elements.
1) (+)INST OCL-PHA Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Function

[(+)INST OCL-PHA] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
>Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the function (+) INST OCL -PHASE as enable or disable.
DISABLE : (+) INST OCL -PHASE function does not operate.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
ENABLE : (+) INST OCL -PHASE function operates.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Pickup

[(+)INST OCL-PHA] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the pickup current for (+) INST OCL -PHASE element.
This value is the minimum operating current for (+) INST OCL-
[10~20000:1A]
PHASE element
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Time Delay

[(+)INST OCL-PHA] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
>Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1
Set time delay of trip operation for (+) INST OCL-PHASE element. If
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Active Shot

[(+)INST OCL-PHA] Range 1~5 shot
Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
[1~5:1shot]
If Active Shot = 1, then (+)INST OCL-PHASE element is enabled for
the first trip operation and next trip operations.
2) (-) INST OCL – PHA Setup
(-) INST OCL-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OCL-PHA settings.

8.1.10. Ground Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50G2)

The ETR300-R has a ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This element in the
ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element
provides a definite time delay versus ground high fault current.
When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other gournd overcurrent
elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated.
permanent fault.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and ground
instantaneous overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and both
PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.
‘INST OCL - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OCL - GND]

>1.(+)INST OCL-GND
2.(-)INST OCL-GND
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OCL –GND’ element.
1) (+) INST OCL-GND Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Function

[(+)INST OCL-GND] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
>Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the function of ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element
as enable or disable.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
DISABLE: (+) INST OCL-GND function on the ground does not
operate.
ENABLE: (+) INST OCL-GND function on ground operates.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Pickup

[(+)INST OCL-GND] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the pickup current of ground instantaneous lockout overccurent
element.
[10~20000:1A]
This value is the minimum operating current of this element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Time Delay

[(+)INST OCL-GND] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
>Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set Time Delay for ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element.
If it is set for 0, trips immediately on gorund fault current without
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
delay.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Active Shot

[(+)INST OCL-GND] Range 1~5 shot
Function: ENABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
[1~5:1shot]
If Active Shot = 1, then ground instantaneous lockout overccurent
element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip
operation.
2) (-) INST OCL-GND Setup
(-) INST OCL-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OCL-GND settings.

8.1.11. Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50Q2(46))

The negative sequence instantaneous lockout overccurent element provides a definite time delay
versus negative sequence high fault current.
When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other negative sequence
overcurrent elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated.
permanent fault.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and negative sequence
instantaneous overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
‘INST OCL - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INST OCL - NEQ]

>1.(+)INST OCL-NEQ
2.(-)INST OCL-NEQ
Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OCL – NEQ’ element.
1) (+)INST OCL-NEQ Setup
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Function

[(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 8000 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the function of negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element as enable or disable.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
DISABLE : (+) INST OCL-NEQ function on the negative sequence
does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OCL-NEQ function on negative sequence
operates.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Pickup

[(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the pickup current of negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element.
[10~20000:1A]
This value is the minimum operating current of this element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Time Delay
[(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set Time Delay for negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
sequence fault current without delay.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Active Shot
[(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Range 1~5 shot
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 8000 Default 1 Step 1shot
Time Delay: 0.00
[1~5:1shot]
If Active Shot = 1, then negative sequence instantaneous lockout
overccurent element is enabled for the first trip operation and every
following trip operation.
2) (-) INST OCL – NEQ Setup
(-) INST OCL- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OCL- NEQ settings.

8.1.12. Inrush Restraint

The ETR300-R suppresses the time overcurrent operation during the inrush current restraint period
to prevent erroneous operation of the ETR300-R due to the inrush current generated when the
recloser does close operation or the near-field distribution device does close operation (the
instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent elements do normal operation). The setting of
the Inrush current restraint function can be set individually for phase, ground, sensitive earth fault
and negative sequence.
Current
> Outage Time R.M.T Time 50

(Restore Minimum Time) Operation Region
50 Pickup Current Inrush DurationFault & 50
Operation Region
Trip
Inrush Current 1
Inrush Duration
Fault Pickup Current
Inrush Current 51
Restraint Region Operation Region
Trip
Inrush Current 2
51 Pickup Current
Inrush Reset Current Inrush Current 3
Reset Time
Normal Current
Region
Time
Inrush
Current 2 Inrush Restraint Duration Normal Condition
Oneshot Trip and Lockout Reclosing Avaliable
Inrush
Current 3 Inrush Restraint Duration Normal Condition
Oneshot Trip and Lockout Reclosing Avaliable
Without Supply Supply Restore Inrush Restraint Duration OFF

By Reset Current & Time
Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics

After it’s done black out more than outage time, it restores load current supply, inrush current
restraint algorithm is applied. When the restoration of load supply is occured, in the case of that
generated inrush current is greater than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush current 1 of
“Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics”, it’s considered as fault current,
recloser does trip operation during inrush duration. (But, when the delay curve of time overcurrent
element is ENABLE, recloser does operation). When inrush current is less than inrush duration
fault pickup current as inrush current 2 of “Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation
Characteristics” After fault protection operation is suppressed during R.M.T Time(Restore
Minimu Time), recloser does trip operation after inrush duration.
However, inrush duration is removed if inrush current is less than reset current before R.M.T Time
(Restore Minimum Time) as inrush current 3 of “Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation
Characteristics”.
When faul current is flowed more than inrush duration fault pick up current during inrush duration,
reloser does 1st trip operation and goes to lockout status on RECLOSE ENABLED.
NOTE:
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, in order to activate inrush current restraint sectopm the
condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the
decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set, the decision is made
when a recloser is closed (51A) by local or remote control.
8.1.12.1. Inrush Restraint Setup

‘INRUSH RESTRAINT’ menu is sub-divided as follow;
[INRUSH RESTRAINT]
>1.FUNCTION
2.PICKUP CURRENT
3.RESTORE MIN. TIME
4.INRUSH RES’ RESET
5.PHASE CURVE
6.GROUND CURVE
7.NEG SEQ’ CURVE
8.OTHERS

1) Fuction Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Phase

[FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Phase: ENABLE
Ground: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
SEF: ENABLE
Neg Seq’: ENABLE
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
[ENABLE/DISABLE] phase current.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Ground

Phase: ENABLE
>Ground: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
SEF: ENABLE
Neg Seq’: ENABLE
[ENABLE/DISABLE] ground current.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / SEF

Phase: ENABLE
>SEF: ENABLE
Neg Seq’: ENABLE
[ENABLE/DISABLE] sensitive earth fault current.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Neg Seq’

Phase: ENABLE
SEF: ENABLE
>Neg Seq’: ENABLE
[ENABLE/DISABLE] Negative sequence current.

2) Inrush Duration Fault Pickup Current Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Phase

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 10 ~ 20000A
>Phase: 2000
Ground: 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Phase fault current level is configured during inrush current restraint
duration. If the phase current is greater than the setring value, the
[10~20000:1 A]
delay curve of the phase time overcurrent element is activated.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Ground

>Phase: 2000
>Ground: 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Ground fault level is configured during the inrush current restraint
duration. If the ground current is greater than the setting value, the
[10~20000:1 A]
delay curve of the ground time overcurrent element is activated.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ S.E.F

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0.1 ~ 2000.0A
>Phase: 2000
>Ground: 2000 Default 20.0 Step 0.1A
>SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Sets the sensitive earth fault current level during the inrush current
restraint duration If S.E.F current is greater than this setting, a
[0.1~2000.0:0.1 A]
sensitive earth fault element will operate.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Neg Seq’

>Phase: 2000
>Ground: 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Sets the negative sequence fault current level during the inrush current
restraint duration. If the negative sequence current is greater than the
[10~20000:1 A]
setting value, the delay curve of the negative sequence time
overcurrent element operates.
NOTE:
The above setting applies the pickup current to operate the time overcurrent element, and the
multiple of current pickup current which is applied to the T-C curve during the time
overcurrent operation applies the pickup current setting value of the delay curve.
If the function of the delay curve is disabled, the time overcurrent element does not operate
(does not trip) even if a fault current occurs during the inrush current restraint duration.

3) Restroe Minimum Time Setup
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / P-Function

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60
Set whether to apply restore minimum time for phase inrush current.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / G-Function

>P-Function: ENABLE
>G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60
Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for ground inrush current.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / S-Function

>P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
>S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60 Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for sensitive earth inrush
[DISABLE/ENABLE] current.
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / Q-Function

>P-Function: ENABLE
>G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
S-Function: ENABLE
>Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60 Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for negative sequence
[DISABLE/ENABLE] inrush current.
NOTE:
Depending on the above settings, the inrush current restraint duration release condition will be
different. If it sets to EANBLE, the restore minimum time is applied and regardless of current
size, the inrush current restraint duration is released after a restore minimum time.
On the other hand, if it sets to DISABLE, the restore minimum time is not applied and the
current size should fall below the reset current, and the inrush current restraint duration is
released.

GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ RESTORE MIN. TIME/ RMTTIME

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush current.
>RMT TIME: 0.60
The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for time
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
overcurrent detection from inrush duration fault pickup current back to
nominal pickup level.
4) Reset Current & Time Setup
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / P-Reset I

[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 10~1600A
>P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 500 Step 1A
S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500 Set the level of reset current for phase inrush restraint.
Reset Time: 0.60
Inrush current that is lower than this reset current setting level, is kept
[10~1600:1 A]
for the reset time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and
normal over current protection function operates.
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / G-Reset I

>P-Reset I: 500
>G-Reset I: 250 Default 250 Step 1A
S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500
Reset Time: 0.60
Set the level of reset current for ground inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / S-Reset I

[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 0.1~160.0A
>P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 10.0 Step 0.1A
>S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500
Reset Time: 0.60
Set the level of reset current for sensitive earth inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]

GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / Q-Reset I

>P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 500 Step 1A
S-Reset I: 10.0
>Q-Reset I: 500
Reset Time: 0.60
Set the level of reset current for negative sequence inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]
GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / Reset Time
[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500
>Reset Time: 0.60
Sets the time to reset inrush current restraint duration.
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
5) Inrush Current Restrait Duration’s T-C Curve Setup
Set the T-C curve to be applied during the Inrush current restraint duration.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / Curve

[PHASE CURVE] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
>Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default US-VI Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 Set T-C curve to apply when Phase inrush current is more than few
Reset Method: INST
times of phase disconnect inrush current. Applicable curve ragne refers
[curve : total 62]
to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting
range”.
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.
GROUP # /RECLOSER/INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE/ Time Dial

[PHASE CURVE] Range 0.01~15.00
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application changes
[0.01~15.00:0.01] the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.

GROUP #/RECLOSER/INRUSH RES’ CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Time Add.

[PHASE CURVE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s] including its own delay time.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / M.R.T

[PHASE CURVE] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time,
Reset Method: INST
tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
cooperated with other protection device or fuse.
GROUP#/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / Reset Method
[PHASE CURVE] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold
>Reset Method: INST
load pickup element is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

6) Other Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Outage Time

[OTHERS] Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec
>Outage Time: 5.00
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
Set the outage time. After the outage condition is maintained for more
than the setting time, the restoration of load supply becomes active
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
and the Inrush current restraint section becomes active.
Outage conditions are as follows;
 If "Make Use 'I'" setting is NO, it is considerd to be outage when
recloser status is open.
 If "Make Use 'I'" setting is YES, it is considered to be outage
when current is below 2A.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Make Use ‘I’
[OTHERS] Range NO, YES
>Outage Time: 5.00
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default NO Step ~
Set whetherer or not to use current as decision condition for operating
function.
[NO/YES]
 When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint interval becomes
active when relcoser is changed from open to close status.
 When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the
inrush current restraint interval is active.

8.1.13. Cold Load Pickup

The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating by the cold
load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.
In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over
current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy
load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time
overcurrent element during certain time (Pickup Multi) defined by a user.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Up

At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is
risen as follows.
 Without Supply Time 

Operational Cold Load Multi '  1   ( Pickup Multi ' 1) 
 Interval Time 
As example, when ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively,
over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis
set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum
working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Down

If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over
Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1.
When ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the
cold load multiple in “Figure 8-8. Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows.
NOTE:
The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate
overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of T-C curve is a minimum
working current.

Cold Load Multiplier
Without Supply Supply Restore
T(60min) T(60min)
0.5×T 0.5×T
(30min) (30min)
×3
×2
×1
Time(min)
Figure 8-9. Cold Load Multipilier
8.1.13.1. Cold Load Pickup Setup

This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Function

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: ENABLE
Make Use ‘I’: NO Default ENABLE Step ~
Pickup Multi: 2.0
Interval Time: 10 Set whether to Enable or disable the Cold load pickup function.
When it sets to ON, cold load multiplier is applied to pickup current of
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
phase, ground and negative sequence time overcurrent.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use ‘I’
[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range YES, NO
>Function: ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default NO Step ~
Pickup Multi: 2.0
Interval Time: 10 Set whether or not to be used as a decision condition for operating the
cold load pickup function.
[NO/YES]
 If it sets to NO, power loss and power restoration are considered
as open or close state of relcoser.
 If it sets to YES, determine power loss and power restoration as
current (less than or equal to 2A)

GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Pickup Multi’

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range 1.0~5.0 xMTC
>Function: ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default 2.0 Step 0.1xMTC
>Pickup Multi: 2.0
Interval Time: 10 Set the multiple of cold load. If 1 is set, the cold load multiple is not
applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied
[1.0~5.0:0.1xMTC]
for overcurrent pickup current.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Interval Time

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range 1~720 min
>Function: ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default 10 Step 1 min
>Pickup Multi: 2.0
>Interval Time: 10
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup
[1~720:1 m] level is raised or dropped.

8.1.14. Harmonic Block (2HB and 5HB)

Magnetizing inrush current in power transformer on the distribution line causes to operate
overcurrent element. It provides the second and fifth harmonic block function to block overcurrent
element caused by transformer inrush current.
If measured second harmonic current content exceeds the adjustable pickup threshold setting value,
the second harmonic block function can restraint to operate overcurrent elements until the inrush
current has subsided.
2HB
Function 2HBAT
Pickup 2HBBT
Time Delay 2HBCT
Reset Time 2HBT
Minimum Current
Ia
Ib
Ic
E2HBE
Figure 8-10. Function block diagram for 2HB
Function
E2HBE &
Min Curr.
Ia +
IaRms.H2 +
-
/IaRms - & 2HBAT
2nd
Ib +
- Harmonic IaRms.H2
Calculation +
/IaRms - & Time Delay Reset Time 2HBBT
Ic +
-
IaRms.H2
+ 2HBCT
/IaRms - &
OR 2HBT
Pickup
Figure 8-11. Function logic diagram for 2HB
The fifth harmonic block function process is same as the second harmonic block function above.

This setting is to restrain the inrush current caused by the second harmonic element.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Function
[2ND BLOCKING] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: OFF Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 1.00
Reset Time: 1.00
Min.I: 60
Set the second harmonic function as enabled or disabled.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Pickup

[2ND BLOCKING] Range 0(OFF), 5 ~ 100 %
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: OFF Default OFF Step 1%
Time Delay: 1.00
Reset Time: 1.00 Set the second harmonic pickup level. At least one of the phase currents
Min.I: 60
has the second harmonic exceeded this setting value, this function is
[OFF, 5~100:1 %]
activated. In case of setting 0(OFF), the function is deactivated.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Time Delay

[2ND BLOCKING] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: OFF Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 1.00
Reset Time: 1.00 Set the second harmonic block function delay time. If the second
Min.I: 60
harmonic exceeds above pickup setting during the delay time, selected
[0.00~600.0s:0.01s]
overcurrent elements restrains to operate.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Reset Time

[2ND BLOCKING] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: OFF Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Delay: 1.00
>Reset Time: 1.00
Min.I: 60 The second harmonic current is less than the pickup setting level, the
[0.00~600.0s:0.01s] selected overcurrent elements keep restraining during the reset time.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Min. I

[2ND BLOCKING] Range 0(OFF), 1~630A
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: OFF Default 60 Step 1A
Time Delay: 1.00
Reset Time: 1.00
>Min.I: 60 Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the second
[0(OFF),1~630:1 A] harmonic blocking element to operate.
*. NOTE ) 5TH BLOCKING setting process is same as 2ND BLOCKING settings above.

8.1.15. Directional Controls (67)

The Directional Controls provide time overcurrent protection in the direction of power flow. The
directional controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of
finding faults in different directions. The directional controls are comprised of phase, gound, SEF
and negative sequence overcurrent elements.
If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in
forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum
Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls,
add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
The directional controls settings can be different in each GROUP settings.
Each of the directional control elements has four setting items as follow:
[DIRECTION]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ
8.1.15.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)

Normal voltage V1 provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is
determined by comparing normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1). If an angle between normal
voltage(V1) and normal current(I1) is within  90˚, the direction is forward otherwise it is
backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Max torque
initial angle is set for lags Normal voltage V1 for∠60˚.( Initial set value of Max Torque angle shall
be set ∠60˚ lagging angle).
If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is
lost and phase over current is not detected. On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for
‘NONE’, regardless of phase direction, phase over current is detected.
Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase over current. Depending on control
type, over current can be detected in Forward direction or reverse direction or regardless of
direction.

Following “Figure 8-12. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization” shows normal current
(I1) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane.
Polarizing Referance V1
Voltage:
Typical Fault Angle
Ze
ro
I1 M.T.A= 60° Lag
To
in e
rq
eL
ue
rq u
To
L in
um
e
x im
Ma
FO
RW
OR
RE
VE
D
RS
E
Figure 8-12. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization
The phase direction control in followingfour settings should be enabled.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type

[PHASE] Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
>Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60 Default NONE Step ~
M.P.V(V1): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set phase direction type.
NONE : Regardless of phase direction, phase overcurrent is detected
[NONE/FOR/REV]
by normal phase current(Ia,Ib,Ic).
FOR : (+) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction.
(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction.
REV : (+) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction.
(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type

[PHASE] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: NONE
>M.T.A: 60 Default 60 Step 1 degree
M.P.V(V1): 0.30
Block OC: YES Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle
setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing
[0~359:1°Lag]
voltage.
For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be
approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION /PHASE / M.P.V(V1)

[PHASE] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>M.P.V(V1): 0.30
Block OC: YES To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing
Voltage, V1). It is available to check the direction when a votage shall
0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT
be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of
setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Block OC

Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60 Default NO Step ~
M.P.V(V1): 0.30
>Block OC: YES Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
[NO/YES]
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.

8.1.15.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

Zero phase voltage 3V0 provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is
determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V0) and zero phase current(I0). If an angle from
zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is
forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359
˚. Initial set value of max torque angle is set for ∠60˚ lagging compared with Zero sequence
voltage(-V0).
Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground
over current is not detected. On the other hand, if ground direction control is set for ‘NONE’,
ground over current is detected regardless of direction.
Ground direction control type is set to detect ground over current. Depending on control type, over
current is detected or is not detected.
Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.
Polarizing Referance
-V0
Voltage:
Typical Fault
Angle
M.T.A= 60° Lag
Ze
I0
ro
To
rq
ue
Li
ne
ne
Li
u e
rq
To
m um
xi
Ma
FO
RW
OR
D
RE
VE
RS
E
V0
Figure 8-13. Phasor Graph for Ig Directional Polarization

The ground direction control in followingfour settings should be enabled.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type

[GROUND] Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
>Type: NONE
M.P.V(-3V0): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set Ground direction type.
NONE : Regardless of ground direction, ground overcurrent is detected
[NONE/FOR/REV]
by normal current(In).
FOR : (+) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction.
(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction.
REV : (+) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction.
(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A

[GROUND] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: NONE
M.P.V(-3V0): 0.30
Block OC: YES Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting
determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.
[0~359:1°Lag]
For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the
ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠60degree.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum
torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V(-3V0)

[GROUND] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>M.P.V(-3V0): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction.
Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction.
0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT
Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF),
direction checking is disabled.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / Block OC

[GROUND] Range NO, YES
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60 Default YES Step ~
M.P.V(-3V0): 0.30
[NO/YES]
8.1.15.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF)

The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the GROUND directional control. But
the default value of SEF directional element “Type” is ‘None’, and default value of “M.T.A(-V0) is
‘90°’ .
8.1.15.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))

Negative Sequence voltage V2 provides negative sequence pole direction in power system.
Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V2) and
negative current(I2). If an angle from negative sequence voltage (-V2) to negative sequence
current (I2) is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise,
reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Maximum Torque Angle
initial set value lags from negative sequence voltage(-V2) for ∠60˚.
If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is
cancelled and over current is not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction control
type is set for ‘NONE’, over current is detected regardless of direction.
Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence overcurrent. Depending on
control type, overcurrent is detected in forward or reverse or both direction.
Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I2) direction polarity.

Polarizing Referance
-V2
Voltage:
Typical Fault Angle

M.T.A= 60° Lag
Ze
I2
or
To
rqu
e
Li
ne
e
e L in
rq u
To
um
im
M ax
FO
R
W
O
R
D
R
EV
ER
SE
V2
Figure 8-14. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization
The negative sequence directional controls in followingfour settings should be enabled.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / Type
[NEG SEQ’] Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
>Type: NONE
M.P.V(-V2): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set Negative sequence direction type.
NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, over current is
[NONE/FOR/REV]
detected by normal current(I2).
FOR : (+) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward
negative sequence direction.
(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse
REV : (+) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse
(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.T.A

[NEG SEQ’] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: NONE
M.P.V(-V2): 0.30
Block OC: YES In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum
Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I2) against zero phase
[0~359:1°Lag]
voltage(V2) is set
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.P.V(-V2)
[NEG SEQ’]
Range 0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.80 xVT
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60
Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>M.P.V(-V2): 0.30
Block OC: YES
Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage
shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise,
0(OFF),0.10~0.80xVT
direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction
checking is disabled.
GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / BLOCK OC

[NEG SEQ’] Range NO, YES
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60 Default YES Step ~
M.P.V(-V2): 0.30
[NO/YES]

8.1.16. Broken Conductor

The broken conductor element operates when the ratio between the negative sequence current (I2)
and the positive sequence current (I1) of the relay is larger than the operation setting (pickup)
value. Under normal conditions I2/I1 ratio is zero but when a fault occurs on the load, this ratio of
I2/I1 increases.
‘Broken Conductor’ protection element configuration is as below.
46BC
Function 46BC
Pickup 46BCT
Time Delay
Minimum Curr.
I₁
I₂
E150P1E
Figure 8-15. 46BC Function Block Diagram
.
The figure below shows the function logic diagram of Broken Conductor.
Function
E46BCE &
Min Curr.
Ia +
-
Positive
/Negative
Ib +
Sequence
+ & 46BC
- -
Current
Calculation Time Delay
Ic + 46BCT
- 0
Pickup
Figure 8-16. 46BC Function Logic Diagram

GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Function

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default DISABLE Step
Time Delay: 4.00
Min.I: 60 Set the function of broken conduct element as enable or disable.
Max.I: 500
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Pickup(I2/I1)

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 1~100 %
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 5 Step 1%
Time Delay: 4.00
Min.I: 60
>Max.I: 500
Set the Broken Conductor pickup level.
[1~100:1 %]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Time Delay

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 4.00
Min.I: 60
>Max.I: 500
Set the Broken Conductor function delay time.
[0.00:600.00:0.01 s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 0(OFF), 1~630A
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 60 Step 1A
Time Delay: 4.00
>Min.I: 60 Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the broken
>Max.I: 500
conduct element to operate.
[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A]
Positive sequence current is less than setting value, element will not
operate.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 0(OFF), 10~1600
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 500 Step 1A
Time Delay: 4.00
>Min.I: 60 Enter the maximum value of current required to allow the broken
>Max.I: 500
conduct element to operate.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1 A]
Positive sequence current is greater than setting value, element will not
operate.
8.1.17. Voltage (27/59/64N)

In this section, undervoltage, overvoltage and neutral elements will be described. And the voltage
menu is composed with 8 sub-menus as follows:
[VOLTAGE]
>1.UNDER VOLT1
2.UNDER VOLT2
3.UV RESTORATION
4.OVER VOLT1
5.OVER VOLT2
6.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT1
7.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT2
8.OV RESTORATION
9.NEQ OVER VOLT1
10.NEQ OVER VOLT2
8.1.17.1. Undervoltage (27)

In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two under voltage
elements make a trip or alarm operation.
The under voltage element are set in GROUP setting. It is available to select a number of phase to
be checked for undervoltage function.
The under voltage element are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.

1) UNDER VOLT1 Setup
The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Function

[UNDER VOLT1] Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL
>Function: OFF
Pickup: 0.80 Default OFF Step ~
Time Delay: 5.00
Min. V: 0.10 Set the function of under voltage 1 element as enable or disable.
Voltage Type: 1P
[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Pickup

[UNDER VOLT1] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: OFF
>Pickup: 0.80 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
Time Delay: 5.00
Min. V: 0.10 Enter the pickup value for under voltage 1 element.
Voltage Type: 1P
This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 0.80xVT
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be less
than 10.56kV (= 13.2kV * 0.80) to operate this element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Time Delay

[UNDER VOLT1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: OFF
>Time Delay: 5.00
Min. V: 0.10
Voltage Type: 1P Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] during this time delay below the pickup level, this element will operate.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Min. V

[UNDER VOLT1] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: OFF
Pickup: 0.80 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Time Delay: 5.00
>Min. V: 0.10
Voltage Type: 1P Set the minimum voltage to operate this element. This setting is the
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT] ratio of the rated voltage.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Voltage Type
[UNDER VOLT1]
Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Function: OFF
Pickup: 0.80
Default 1P Step ~
Time Delay: 5.00
Min. V: 0.10
Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage.
>Voltage Type: 1P
1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
[1P/2P/3P]
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
2) UNDER VOLT2 Setup
The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.
3) UV RESTORATION Setup
The undervoltage restoration should be enabled to followingsettings.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Function
[UV RESTORATION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Set whether to use undervoltage restoration function.
Source Side: VS
This function is a function to automatically do close operation when the
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
voltage returns to normal status after trip by undervoltage function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Pickup

[UV RESTORATION] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Enter the pickup value for undervoltage restoration element.
Source Side: VS
When the voltage is above the setting value, it is considered that the
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
voltage returns to normal status.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Time Delay

[UV RESTORATION] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Set the time delay for this function. If the voltage remains above the
Source Side: VS
pickup level during this setting time, the recloser does automatically
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
close operation.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Reset Time

[UV RESTORATION] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Pickup: 0.95
Time Delay: 30.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01sec
>Reset Time: 5.00
Source Side: VS Sets the reset time of the undervoltage restoration function.
Voltage Type: 3P
The undervoltage restration function does not work if the voltage does
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
not return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by the
undervoltage function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Source Side

[UV RESTORATION] Range VS,VL, VS&VL
Pickup: 0.95
Time Delay: 30.00 Default VS Step ~
Reset Time: 5
>Source Side: VS Undervoltage restoration operates upon selected side of voltage
Voltage Type: 3P
sensing.
[VS/VL/VS&VL]

 VS&VL : Undervoltage element operates one of either Source side
or load side voltage becomes higher voltage level compared with
pickup setting in UV RESTORATION.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Voltage Type

[UV RESTORATION] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Pickup: 0.95
Time Delay: 30.00 Default 1P Step ~
Reset Time: 5
Source Side: VS Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage Restoration.
>Voltage Type: 3P
[1P/2P/3P]

8.1.17.2. Overvoltage (59), Neutral Overvoltage (64N) and Negative Sequence

Overvoltage (47)
In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, over voltage
elements makes a trip or alarm operation. Over voltage elements is set in GROUP setting. Phase
overvoltage(59) elements are available to select a number of phase to be checked for overvoltage
function.
Neutral overvoltage elements operate with zero sequence voltage (3V0) by the input phase voltage.
And negative Sequence overvoltage elements (V2) also operate by the input phase voltage. The
over voltage element are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.
1) OVER VOLT1 Setup
The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Function

[OVER VOLT1] Range DISABLE, TR, AL, TR&AL
>Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 5.00
Voltage Type: 1P Set the function of over voltage 1 element as enable or disable.
[DIS/TR/AL/TR&AL]
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Pickup

[OVER VOLT1] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 5.00
Voltage Type: 1P Enter the pickup value for over voltage element1.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be
higher than 14.52kV (= 13.2kV * 1.10) to operate this element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Time Delay

[OVER VOLT1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Time Delay: 5.00
Voltage Type: 1P
Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] above this pickup level for this time delay, this element will operate.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

[OVER VOLT1] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 1.10 Default 1P Step ~
Time Delay: 5.00
>Voltage Type: 1P Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage
[1P/2P/3P]
2) OVER VOLT2 Setup
The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
3) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 1 Setup
The neutral overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However,
there is no setting menu for voltage type.
4) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 2 Setup
The neutral overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However,
there is no setting menu for voltage type.
5) NEQ OVERVOLT 1 Setup
The negative sequence overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.
6) NEQ OVERVOLT 2 Setup
The negative sequence overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

7) OV RESTORATION Setup
The overvoltage restoration should be enabled to followingsettings.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Function
[OV RESTORATION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 1.05 Default DISABLE Default DISABLE
Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Set whether to use overvoltage restoration function.
Source Side: VS
Voltage Type: 3P This function is a function to automatically close when voltage returns
[DIS/TR/AL/TR&AL]
to normal status after trip by overvoltage and neutral overvoltage
function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Pickup

[OV RESTORATION] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Function: OFF
Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Enter the pickup value for over voltage restoration element.
Source Side: VS
When the voltage is below the setting value, it is considered that the
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
voltage returns to normal status.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Time Delay

[OV RESTORATION] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: OFF
>Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Set the time delay for this function.
Source Side: VS
If the voltage remains below the pickup level during this setting time,
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
the recloser does automatically close operation.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Reset Time
[OV RESTORATION]
Range 1~100 min
Function: OFF
Pickup: 1.05
Default 5 Step 1min
Time Delay: 30.00
>Reset Time: 5
Set the operation reset time of overvoltage restoration function.
Source Side: VS
Voltage Type: 3P
The overvoltage restoration function does not work if the voltage does
[1~100:1m]
not return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by
overvoltage function.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Source Side

[OV RESTORATION] Range VS,VL, VS&VL
Pickup: 1.05
Time Delay: 30.00 Default VS Step ~
Reset Time: 5
>Source Side: VS Overvoltage restoration operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
Voltage Type: 3P
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
 VS&VL : Overvoltage element operates one of either Source side or
load side voltage becomes lower voltage level compared with pickup
setting in OV RESTORATION.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Voltage Type

[OV RESTORATION] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Pickup: 1.05
Time Delay: 30.00 Default 1P Step ~
Reset Time: 5
Source Side: VS Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage Restoration.
>Voltage Type: 3P
.
[1P/2P/3P]

8.1.18. Frequency (81)

In this section, underfrequency, overfrequency and frequency delay elements will be described.
And the frequency menu is composed with 6 sub-menus as follows:
[FREQUENCY]
>1.UNDER FREQUENCY1
2.UNDER FREQUENCY2
3.OVER FREQUENCY1
4.OVER FREQUENCY2
5.FREQUENCY DELAY
6.AUTO RESTORATION
8.1.18.1. Underfrequency (81U)

The underfrequency element is activated to trip when the distribution system frequency drops
below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system frequency is measured
from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for
Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection(  ), VA-B voltage is zero crossing and if wye
connection(Y), VA-N voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.)
The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control..
The underfrequency elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in
user interface panel.
The underfrequency element should be enabled to followingsettings.
1) UNDER FREQUENCY 1 Setup
The under frequency 1 should be enabled to followingsettings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Function

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
Set whether under frequency element 1 is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 58.50 Default 58.50 Step 0.01Hz
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup.
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
It sets the delay time to operate the underfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 2.00
>Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
It sets the time to reset the underfrequency element
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. Volt

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
>Min.Volt: 0.10 Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT] element to operate.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
Pickup: 58.50
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 60 Step 1A
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
>Min. I: 60 Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A] underfrequency element to operate.

2) UNDER FREQUENCY 2 Setup
The underfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the underfrequency 1.
8.1.18.2. Overfrequency (81O)

In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency
element makes a trip operation. Overfrequency element is set in GROUP setting. If VTs is delta  -
connection VA-B is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, VA-N.is to be zero-crossing.
Overfrequency minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when
recloser is closed locally or remotely.
The overfrequency elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in
1) OVER FREQUENCY 1 Setup
The over frequency 1 should be enabled to followingsettings;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /OVER FREQUENCY1 / Function

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
Set whether over frequency element 1 is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup.
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
Sets the delay time to operate the overfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 2.00
>Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
Sets the time to reset the overfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. V

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Pickup: 62.50
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Reset Time: 2.00
>Min. Volt: 0.10
Min. I: 60 Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the overfrequency
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT] element and overfrequency to operate.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
Pickup: 62.50
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 60 Step 1A
Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
>Min. I: 60 Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
[0(OFF),1~630:1A] overfrequency element to operate.
2) OVER FREQUENCY 2 Setup
The overfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the overfrequency 1.

8.1.18.3. Frequency Decay (81D)

When frequency fluctuates due to unbalance between load and active power in power system,
ETR300-R offers frequency decay element in order to prevent unstable condition in the power
system.
The frequency decay elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in
Frequency decay should be enabled as follows;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Function

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default DISABLE DISABLE ~
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Freq: 45.00
Set whether frequency decay element is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Pickup(Hz/sec)

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.01~5.00 Hz/sec
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01Hz/sec
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Freq: 45.00
Enter the level of which the frequency decay element is to pickup.
[0.01~5.00:0.01Hz]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Time Delay

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.05~600.00sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01sec
>Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00 Set the delay time for frequency decay elements. According to pickup
Min.Freq: 45.00
setting value, time window of frequency decay rate is changed
[0.05~600.00:0.01s]
described in followingtable.
Fault Trip Time of Frequency decay element is like below;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.05~600.00sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01sec
Time Delay: 2.00
>Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Freq: 45.00 Set the reset time of Frequency decay element pickup. It must
[0.05~600.00:0.01s] configure reset time longer than time window.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Freq

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 45.00~65.00 Hz
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 50.00 Step 0.01 Hz
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00 Set the minimum frequency in order to operate frequency decay
>Min.Freq: 50.00
element. When frequency is bigger than setting value, it will be
[45.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
operated.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Volt

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Freq: 45.00 Set the minimum voltage in order to operate frequency decay element.
>Min.Volt: 0.10
Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
value, it will be operated.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. I

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0(OFF), 1~630A
>Min.I: 60
Type : ABSOLUTE Default 60 Step 1A
Set the minimum current in order to operate frequency decay element.
Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting
[0(OFF), 1~630A:1A]
value, it will be operated.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range INCREASE, DECREASE, ABSOLUTE
Min.I: 60
>Type : ABSOLUTE Default ABSOLUTE Step ~
Set operation trend type of Frequency decay element.
When INCREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay
[INC/DEC/ABSOLUTE]
rate is increased.
When DECREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay
rate is decreased.
When ABSOLUTE is configured, it operates when absolute value of
frequency decay rate is bigger than pickup setting value.
8.1.18.4. Frequency Auto Restoration (81R)

The ETR300-R has an auto restoration function that automatically trips the recloser when the
frequency returns to normal status after a fault trip by the frequency element.
Auto Restoration of frequency element should be enabled as follows;

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /AUTO RESTORATION / Function
[AUTO RESTORATION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5
Min. Volt: 0.10
Set whether auto restoration for frequency element is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Pickup

[AUTO RESTORATION] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
>Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Enter the level of which the Auto Restoration of frequency element is
Min. Volt: 0.10
to pickup.
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
Auto Restoration must be operated when the frequency on source side
is higher than the setting value. However, all frequency elements
should not be picked up at this time.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Time Delay

[AUTO RESTORATION] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
>Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5 Set the time delay for this function.
Min. Volt: 0.10
The recloser is automatically closed when the frequency on source side
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
remains above the pickup level during setting time.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Reset Time

[AUTO RESTORATION] Range 1~100min
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 59.98 Default 5 Step 1 min
Time Delay: 30.00
>Reset Time: 5 Set the operation reset time of this function.
Min. Volt: 0.10
The auto restoration function does not work if the voltage does not
[1~100:1m]
return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by the
frequency function.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Min. Volt

[AUTO RESTORATION] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 30.00
Reset Time: 5
>Min. Volt: 0.10 Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the Auto Restoration of
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT] frequency element.

8.1.19. Power (32)

In this section, forward power elements and directional power elements will be described. And the
power setting menus are composed with 3 sub-menus as follows:
[POWER]
>1.FUNCTION
2.FORWARD POWER
3.DIRECTIONAL POWER
8.1.19.1. Common Setting for Power elements

This setting applies to all power elements of forward power and directional power elements;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / Function

[FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, TR, AL, TR&AL
>Function: DISABLE
BLK After RS: 5.00 Default DISABLE Step ~
Set the function of power elements as enable or disable.
[OFF,TR,AL,TR&AL]
the alarm.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / BLK After CL

[FUNCTION] Range 0.02~600.00 sec
>Function: DISABLE
BLK After CL: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01sec
Set the Block Time After Close for power elements.
To prevent malfunction of power elements by inrush current incurred at
[0.02~600.00:0.01s]
the restoration of load supply, set the time that each power element’s
operation is suppressed after the restoration of load supply. After close
opration, all function for power elements are blocked during this set
time.

8.1.19.2. Forward Power(32FP)

ETR300R provides the two of the Forward Power (32FP) elements. If three phase active power is
kept above the pickup level for a certain time. Three phase active power is calculated as below, and
it operates only about the forward (positive) active power.
 WYE VT Connection Type
 DELTA VT Connection Type
*. Note )
NON-OPERATION OPERATION
-P P+
0
Figure 8-17. Forward Power(32FP) Elements Characteristic
The forward power should be enabled to followingsettings;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Pickup1

[FORWARD POWER] Range 0.00~300.00 MW
>Pickup1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 5.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01
Pickup2: 0.00
Time Delay2: 5.00
Set the pickup level of forward power element 1

0(OFF),0.00~300.00MW
*. NOTE ) Pickup2 setting is same as Pickup1 setting above.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Time Delay1

[FORWARD POWER] Range 0.02~600.00 sec
Pickup1: 0.00
>Time Delay1: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01
Pickup2: 0.00
Time Delay2: 5.00
Set each time delay of forward power element 1.

[0.02~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.
8.1.19.3. Directional Power(32P)

ETR300-R has two directional power(32P) elements. If measured three phase power is kept above
the pickup level for a certain time and measured phasor angle of the power is located on operation
area, the element are operated.
Directional
Power
Operation
Area
Minimum
Operation
Power Torque
Angle P
Restraint
Area
Figure 8-18. Directional Power(32P) Elements Characteristic

The direction power should be enabled to followingsettings;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Min.Power1

[DIRECTION POWER] Range 0(OFF), -300.00~300.00 MW
>Min.Power1: OFF
Angle1: 0.00 Default 0(OFF) Step 0.01 MW
Time Delay1: 0.00
Min.Power2: OFF
Angle2: 0.00
Set the minimum power level for directional power element 1.
-300.00~+300.00:0.01
*. NOTE ) Min.Power2 setting is same as Min.Power1 setting above.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Angle 1

[DIRECTION POWER] Range 0.00~359.99 degree
Min.Power1: OFF
>Angle1: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 degree
Time Delay1: 0.00
Min.Power2: OFF
Angle2: 0.00
Set torque degree for directional power element 1.
0.00~359.99:0.01deg
*. NOTE ) Angle2 setting is same as Angle1 setting above.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER / Time Delay 1

[DIRECTION POWER] Range 0.02~600.00 sec
Min.Power1: OFF
Angle1: 0.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay1: 1.00
Min.Power2: OFF
Angle2: 0.00
Set time delay for directional power element 1.
[0.02~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

8.1.20. Demand (49)

ETR300-R has five types for demand detect elements.When Demand currnet or demand power
over the detect level is maintained a constant time during the detect element activation, this element
is detected. The detect level and delay time can be set individually per phase current, ground
current, negative sequence current, active power and reactive power elements.
And the demand current menu is composed with 5 sub-menus as follows:
[DEMAND]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.NEG SEQ’
4.ACTIVE POWER
5.REACTIVE POWER
8.1.20.1. Phase Demand Current (49P)

Phase demand current element setting items are same as following;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE /Function

[PHASE] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 500 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Set whether phase demand current element is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Pickup

[PHASE] Range 10~1600A
Function: DISABLE
Time Delay: 10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Set the pickup level of the phase demand current element
[10~1600:1 A]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Time Delay

[PHASE] Range 0.00~600.00
Pickup: 500
>Time Delay: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01sec
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15
Set the time delay of the phase demand current element
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Demand Type

[PHASE] Range THERMAL, BLOCK
Pickup: 500
Time Delay: 10.00 Default THERMAL Step ~
>Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15 Set the type of arithmetic operation for the phase demand current
[THERMAL/BLOCK] element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Thermal Interval

[PHASE] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Pickup: 500
Time Delay: 10.00 Default 15 Step ~
Demand Type:THERMAL
>Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15 Set the interval of the phase demand current element when thermal type
[5/10/15/20/30/60m] is seleted for arithmetic operation.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Block Interval

[PHASE] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Pickup: 500
Time Delay: 10.00 Default 15 Step ~
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
>Block Interval: 15 Set the interval of the phase demand current element when block type
[5/10/15/20/30/60m] is seleted for arithmetic operation.
8.1.20.2. Ground Demand Current (49G)

Ground demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.
8.1.20.3. Negative Sequence Demand Current (49Q)

Negative sequence demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand
current element.

8.1.20.4. ACTIVE POWER Setup

Active demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.
8.1.20.5. REACTIVE POWER Setup

Reactive demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.

8.1.21. Z0 Admittance (21YN)

High Impedance Fault occurs when the power lines come into contact with the earth. Due to the
high fault resistance of the contact earth, the magnitude of the fault current becomes very low.
Magnitude of the fault current varies depending on the condition of the earth. Fault current is not
generated when the line comes in contact with dry sand or asphalt making the fault detection very
difficult.
However, high impedance fault detection is inevitably required because of the risk of electric shock
or fire caused by arcing due to fault current flowing into the earth when the line comes in contact
with the earth.
It is easy to detect high impedance faults using Z0 admittance element provided by the ETR300-R.
This function is set in Primary or Alternate setting group and "PROTECTION ENABLED" LED
on the user interface panel must be ON for operation. Furthermore, this function does not work
during cold load pickup durations.
This Z0 admittance element is applicable to high-resistance grounding systems, non-grounding

systems, and compensating grounding systems. Neutral admittance uses the neutral conductance
(real part of the neutral admittance) and the neutral susceptance (imaginary part of the neutral
admittance) and the protection function is activated when the neutral voltage or the neutral current
is above the pickup value. When the measured neutral admittance value is greater than the set
value, the trip operation is performed.
The trip operating zone can be set using Operational Type, Directional Type, Up Susceptance,
Down Susceptance, Right Conductance, and Left Conductance setting values. Particularly, the
shape of the operating zone is determined according to the Operational Type and Directional Type
settings, as shown in “Figure 8-19. Z0 Admittance Operating Zone”.

Directional Type
Forward Reverse None (Bidirectional)
B0
B0 B0
GRight G0
G
GLeft G0 GLeft GRight G0
B0 B0 B0
Operational Type
BUp BUp
B
G0 G0 G0
BDown BDown
B0 B0 B0
BUp BUp
G&B
GRight G0 GLeft G0 GLeft GRight G0
BDown BDown
GRight : Right Conductance BUp : Up Susceptance

GLeft : Left Conductance BDown : Down Susceptance
Figure 8-19. Z0 Admittance Operating Zone

Z0 admittance element setting items are same as following;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Function

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Type : G&B Default DISABLE Step ~
Direction: NONE
Min. Isef: 1.0
Min. 3V0 : 0.10
Set whether to use Z0 admittance element.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Type

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range G, B, G&B
>Function: DISABLE
>Type : G&B Default G&B Step ~
Direction: NONE
Min. Isef: 1.0 Select the operational type of Z0 admittance element.
Min. 3V0 : 0.10
[G&B/G/B]
G&B: Determines the operating zone by Conductance (real part of
admittance) and Susceptance (imaginary part of admittance)
G: Determines the operating zone by Conductance (real part of
admittance).
B: Determines the operating zone by Susceptance (imaginary part of
admittance).

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Direction

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
>Function: DISABLE
>Type : G&B Default NONE Step ~
>Direction: NONE
Min. Isef: 1.0 Select the directional type of Z0 admittance element.
Min. 3V0 : 0.10
[NONE/FOR/REV]
NONE
− When G&B and G type, it operates if the Conductance is out of the
Right Conductance and Left Conductance setting.
− When G&B and B type, it operates if the Susceptance is out of the
Up Susceptance and Down Susceptance settings.
FORWARD
Right Conductance settings.
− When G&B and B type, it operates if the Susceptance is out of the
Up Susceptance settings.
REVERSE
Left Conductance settings.
When G&B and B type, it operates if the Susceptance is out of the
Down Susceptance settings.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Min. Isef

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range 0.1 ~ 160.0 A
>Function: DISABLE
>Type : G&B Default 1.0 Step 0.1 A
>Direction: NONE
>Min. Isef: 1.0
Min. 3V0 : 0.10 Set the minimum sensitive earth current to operate Z0 admittance
[0.1~160.0:0.1A] element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Min. 3V0

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
>Function: DISABLE
>Type : G&B Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
>Direction: NONE
>Min. Isef: 1.0
>Min. 3V0 : 0.10 Set the minimum zero sequence voltage to operate Z0 admittance
[0.10~14.00:0.01xVT] element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Time Delay

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Direction: NONE
>Min. Isef: 1.0 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Min. 3V0 : 0.10
>Time Delay: 2.00 Set the trip delay time of Z0 admittance element.
>Reset Time: 0.10
Z0 admittance must be maintained in the operating zone for the set time
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
to perform trip operation.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Reset Time

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Direction: NONE
>Min. Isef: 1.0 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 sec
>Min. 3V0 : 0.10
>Time Delay: 2.00
>Reset Time: 0.10
Set the reset time of Z0 admittance element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Con(G)-Right

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] Range 0.02 ~ 500.00 mS
>Reset Time: 0.10
>Con(G)-Right: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 mS
>Con(G)-Left : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Up : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Down : 1.00 Set the Right(Forward) Conductance to determine the operating zone of
[0.02~500.00:0.1ms] Z0 admittance element.
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Con(G)-Left

>Reset Time: 0.10
>Con(G)-Left : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Up : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Down : 1.00 Set the Left(Reverse) Conductance to determine the operating zone of
GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Sus(B)-Up

>Reset Time: 0.10
>Con(G)-Left : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Up : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Down : 1.00 Set the Up(Forward) Susceptance to determine the operating zone of

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Sus(B)-Down

>Reset Time: 0.10
>Con(G)-Left : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Up : 1.00
>Sus(B)-Down : 1.00 Set the Down(Reverse) Susceptance to determine the operating zone of

8.1.22. Hotline Tag

When “HOT LINE TAG” LED is ON in the front panel, the time overcurrent elements are operated
with the setting value of this menu(However, this setting is also applied for sensitive earth faults).
Also, Lockout with 1 time trip even the reclosing function is activated. The Hot Line Tag function
is composed of phase, ground, SEF and negative sequence overcurrent elements with T-C curves
for Hot Line Tag function only.
Hotline Tag menu is composed with 4 sub-menus as follows;
[HOTLINE TAG]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ’
8.1.22.1. PHASE
In this menu, T-C curve of phase time overcurrent elememts applied in Hotline Tag function is set.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Curve

[PHASE] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
>Curve: [US-NI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default US-NI Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 Set T-C curve of hot line tag function for phase time overcurrent
Reset Method: INST
elements. Applicable curve ragne refers to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-
[curves: total 62]
current operation characteristic setting range”.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Time Dial

[PHASE] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Curve: [US-NI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application
[0.05~15.00:0.01] changes the slop of a curve.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Time Add.

[PHASE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Curve: [US-NI]
>Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Adding a time onto a set curve.
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s] More delays due to this set time including its own delay time.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / M.R.T

[PHASE] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: [US-NI]
Time Add.: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time,
Reset Method: INST
tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be
[0.00~10.00:0.01 s]
cooperated with other protection device or fuse.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Reset Method

[PHASE] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-NI]
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold
>Reset Method: INST
load pickup element is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
8.1.22.2. GROUND
This menu sets the T-C curve of the ground time overcurrent elememts applied in the Hotline Tag
function. The setting items are the same as the PHASE menu.

8.1.22.3. SEF
This menu sets the time delay for sensitive earth fault in Hotline Tag function.
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / SEF / Time Delay

[SEF] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
>Time Delay: 10.00
Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
Set the time delay of sensitive earth fault in Hotline Tag function.
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
8.1.22.4. NEG SEQ’

This menu sets the T-C curve of the negative sequence time overcurrent elememts applied in the
Hotline Tag function. The setting items are the same as the PHASE menu.

8.1.23. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves

The ETR300-R has a total of 62 kinds of standard curves: ANSI / IEEE curves, IEC curves, US
curves and Definite time curves, KEPCO ES curves, KERI curves, 4 user-defined curves, 3 fuse
curves, 32 non standard curves. According to Standard ANSI / IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3, tirp
operation times and reset times can be defined as follows.
The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :
US
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA
ANSI/IEEE
IEC
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA
ES
USER-DEFINED
RESET TIME
Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2))
Table 8-3. Curve Factor

TD Time dial
TA Time adder
α, β, γ Characteristic constant
M Multiples of pickup current
Rt Reset characteristic constant
NOTE :
“Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸,
otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.

8.1.23.1. User-Defined Curves

The ETR300-R supports 4 user-defined curves for user to implement their own curve according to
their requirement. The user can define the aforementioned characteristic constant of trip operation
time and reset time equation in 4 user-defined curves.
[USER CURVE]
>1.USER CURVE1
2.USER CURVE2
3.USER CURVE3
4.USER CURVE4
1) USER CURVE1 Setup
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
>Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0200 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000
User defined curve factor α

[0~150.9998:0.0001]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Factor a: 59.5000
>Factor b: 2.0000 Default 2.0000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000
User defined curve factor β

[0~150.9998:0.0001]
GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Factor a: 59.5000
>Factor r: 1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000
User defined curve factor γ

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Factor a: 59.5000
Factor r: 1.8000
>Factor rt: 59.5000
User defined curve factor rt

[0~150.9998:0.0001]
2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 Setup
USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above.

8.1.23.2. Standard Curves Coefficients
Table 8-4. US Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Normally Inverse 5.95 2.0 0.18 5.95
Very Inverse 3.88 2.0 0.0963 3.55
Extremely Inverse 5.67 2.0 0.0352 5.67
Short Time Inverse 0.00342 0.02 0.00262 0.323
Short Time Very Inverse 1.9925 2.0 0.0475 1.992
Table 8-5. IEC Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Very Inverse 13.500 1.000 0.0 13.500
Long Time Inverse 135.000 1.000 0.0 135.00
Short Time Inverse 0.0500 0.0400 0.0 0.500
Table 8-6. ES Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Very Inverse 3.985 1.95 0.1084 3.985
Long Time Very Inverse 15.94 1.95 0.4336 15.94
Table 8-7. ANSI/IEEE Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Very Inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
Table 8-8. Definite Time

Curves α β γ Rt
Definite Time 1sec 0.0 - 1.0 1.0
Definite Time 10sec 0.0 - 10.0 10.0

8.1.23.3. Non Standard Curves
Table 8-9. Non Standard Curves

McGraw-Edison recloser curves
Phase Ground
Old New Old New
A 101 1 102
B 117 2 135
C 133 3 140
D 116 4 106
E 132 5 114
K 162 6 136
L 107 7 152
M 118 8 113
N 104 8* 111
P 115 9 131
R 105 11 141
T 161 13 142
V 137 14 119
W 138 15 112
Y 120 16 139
Z 134 18 151
Table 8-10. KEPCO(Korea) Curvers

Curves
N1, N2, N3, N4

8.1.23.4. Fuse Curves
1) RI Curve Trip Time
“RI” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with mechanical relay. When “RI” curve is
applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.
1
Trip Time  I Is 
0.339  0.236
Here, TD is set time dial,
Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.
I is actual fault current.
2) HR Curve Trip Time
“HR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “HR” curve is
applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.
 I 
log 2    ( 3.832)  3.66 1
Trip Time  10  Is 

0.1

3) FR Curve Trip Time
“FR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “FR” is applied,
inverse protection element is operated by following formula.
 I 
log   ( 7.16)  3.0 1 I
 , when 1.2   2.0 ··formula (1)
0.1 IS
 I 
log   ( 5.4 )  2.47 1 I
 , when 2.0   2.66 ·formula (2)
0.1 IS
 I 
log   ( 4.24) 1.98 1 I
 , when 2.66  ··formula (3)
0.1 IS

8.1.23.5. Curves
Table 8-11. Curve List

No Curve No Curve No Curve
1 A(101) 22 3(140) 43 ES-NI
2 B(117) 23 4(106) 44 ES-VI
3 C(133) 24 5(114) 45 USER-1
4 D(116) 25 6(136) 46 USER-2
5 E(132) 26 7(152) 47 USER-3
6 IEC-EI 27 8(113) 48 USER-4
7 K(162) 28 8*(111) 49 DEF-1S
8 L(107) 29 9(131) 50 DEF-10S
9 M(118) 30 11(141) 51 IEEE-NI
10 N(104) 31 13(142) 52 IEEE-VI
11 IEC-NI 32 14(119) 53 IEEE-EI
12 P(115) 33 15(112) 54 US-STI
13 R(105) 34 16(139) 55 US-STVI
14 T(161) 35 18(151) 56 IEC-LTI
15 V(137) 36 N1 57 IEC-STI
16 IEC-VI 37 N2 58 ES-LTVI
17 W(138) 38 N3 59 ES-EI
18 Y(120) 39 N4 60 RI
19 Z(134) 40 US-NI 61 HR
20 1(102) 41 US -VI 62 FR
21 2(135) 42 US -EI
Table 8-12. Curve Characteristics
*. Curve time is Clearing Time.

*. Operation accuracy is +/-5% or +/-10㎳.

1) US Nermally Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : US NORMALLY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
15.00
13.00
2 11.00 2
9.00
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
7.00
1 1
0.9 5.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 4.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
3.00
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.5 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 8-20. US Normally Inverse Curves

2) US Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : US VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
15.00
13.00
11.00
1 1
0.9 9.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 7.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 5.00 0.5
0.4 4.00 0.4
0.3 3.00 0.3
0.2 2.00 0.2
0.1 1.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.5 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-21. US Very Inverse Curves

3) US Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : US EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 15.00 0.6
0.5 13.00 0.5
11.00
0.4 0.4
9.00
0.3 0.3
7.00
0.2 5.00 0.2
4.00
3.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 2.00 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 1.00 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.5 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-22. US Extremely Inverse Curves

4) US Short Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : US SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
15.00
1 13.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 11.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
9.00
0.6 0.6
0.5 7.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
5.00
0.3 4.00 0.3
3.00
0.2 0.2
2.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 1.00 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.5
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-23. US Short Time Inverse Curves

5) US Short Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : US SHORT TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 15.00 0.7
13.00
0.6 0.6
11.00
0.5 0.5
9.00
0.4 0.4
7.00
0.3 0.3
5.00
0.2 4.00 0.2
3.00
0.1 2.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 1.00 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.5
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-24. US Short Time Very Inverse Curves

6) IEC Normally Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC NORMALLY INVERSE 60
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 1 2
0.8
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
0.7
0.6
1 0.5 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.4 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.3 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.2 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.1 0.2
0.1 0.05 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-25. IEC Normally Inverse Curves

7) IEC Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC VERY INVERSE 60
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1
0.4 0.4
0.8
0.3 0.7 0.3
0.6
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.2 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.1
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-26. IEC Very Inverse Curves

8) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
1,000 1,000
900 900
800 800
700 700
500 : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE 500
300 300
200 200
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 1 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.8 0.07
0.06 0.7 0.06
0.05 0.6 0.05
0.04 0.5 0.04
0.4
0.03 0.03
0.3
0.02 0.02
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-27. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

9) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
1,000 1,000
900 900
800 800
700 700
500 : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 500
300 300
200 200
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1
4 4
0.8
3 0.7 3
0.6
0.5
2 2
0.4
0.3
1 1
0.9 0.2 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.1
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.05
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-28. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

10) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
1,000 1,000
900 900
800 800
700 700
500 : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE 500
300 300
200 200
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
1
0.3 0.3
0.8
0.7
0.2 0.6 0.2
0.5
0.4
0.1 0.3 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.2 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.1
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.05
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-29. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

11) ES Normally Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ES NORMALLY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 15.00 3
13.00
2 11.00 2
9.00
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
7.00
1 5.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
4.00
0.7 0.7
0.6 3.00 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3
0.2 1.00 0.2
0.1 0.5 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-30. ES Normally Inverse Curves

12) ES Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ES VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
15.00
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
13.00
11.00
1 9.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 7.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
5.00
0.5 0.5
4.00
0.4 0.4
3.00
0.3 0.3
2.00
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.5
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-31. ES Very Inverse Curves

13) ES Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ES EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
15.00
0.2 13.00 0.2
11.00
9.00
0.1 7.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
5.00
0.07 0.07
0.06 4.00 0.06
0.05 0.05
3.00
0.04 0.04
0.03 2.00 0.03
0.02 0.02
1.00
0.5
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-32. ES Extremely Inverse Curves

14) ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ES LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 15.00 7
6 13.00 6
5 11.00 5
4 9.00 4
3 7.00 3
5.00
2 2
4.00
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
3.00
1 1
0.9 2.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-33. ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves

15) IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEEE NORMALLY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
15.00
13.00
10 10
9 11.00 9
8 8
7 9.00 7
6 7.00 6
5 5
4 5.00 4
4.00
3 3
3.00
2 2
2.00
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 1.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.5 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-34. IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

16) IEEE Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEEE VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 15.00 8
7 13.00 7
6 6
11.00
5 5
9.00
4 4
7.00
3 3
5.00
2 4.00 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
3.00
1 2.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 1.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-35. IEEE Very Inverse Curves

17) IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : US EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
15.00
2 2
13.00
11.00
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
9.00
1 7.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 5.00 0.7
0.6 4.00 0.6
0.5 0.5
3.00
0.4 0.4
0.3 2.00 0.3
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.5 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-36. IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

18) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : DEFINITE TIME 1 sec, 10 sec 60
30 30
20 20
10 DEF-10S 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 DEF-1S 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-37. Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)

19) KEPRI Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
N2
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
N4
N3
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
N1
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-38. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)

20) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : A, B, C, D, E 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
C
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 B 0.07
0.06 D 0.06
0.05 E 0.05
0.04
A 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-39. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

21) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : KP, L, M, N 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
N K
0.1 0.1
0.09 L 0.09
0.08 M 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-40. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)

22) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : P, R, T, V 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7
0.6
V 0.7
0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
T
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
P R 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-41. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

23) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : P, R, T, V 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7
0.6
V 0.7
0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
T
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
P R 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-42. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

24) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1
0.9 3 1
0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 2 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08
0.07
5 0.08
0.07
0.06
1 4 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-43. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

25) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9 60
30
7 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 9 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
8
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 8* 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04
6 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-44. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

26) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 60
30 30
20 20
11
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 18 0.5
14
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
13
0.09 16 0.09
0.08
0.07
15 0.08
0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 17 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-45. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

27) Fuse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : FUSE (RI, HR, FR) 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 RI 3
2 2
Time(Second)
Time(Second)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
FR HR
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Figure 8-46. Fuse Curves (RI, HR, FR)

8.1.24. Others
8.1.24.1. Sequence Coordination
When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, ETR300-R contains
Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Back-
up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination feature is activated
only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault
current.
Following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature.
The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations and
identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series.
The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series.
To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms)
should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to those of
Down-line Reclosers.
The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all Down-
line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during the reclose
operation of Down-lines.
The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled as follows;
GROUP # / RECLOSER / OTHERS / Seq' Coordinate

>Seq’ Coordinate:OFF
L.O Priority:GROUND Default OFF Step ~
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary
operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are
[OFF/ON]
connected in series.
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.

If function = ON, the feature is operational.

As shown in “Figure 8-46. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence

Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution
systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements. During the count
at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line
Recloser , the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step.
Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at
the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence
Coordination function can not be operated.
Increase Trip Counter without Trip
Starting
Reset Time
Counter
Close
Back Up EVR 1 Open
Close
Down line EVR 2
Lockout Status
Open
Time
Faulted
Figure 8-47. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram
8.1.24.2. Other settings
GROUP # / RECLOSER / OTHERS / L.O Priority

[OTHERS] Range PHASE, GROUND
Seq’ Coordinate:OFF
>L.O Priority:GROUND Default GROUND Step ~
Set the Lockout priority
PHASE : Phase prior
[PHASE,GROUND]
GROUND: Ground prior

8.2. Sectionalizer
This menu sets the auto sectionalizer function via fault indication. If the control type of ETR-300R
is set to 'SECTIONALIZER' mode, move the functions of this menu.
Place the cursor on “SECTIONALIZER” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. This menu is sub-divided as follow;
[SECTIONALIZER]
>1.PICKUP CURRENT
>2.INRUSH TIME
>3.AUTO SECTION
8.2.1. FI Pickup Current

This menu sets fault pickup current for fault indication (FI). Fault pikcup current is individually set
for Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative sequence current. If the fault current
disappears in the dead line after the current is maintained above the pickup current in the live line,
it indicates a fault indication.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 10~1600A
>Phase: 500
Ground: 250 Default 500 Step 1
SEF: OFF
NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect phase fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
for a phase fault indication (FI).
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground

>Phase: 500
>Ground: 250 Default 250 Step 1
SEF: OFF
NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect ground fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' and 'GROUND ENABLED' LEDs on
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
the front panel must be ON for a ground fault indication (FI).

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / SEF

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 0.1~160.0A
>Phase: 600
>SEF: OFF
>NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect sensitive earth fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED', 'GROUND ENABLED' and 'SEF
[0(OFF),0.1~160.0A]
ENABLED' LEDs on the front panel must be ON for a sensitive earth
fault indication (FI).
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq’

>Phase: 600
SEF: OFF
>NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect negative sequency fault.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
for a negative sequential fault indication (FI).
8.2.2. Inrush Time

ETR300-R has inrush restraint function to prevent the malfunction by inrush current produced at
the restoration of load supply. Inrush restraint function setting can be set separately in phase,
ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence. During the inrush time after the restoration of
load supply, FI(fault indicator) about phase, residual ground, ground and negative sequence is not
detected.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / INRUSH DURATION T / Phase

[INRUSH DURATION T] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
>Phase: 2.00
Ground: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01sec
SEF: 2.00
Neg Seq’: 2.00
Set the block time for inrush current of phase.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) Setting for Ground, SEF and Neg Seq’ are same as Phase setting above.

8.2.3. Auto Setction

The purpose of using Auto Section function is to keep the normal operation by isolating Fault Area
as to cooperate with Recloser or C/B when a fault has occurred. This function supports the
following two types;
 Auto Sectionalizer(AS)
 AS trips due to Fault current and Line Voltage.
 When a fault has occurred in the load side of AS, C/B trips and High Voltage line becomes
Dead line Voltage(DV). Due to the number of Count, AS trips(is opened).
 Tie point Switch(TS)

 TS is located at Open point and is used for bi-directional(reversed line direction) operation.
 TS is operated due to Line Voltage.
 Either Source side or Load side of TS, becomes Dead line Voltage(DV), TS operates(is
closed) depending upon the number of count.
 When the source side and Load side become Dead line Voltage(DV), TS is automatically
opened.
 TS must be cooperated with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.
 To prevent further fault, TS shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips
and disconnects a fault area.
 ETNEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source side and Load side
become Dead line Voltage(DV) and it has the automatic closing function called Looping
control function When High Voltage line becomes Live line Voltage(LV).
Please refer to “8.2.3.2. Auto Section Application” for more detail information of Auto
Sectionalizer function.

8.2.3.1. Auto Sectionalizer Setup
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / Type Select

[AUTO SECTION] Range OFF, SEC, TIE
>Type Select: OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default OFF Step ~
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Select whether to use this function or not.
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
 SEC : Select for Auto Sectionalizer.
[OFF/SEC/TIE]
 TIE : Select for Tie point Switch.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Operate Cnt

[AUTO SECTION] Range 1 ~ 5 shot
Type Select: OFF
>SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default 1 Step 1 shot
SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Set the operation count of the Auto Sectionalizer.
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
 After sensing a fault current, Live line becomes Dead line
[1~5:1]
Voltage(DV), 1 is counted and sense another fault, the count
accumulate as 2.
 When the count reaches a set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is
operated.
 When the count is over the set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is
reset and not operated.
 Counter is reset by “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer or by manual closing.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Oper’ TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Type Select: OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default 0.00 Step 0.01
>SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Set the open operation time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
 The timer is operated by “SEC Operate Cnt”, and after a set time,
[0.00~600.00:0.01]
Auto Sectionalizer is opened.
 The timer is reset if Live Line becomes LV during counting Time,
and it is also reset when the counter is over “SEC Operate Cnt”set
value.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Reset TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Type Select: OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default 10.00 Step 0.01
>SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Set the reset time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
 It is the Timer to reset a count value in “SEC Operate Cnt”.
[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]
 When Auto Sectionalizer is closed, if Source side or Load side
becomes Live Voltage (LV), Timer reset “Sec Oper’ Cnt”.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Operate Cnt

[AUTO SECTION] Range 1~5
Type Select: OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default 2 Step 1
SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Set the close operation count of Tie Point Switch.
>TIE Operate Cnt: 2
 Source and Load side are Live Voltage status. When one of the sides
[1~5:1]
becomes Dead line Voltage, it counts 1, and it repeats once again, it
accumulates the count for 2.
 The counter reaches a set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is operated.
 The counter is over the set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is reset and
not operated.
 The counter is reset by “TIE Reset TD” Timer or manual trip.
 Dead line Voltage can be determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or
“TIE DL-VL TD” Timer is finished.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Close TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 0.00~600.00
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00 Default 30.00 Step 0.01
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 Set the close time delay of the Tie Point Switch.
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
 The timer is operated due to “TIE Operate Cnt”, and after a set
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
time, Tie Point Switch is closed.
 During the counting, if Source and Load side become Live line
Voltage or Dead line Voltage, the timer is reset. And when the
counter is over a set value of “TIE Operate Cnt”, the timer is reset.
 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”
Timer is finished.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Open TD

TIE Close TD: 30.00
>TIE Open TD: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 Set the open time delay of Tie Point Switch.
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
 The timer is operated when Source and Load sides become Dead line
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
Voltage, and after a set time, Tie Point Switch is opened.
 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”
Timer is finished.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Reset TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 100~600.00
TIE Close TD: 30.00
>TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 Set the reset time delay of Tie Point Switch.
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
 It is the timer to reset a count value in “TIE Operate Cnt”.
[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]
 Timer is operated when Source side and Load side are all Live line
Voltage with Tie Point Switch opened, and it reset “TIE Operate
Cnt”.
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE DL-VS TD
[AUTO SECTION]
Range 0.00~600.00
TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00
Default 1.00 Step 0.01
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
>TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
Set deadline detection delay time of source side voltage.
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE DL-VL TD

TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
>TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
Set deadline detection delay time of load side voltage.
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Figure 8-48. Auto Sectionalizer Algorithm

VL Dead Line
VS Dead Line
Source Side
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
Load Side
Figure 8-49. Tie Algorithm

8.2.3.2. Auto Section Application
1) Auto Sectionalizer Loop Control
Table 8-13. Auto Sectionalizer loop control

SETTING CB1 RC1 AS1 AS2 AS3
SECTIONALIZER
Type Select - - SEC SEC SEC
Sec Oper’ Cnt - - 3 2 3
Sec RS Delay - - 10.00 10.00 10.00
Sec op Delay - 0.00 0.00 0.00
CB AND RECLOSER - - -
2 Trip 4 Trip
Operate count - - -
Lockout Lockout
*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer)
Figure 8-50. Auto Sectionalizer loop control
PRECAUTIN 1 for SETTING

1) AS is an automatic opening equipment when Dead Line Voltage. When “SEC Oper’ TD”
time is provided, the opening time of AS shall be faster than RC1 or CB1 minimum 0.3
sec.
2) “SEC Oper’ TD” time of AS is better to set 0 second for Instantaneous Trip(Open).
3) Auto Sectionalizer Instantaneous Opening time : <80㎳
4) Entec Recloser reclose time : Minimum 0.5sec
PRECAUTION 2 for SETTING

1) “SEC Operate Cnt” setting of AS1 shall be higher than AS2 when AS1 and AS2 are in
series connection as Auto Sectionalizer.

Loop control with F1 Fault
Figure 8-51. Loop Control with F1 Fault
Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.
AS1 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.
When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F1
location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS2, AS3 is not operated because they did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS1 is opened and RC1 is closed after Reclosing 3 times.
RC1 is closed after AS1 disconnect F1 location, and keep the rest of line normal.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS1 and recover Live line.

When RC1 trips two times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (2).
Then F2 location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS1 is not operating because that “SEC Operate Cnt” is set for 3
AS3 is not operated because AS3 did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS2 is opened and RC1 is closed after two times of reclosing.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS2 and recover live line.

When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F3
location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS1, AS2 are not operating because that they did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS3 is opened and RC1 is closed after three times of reclosing.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS3 and recover the live line.

2) Tie Point Switch Loop Control
Table 8-14. Tie Point Switch Loop Control

SETTING CB1,2 SR1,2 AS1,2 TS1
SECTIONALIZER
Function - - SEC TIE
Sec Oper’ Cnt - - 3 -
Sec RS Delay - - 10.00s -
Sec op Delay - - 0.00s -
Tie VRS - - - SV1 & SV2
Tie Oper’ Cnt - - - 2
Tie CL Delay - - - 30.00s
Tie OP Delay - - - 5.00s
Tie DV1 Dly - - - 1.00
Tie DV1 Dly - - - 1.00
CB AND RECLOSER
Recloser Operate count 2 Trip Lockout 4 Trip Lockout - -
Figure 8-54. Tie Point Switch Loop Control
*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer), TS(Tie Point Switch)

PRECAUTION for SETTING

1) TS1 must cooperate with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.
2) TS1 shall be operated when F1 is occurred in the Source side of SR, and shall be set for
not operating when F2, F3 occur in Load side.
3) To prevent further fault, TS1 shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips
and disconnects a fault area.
4) ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source and Load side
become Dead line Voltage (DV), and automatically closed when Source side and Load
side become Live line Voltage (LV).
5) The count number of SR1 and AS1 shall be larger than the count number of TS1.
6) “TIE Operate Cnt” of TS1 is set 2, AS1 shall be set 3, and SR1 shall be set 4 to cooperate
with AS1.
7) TS shall not be closed when a fault occurs between SR1 and TS1. If “TIE Operate Cnt”
of TS1 is set to 2, Close delay time shall be set to longer than 5 seconds which is 2 times
of SR1 reclosing time.

Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing
cycle.
Step2 : SR1 counts Dead line Voltage time till a set time, then automatically opens (disconnects)
F1 location.
“TIE Operate Cnt” is set 2. When CB1 trips two times, “TIE Close TD” is run and after
30 seconds, TS1 is closed.
F1 is disconnected and the rest of live line shall be operated to the opposite direction.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1 manually (local or remote), SR1 is automatically
closed after a setting time.
Step4 : Open TS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.

Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing
cycle.
If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time is ran.
While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing,
and Close delay time is reset.
If SR1 trips three times, TS1 counts 3, it is more than “TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close
delay time doesn’t run.
When SR1 trips 4 times and locked out, TS1 counts 4. Close delay time doesn’t run.
Step2 : Open SR1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.

Step1 : At F3 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, SR1 trips 4 times and locked out after
conducting reclosing cycle.
If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time runs.
While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing,
and Close delay time is reset.
If SR1 trips three times, AS1 is automatically opened, TS1 counts 3, and it is more than
“TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close delay time doesn’t run.
Step2 : After AS1 disconnects with F3, SR1 is reclosed and keeps the rest of live line normal.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close AS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.

8.3. Monitoring
Place the cursor on “MONITERING” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. In this menu, it can set up monitoring function for line condition.
[MONITORING]
>1.PHASE DIFFERENCE
2.SYNCHRO’ CHECK
3.OPEN PHASE
4.LIVE LINE BLOCK
5.FAULT LOCATOR
6.LOAD CURR’ ALARM
7.POWER FACTOR
8.3.1. Phase Difference

Place the cursor on “PHASE DIFFERENCE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. The ETR300-R provides a phase difference element to check whether the
source side and the load side are in the open state. If the difference in voltage magnitude, phase
difference, and frequency difference between the source side and the load side deviate from the set
value, it is determined that synchronization is inconsistent and a DIFFPT (Phase Different Timeout)
event is registered. In the PLC configuration, manual close can be blocked by local or remote
control in case of synchronization inconsistency (Manual close is blocked when default is not
matched with synchronization)
The phase difference element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Function
[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default DISABLE Step ~
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10
It decides whether to use Phase difference element.
[OFF/ON]
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Dead Line Lv

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 0.50 Step 0.01 xVT
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the dead line maximum voltage for phase difference
Max Angle Diff: 10
Used to Prevent the phase difference element for voltage below this
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
level.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Live Line Lv

Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
>Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10 Enter the live line minimum voltage for phase difference element.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT] Used to activate the phase difference element for voltage over this
level.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Volt Diff

Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Live Line Lv: 0.80
>Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum voltage difference.
Max Angle Diff: 10
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Angle Diff

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 1 ~ 100 degree
Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 10 Step 1 degree
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum angle difference of the phase difference element.
>Max Angle Diff: 10
An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is
[1~100:1 deg]
within the permissible limit for phase difference element.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Freq. Diff

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 0.01 ~ 5.00 Hz
>Max Freq.Diff: 2.00
Check Phase: ALL Default 2.00 Step 0.01 Hz
Time Delay: 1.0
Enter the maximum frequency difference of voltages.
A frequency differential between the voltages below this value is within
[0.01~5.00:0.01 Hz]
the permissible limit for phase difference element.
GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Check Phase

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range ALL, A, B, C
Max Freq.Diff: 2.0
>Check Phase: ALL Default ALL Step ~
Time Delay: 1.0
Select reference voltage for phase difference element on load side.
ALL : Three phase voltages on load side are used for phase difference
[ALL/A/B/C]
element.
A/B/C : Single phase voltage on load side is used for phase difference
element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Time delay
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
Range 0.0 ~ 600.0sec
>Max Freq.Diff: 2.0
Check Phase: ALL Default 1.00 Step 0.01sec
>Time Delay: 1.00
Set delay time for phase difference element

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
8.3.2. Synchro’ Check (25)

The ETR300-R provides a synchronism check element. The synchronism check element is used
when both the source and load side circuit are in a live state, when the phases of the two circuits are
synchronized. If it remains in the asynchronous state for the set waiting time, it will not close even
after synchronization.
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, it is determined to be as synchornization.

 The voltage of the source side and the load side must be within the synchronous detection range.
If the voltage is out of the lower limit value (Min. Volt) and the upper limit value (Max. Volt), it
is determined that the voltage of the system is not stable and it is determined as asynchronous.
 The frequency on the source side and the load side must be within ± 5 Hz of the rated value.
 The voltage difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to
the set voltage.
 The frequency difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to
the set frequency difference.
 The phase difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the
set

The phase difference (ΔAngle) of the two circuits means the sum of the currently measured phase
difference(∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 ) and the compensation value (∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑒 ) of the phase difference
to be generated during body turn-in time by the slip frequency. The formula for calculating the
phase difference is as follows;
∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = | ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 + ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑒 |
= | (∠𝑉𝑆 − ∠𝑉𝐿 ) + { (𝑓𝑆 − 𝑓𝐿 ) × 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑐𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑒 × 360° } |
*. NOTE) The variables used in the above equation are as follows.
− ∠𝑉𝑆 : Voltage phase at the source side
− ∠𝑉𝐿 : Voltage phase at the load side
− 𝑓𝑆 : Frequency at source, 𝑓𝐿 : Frequency at load, Sleep Frequency: 𝑓𝑆 - 𝑓𝐿

− 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑐𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑒 : Recloser closing time [s]
However, when the source side or load side circuit is diagonal, it is always closes regardless of
synchronous detection.
The synchronism check element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Function
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default DISABLE Step ~
Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1: 30.0
It decides whether to use synchronism check element.
[DISABLE,ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 1.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1: 30.0
It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Min.Volt

Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1: 30.0
It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt Diff

Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Min.Volt: 0.30
>Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum voltage difference.
Angle Diff1: 30.0
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Angle Diff 1

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0(OFF), 20.0~80.0 degree
Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 30.0 Step 0.1 degree
Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum angle difference.
>Angle Diff1: 30.0
An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is
0(OFF),20.0~80.0deg
within the permissible limit for synchronism check.
*. NOTE) Angle Diff 2 is same as Angle Diff 1 above.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Slip Freq.

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.5~5.0 Hz
Angle Diff2: 30.0
>Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default 1.0 Step 0.1 Hz
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 Enter the maximum slip frequency(frequency difference).
Load-V Factor: 1.00
An angular differential between the frequency below this value is
[0.5~5.0:0.1 Hz]
within the permissible limit for synchronism check.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Sync Phase

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range A, B, C, AB, BC, CA
Angle Diff2: 30.0
Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default A Step ~
>Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0
Load-V Factor: 1.00
Select reference voltage for synchronism check element on load side.
[A/B/C/AB/BC/CA]

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Compens’ Angle

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0~330 degree
Angle Diff2: 30.0
Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default 0 Step 30 degree
Sync Phase: A
>Compens’ Angle: 0 When calculating the phase difference between the source side and the
Load-V Factor: 1.00
load side, set the load side compensate angle. The load side angle is
[0~330:30 deg]
the actual measured angle plus the set value.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Load-V Factor

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.50~2.00
Angle Diff2: 30.0
Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 It is the compensation factor of the load side voltage magnitude. When
>Load-V Factor: 1.00
calculating the voltage difference between the source side and the load
[0.50~2.00:0.01]
side, it will apply this value to the load side voltage multiplied by this
set value.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Closing Time

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.0~600.0 ms
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 Default 50.0 Step 0.1 ms
Load-V Factor: 1.00
>Closing Time: 50.0
CL Wait Time: 10 It sets the time to close the rcloser. The phase difference calculation
[0.0~600.0:0.1 ms] value can be changed according to the recloser closing time.
GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / CL Wait Time

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 1~600 sec
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 Default 10 Step 1 sec
Load-V Factor: 1.00
Closing Time: 50.0 It sets synchronous detection input wait time. If the synchronous
>CL Wait Time: 10
condition is not satisfied during this set time after manual close
[1~600:1 s]
command, it does not close.
The front panel “25 PHASE DIFFERENCE” LED lights up when the
manual close command is in the standby state.

8.3.3. Open Phase

This function determines phase as open pahse when one or two phase voltages are more than Off
Level and determines as normal if that all three phase voltages are higher than On Level. Dead line
normal condition it does not indicate open phase.
When detecting the open phase, the corresponding LED of the open phase LED (VA / VR, VB /
VS, VC / VT) on the front panel lights up.
The setting items of OPEN PHASE element are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE / Function
[OPEN PHASE] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
On Level: 0.80 Default DISABLE Step ~
>Off Level: 0.50
Time Delay: 4.00
Set whether it activates open phase function to detect open phase or
[DISABLE,ENABLE] not.
GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ On Level

[OPEN PHASE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>On Level: 0.80 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
>Off Level: 0.50
Time Delay: 4.00
Set voltage level to detect open of phase.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Off Level

[OPEN PHASE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
On Level: 0.80 Default 0.50 Step 0.01 xVT
>Off Level: 0.50
Time Delay: 4.00
Set voltage level to detect loss of phase.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Time Delay

[OPEN PHASE] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
On Level: 0.80 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec
Off Level: 0.50
>Time Delay: 4.00
Set delay time to detect open phase.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

8.3.4. Live Line Block

It is to block reloser closing if the load side is live line.
GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE LINE BLOCK / Function
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Funcktion: DISABLE
>Live Block: BOTH Default DISABLE Step ~
>Live Level: 0.80
Source: BOTH
Time Delay: 0.10
It decides whether to use Live line block.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Block

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range RECLOSE, CLOSE, BOTH
Funcktion: OFF
>Live Block: BOTH Default BOTH Step ~
Live Level: 0.80
Source: BOTH Select whether to use Live load block function.
Time Delay: 0.10
RECLOSE: When recloser closing by auto reclosing function, this
[RECLOSE/CLOSE/BOTH]
function works.
CLOSE: When local or remote closing, the function works.
BOTH: When recloser closing regardless of auto reclosing or
remote/local closing, the function works.
GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Level

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Funcktion: OFF
Live Block: BOTH Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
>Live Level: 0.80
Source: BOTH Set pickup level of live line
Time Delay: 0.10
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be less
than 10.56kV (= 13.2kV * 0.80) to operate this element.
GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Source

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
Funcktion: OFF
Live Block: BOTH Default VS&VL Step ~
>Live Level: 0.80
>Source: VS&VL Set which side of voltage to detect live line.
Time Delay: 0.10
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
 VS&VL : Recloser’s Source and Load Side Voltage

GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE/DEAD BLOCK / Time Delay

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Funcktion: OFF
Live Block: BOTH Default 0.10 Step 0.01sec
>Live Level: 0.80
Source: VS&VL
>Time Delay: 0.10 Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.
8.3.5. Fault Locator

The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase
of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type (phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground),
phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault
distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.
This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are
a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors
could be introduced by several reasons (fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance
can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage.
For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data
is required at least 2 cycles.
If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily
achieved, but source impedance is not required.
Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow.
In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful.
The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.
Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-58. Faulted

distribution system circuit” for example.

mZ (1-m)Z
IA
IF L
O
VA A
RF
D
Figure 8-58. Faulted distribution system circuit
The calculated “Fault Location” information be checked on the “Fault Cycle” event menu. For
more details, refer to “9.2. Fault Event” and “9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary”.
This function is only applied when the controller type of ETR300-R is “RECLOSER” mode.
The fault locator settings are as follows;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function
[FAULT LOCATOR] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Feeder Length: 5.0 Default DISABLE Step ~
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00
Z0 (Imag): 1.00 It decides whether to use Fault locator.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 1.0 ~ 99.9 km
Function: DISABLE
>Feeder Length: 5.0 Default 5.0 Step 0.1 km
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00
Z0 (Imag): 1.00 Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
[1.0~99.9:0.1km]

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Real)

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Function: DISABLE
Feeder Length: 5.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01ohm
>Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence
Z0 (Imag): 1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm] impedance, in actual ohms.
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Imag)

Function: DISABLE
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence
Z0 (Imag): 1.00
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Real)

Function: DISABLE
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
Z0 (Imag): 1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm] in actual ohms.
GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Imag)

Function: DISABLE
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence
Z0 (Imag): 1.00

8.3.6. Load Current Alarm

ETR300-R generates a Load Current Alarm event when the value over the detect level of RMS
current is maintained for a constant time. Load Current Alarm event is generated individually for
each A, B, C, N phase and Negative Sequence. Then, the peak current measurement value is
updated by each phase current and negative sequence current at which the load current alarm event
is generated. If the function is disabled, the peak current measurement value will not be updated
even if a large current flows.
For details of the Load Current Alarm event recorded by this function, refer to “9.9. Load Current
Alarm Event” and the peak current updated by this function can be checked in the “METERING/
CURRENT” menu (Please refer to“13.1. Current” ).
Load Current Alarm setting items are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Function
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500 Default DISABLE Step ~
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set whether to use load current alarm function.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Pickup

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
Function: DISABLE
>P-Pickup: 500 Default 500 Step 1A
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect current of load current alarm about phase current.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Time Delay

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500 Default 0.00 Step 0.01sec
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect time of load current alarm about the phase current.
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Pickup

Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500 Default 250 Step 1A
P-Time Delay: 0.00
>G-Pickup: 250
G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect current of load current alarm about ground current.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Time Delay

Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500 Default 0.00 Step 0.01sec
P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect time of load current alarm about the ground current.
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Pickup

P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250 Default OFF Step 1A
G-Time Delay: 0.00
>Q-Pickup: OFF
Q-Time Delay: 0.00 Set the detect current of load current alarm about negative sequence
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A] current.
GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Time Delay

P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250 Default 0.00 Step 0.01sec
G-Time Delay: 0.00
Q-Pickup: OFF
>Q-Time Delay: 0.00 Set the detect time of load current alarm about the negative sequence
[0.00~600.0:0.01s] current.

8.3.7. Power Factor (55)

ETR300-R has two power factor(55) elements. If measured power factor(lag, lead) is kept above
the pickup level for a certain time, the element are detected. Through the PLC configuration, if an
event of this function is detected, the recloser can be opened or closed.
Power factor setting items are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Function
[POWER FACTOR] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Default DISABLE Step ~
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 0.00
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00
It decides whether to use Power factor element.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lag1

[POWER FACTOR] Range 0(OFF), 0.05~0.99
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 0.00
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00 Set pickup level of lag power factor for element1.
[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99] If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.
*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lag2 is same as Pickup-Lag1 setting above.
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lead1

[POWER FACTOR] Range 0(OFF), 0.05~0.99
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 0.00
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00 Set pickup level of lead power factor for element1.
[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99] If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.
*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lead2 is same as Pickup-Lead1 setting above.
GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Time Delay1

[POWER FACTOR] Range 1.00~600.00sec
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01sec
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
>Time Delay1: 0.00
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00
Set time delay for power factor element1.
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]
*. NOTE ) Setting for Time Delay2 is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / BLK After CL

[POWER FACTOR] Range 0.05~600.00sec
Time Delay2: 0.00
>BLK After CL: 0.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01sec
Set the Block Time After Close for power factor elements.
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]
8.4. Save Setting

From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GROUP menu. The procedure for
storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

9. EVENT RECORDER
Place the cursor on “3.EVENT”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
ETR300-R records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as
operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All
events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all
events can be checked in interface program.
This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[EVENT]
>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM
5.SET CHANGE
6.AVER.LOAD/MIN
7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR
8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY
9.DIGNOSTIC
10.PQM
11.ALARM CURRENT
12.CLEAR SAVED DATA
9.1. Operation Event

Operation event records max. 30,000 events. When Recloser operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation
status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.
[OPERATION] [OPERATION] [OPERATION]
No.00001/30000 No.00002/30000 No.00003/30000
STATUS: OPEN STATUS: CLOSE STATUS: OPEN

CONTROL:PL-HMI-OK CONTROL:REMOTE-OK CONTROL:AUTO-OK
08/03/2013 20:02:40 08/03/2013 20:00:40 02/03/2013 16:02:40
[▼][▲] are used to check event. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 STATUS
- CLOSE(OK) or CLOSE(FAIL)
- OPEN(OK) or CLOSE(FAIL)
 CONTROL
- PL-HMI : Operation through control button at the front panel
- REMOTE : Operation through remote control
- MANUAL : Recloser (or Load breaker) mechanical manual operation.
- AUTO : Automatic operation through ETR300-R
- EXT’ : Operation through external command (External command condition is available
through PLC configuration)
Trigger Time
Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.
Trigger Capacity
Stores last 30000 events.

9.2. Fault Event

Fault event records max 10,000 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault
current size and each phase fault records can be checked.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.
[FAULT] [FAULT] [FAULT]
No.00001/10000 SEQ:1 No.00002/10000 SEQ:1 No.00002/10000 SEQ:1

TARGET : TOC TARGET : TOC TARGET : TOC
TYPE :51 TYPE :51 TYPE :51
LOC: - km - Ohm LOC: - km - Ohm LOC: - km - Ohm

01/01/2010 00:03:03 01/01/2010 00:03:02 01/01/2010 00:03:01
ENT ENT ENT
[FAULT] [FAULT] [FAULT]
No.00001/10000 SEQ:1 No.00002/10000 SEQ:1 No.00003/10000 SEQ:1

A : 00000 B : 00000 A : 00000 B : 00000 A : 00000 B : 00000
C : 00000 G : 00000 C : 00000 G : 00000 C : 00000 G : 00000
Q : 00000 S : 00000 Q : 00000 S : 00000 Q : 00000 S : 00000
01/01/2010 00:03:03 01/01/2010 00:03:02 01/01/2010 00:03:01
[▼][▲] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check
fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [00001/10000] is the latest
event record.
Fault Event Information

Information before a fault occurring, is recorded..
00001/10000 Shows the latest event in order and records 10000 events.
SEQ Fault sequence number
TARGET Records the fault detect phase and event trigger source.
- A: A Phase Fault
- B: B Phase Fault
- C: C Phase Fault
- G: Ground Fault
- S: Sensitive Earth Fault
- Q : Negative Sequence Fault
- TOC : Time Overcurrent Fault(Applied when “RECLOSER” type)

- IOC : Instantaneous and Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent Fault

(Applied when “RECLOSER” type)
- FI : Fault Indication Detection(Applied when “SECTIONALIZER” type)
TYPE Records the fault type (Applied when “SECTIONALIZER” type)
- F-PICKUP : Fault Pickup (not trip)
- 51 : Time Overcurrent Fault Trip
- 50 : Instantaneous and Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent Fault Trip
- 27 : Under Voltage Fault Trip
- 59 : Over Voltage Fault Trip
- 64 : Neutral Over Voltage Fault Trip
- 47 : NEQ Over Voltage Fault Trip
- DEM : Demand Fault Trip
- 81O : Over Frequency Fault Trip
- 81U : Under Frequency Fault Trip
- 81D : Frequency Decay Fault Trip
- 32 : Forward Power and Direction Power Fault Trip
- 46 : Broken Conduct Fault Trip
- 21 : Z0 Adittance Fault Trip
LOC It registers Fault Location Information (location and reactance).
*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.
2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to
“8.3.5. Fault Locator”.
FAULT Max. current value is indicated when fault is occurred.
CURRENT It registers current of the each phase, ground, sensitive earth and negative
sequence.
Trigger Source
Plesae refer to “TARGET” and “TYPE”of the above mentioned Fault Event Information.
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity

9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary

Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD.
Captured waveform can be checked in ETIMS Interface Software. However, if the ‘Wave Record’
setting in the “MAIN MENU/ GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, fault cycles will
not be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE” to confirm fault cycle summary.
[FAULT CYCLE] [FAULT CYCLE] [FAULT CYCLE]
No.01/32 EWTRIG1 No.02/32 EWTRIG2 No.03/32 EWTRIG1&2

A: 00000 B: 00000 A: 00000 B: 00000 A: 00000 B: 00000
C: 00000 G: 00000 C: 00000 G: 00000 C: 00000 G: 00000
LOC: - km - Ohm LOC: - km - Ohm LOC: - km - Ohm
01/01/2017 01:00:00 01/01/2010 02:10:00 01/01/2010 02:00:00
[▼][▲] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 Fault wave captured time.
- PU : Pick up time.
- TR : Trip time.
- PU&TR : Picku up & Trip time
 Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, Ground

 Fault Location Information
- Fault Location [km]
- Fault Reactance [Ohm]
*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.
2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “8.3.5. Fault
Locator”.
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Maximum 32 events are recorded.

Recoder Cycle Length

60 cycles for 64 sampling, 120 cycles for 32 sampling and 240 cycles for 16 sampling.

9.4. System Event

Maximum 30000 events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM” to confirm system events.
[SYSTEM] [SYSTEM]
No.00001/30000 No.00002/30000
ITEM : CPULINK ITEM : CPULINK

STATUS : HI/ASSERT STATUS : HI/ASSERT
01/01/2010 00:00:03 01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 Protection element
 52A Contact
 Sequence status
 Front panel control
 AC supply
 External control
 Fail operation
 External input status
 System alarm
 Sleep mode
 Gas Status, etc.
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
Storage Capacity

9.5. Set Change Event

Maximum 30000 Set change Event can be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.
[SET CHANGE] [SET CHANGE]
No.00001/30000 No.00002/30000
TARGET : GLOBAL SET TARGET : GLOBAL SET

CONTROL: REMOTE CONTROL: REMOTE
01/01/2010 00:00:03 01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 Changed set menu
- GLOBAL SETTING (GLSCHG)
- GROUP 1~6 SETTING (GRSCH1 ~ GRSCH6)
 Change method
The first name of the target name identifies the change method.;
- (L) LOCAL: Set change at local
- (R) REMOTE: Sec change in remote
- (P) PROGRAM: Set change by Interface software.
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity

9.6. Load & Energy Event

ETR300-R has the function of periodically recording the load and energy measurement data. The
user can configure the data field to record in the Load & Energy event. For the data field
configuration method, please refer to “9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration” .
Load & Energy events are recorded in three ways: minute average, maximum value per hour, and
maximum value per day. However, if the ‘L&E Record’ setting in the “"MAIN MENU/
GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, Load & Energy events will not be recorded.
9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event

Average load and energy value is recorded every a period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL/
EVENT RECORDER / L&P Interval”. Maximum 27500 values, it’s about 286 days events can be
recorded based on 15 minutes(default) for the event register period.
To check the average value per minute Load & Energy events, please move to “MAIN MENU /
EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/MIN” .
[LOAD&ENERGY/MIN] [LOAD&ENERGY/MIN]
No. 00001/27500(1/3) No. 00002/27500(1/3)

IA: 0 A IA: 0 A
IB: 0 A IB: 0 A
IC: 0 A IC: 0 A
IG: 0 A IG: 0 A
01/01/2010 00:03 01/01/2010 00:03
ENT ENT
No. 00001/27500(2/3) No. 00002/27500(2/3)

PA: 0 kW PA: 0 kW
PB: 0 kW PB: 0 kW
PC: 0 kW PC: 0 kW
P3: 0 kW P3: 0 kW
01/01/2010 00:03 01/01/2010 00:03
ENT ENT
No. 00001/27500(3/3) No. 00002/27500(3/3)

PA: 0 kVar PA: 0 kVar
PB: 0 kVar PB: 0 kVar
PC: 0 kVar PC: 0 kVar
P3: 0 kVar P3: 0 kVar
01/01/2010 00:03 01/01/2010 00:03
*. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/min events may be revised on user’s request.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [00001/27500] is the latest
event record.
Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, G
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)
Trigger Time
Monitors to change Trigger source status every period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT
RECORDER / L&E Interval”.
Storage Capacity

9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event

Peak load & Energy event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up
to 27500 events, it’s about 1,145 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR” to confirm Peak Load &
Energy/Hour events.
[LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR] [LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR]
No. 00001/27500(1/3) No. 00002/27500(1/3)

IA: 0 A IA: 0 A
IB: 0 A IB: 0 A
IC: 0 A IC: 0 A
IG: 0 A IG: 0 A
01/01/2010 01H 01/01/2010 00H
ENT ENT
No. 00001/27500(2/3) No. 00002/27500(2/3)

PA: 0 kW PA: 0 kW
PB: 0 kW PB: 0 kW
PC: 0 kW PC: 0 kW
P3: 0 kW P3: 0 kW
01/01/2010 01H 01/01/2010 00H
ENT ENT
No. 00001/27500(3/3) No. 00002/27500(3/3)

01/01/2010 01H 01/01/2010 00H
*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.
[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT]
again. [00001/27500] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source


Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.
Storage Capacity
9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day

Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 27500
events, it’s 27500 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/DAY” to confirm Peak Load & Energy
/day events.
[LOAD&ENERGY/DAY] [LOAD&ENERGY/DAY]
No. 00001/27500(1/3) No. 00002/27500(1/3)

IA: 0 A IA: 0 A
IB: 0 A IB: 0 A
IC: 0 A IC: 0 A
IG: 0 A IG: 0 A
02/01/2010 01/01/2010
ENT ENT
No. 00001/27500(2/3) No. 00002/27500(2/3)

PA: 0 kW PA: 0 kW
PB: 0 kW PB: 0 kW
PC: 0 kW PC: 0 kW
P3: 0 kW P3: 0 kW
02/01/2010 01/01/2010
ENT ENT
No. 00001/27500(3/3) No. 00002/27500(3/3)

02/01/2010 01/01/2010
*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.

[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT]
again. [00001/27500] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.
Storage Capacity

9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration

Operator can easily configure fields recorded in Load & Energy Event through “Load & Energy
Field Config Edit” window of ETIMS Interface Software. Load & Energy Field Configuration
procedure is as follow:
1) Click “SETTING / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” to open ‘Load & Energy Field
Config Edit’.
Figure 9-1. Load & Energy Event Field Config Edit Window
2) In the ‘Load & Energy Field Config Edit’ window, configure fields recorded in Load & Energy
Event. The number of selected field is between 4 and 14 fields.
3) After completing the configuration, click the [Apply] button.
4) While ‘ONLINE’ communication status between Interface Software and ETR300-R, upload the
changed load profile field configuration in ETR300-R using “ONLINE / UPLOAD / LOAD &
ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” menu.

9.7. Diagnostic Event

Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 30,000 events.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnosticevents.
[DIAGNOSTIC] [DIAGNOSTIC]
No.00001/30000 No.00002/30000
ITEM : SELFTOK ITEM : SELFTOK

STATUS : HI/ASSERT STATUS : HI/ASSERT
01/01/2010 00:00:03 01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. [00001/30000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 DSP Fail
 ADC Fail
 RTC Fail
 Memory Fail
 Flash-Rom Fail
 Circuit voltage Fail
 Global Setting Fail
 Group Setting Fail
 Event Fail
 Count Fail
 DO Fail
 Close Fail
 Open Fail, etc.
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.
Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity
Stores last 30,000 events.
When Diagnostis Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following.
Table 9-1. Treatment Method when Diagnostis Fail is Occurred

No. Item Period Method
1 DSP Within 200msec Change to fault detect block
2 ADC 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block
3 RTC 1 hour, at booting Change the date to January 1st, 2017
4 Memory 1 hour, at booting Restart
At Flash-Rom reading and
5 Flash-Rom Restart
writing, at booting
6 Circuit voltage 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block
Change the Global setting value to
7 Global setting At setting change, at booting
Default value
Change the Group # setting value to
8 Group # setting At setting change, at booting
Default value
9 Event At event save and reading Event initialization
10 Count At counter writing and reading Counter initialization
11 DO signal 50msec Output power block
12 Close/Open At closing and opening Necessary to check in local
9.8. PQM Event

Power Quality Management (PQM) detect event is recorded up to 10,000 events.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM” to confirm PQM events. In this menu, PQM event
item, phase occurence, measurement value and event maintaineance time can be checked (But,
event maintenance time is recorded only when events are sag, swell, interruption). PQM events are
generated by the “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ MONITORING/ POWER
QUALITY” setting.
[PQM] [PQM]
No.00001/10000 No.00002/10000
EVENT: SWL&TMP EVENT: SWL&TMP

TARGET : A TARGET : A
DATA: 1670v 337 Cyc DATA: 1670v 337 Cyc
01/01/2010 00:00:03 01/01/2010 00:00:02

[▼][▲] button is used to check the event. [00001/10000] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 PQM detect element.
 Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)
 Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)
 Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG)
 Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH)
 Current Harmonic distortion(ITH)
 Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV)
 Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL)
 Current Unbalance(UBI)
 Source side Over Voltage(OVS)
 Load side Over Voltage(OVL)
 Source side Under Voltage(UVS)
 Load side Under Voltage(UVL)
 Under Frequency(UNF)
 PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase
 PQM element related measured value.
 PQM detect time(cycle)
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity
Stores last 10,000 events.

9.9. Load Current Alarm Event

Load current alarm event is occurred by “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP # /
MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu. Max. 10000 events of load current alarm event
can be recorded and indicated.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu to check the load current
alarm event. In this menu, you can check the alarm occurrence and the current value of each phase
and the period of occurrence.
[LOAD CURR＇ ALARM] [LOAD CURR＇ ALARM]
No.00001/10000 [00002/10000]
No.00002/10000
TARGET : A
VALUE : 00000 A DATA:
VALUE 1670v 337
: 00000 A Cyc
DURATION: 2 sec 01/01/2010 00:00:02
DURATION: 2 sec
01/01/2010 00:00:03 01/01/2010 00:00:02
[▼][▲] is used to check the event. [00001/10000] is the latest recorded event.
Trigger Source
 Taget element
- A: Phase A Alarm current
- B: Phase B Alarm current
- C: Phase C Alarm current
- G: Ground Alarm current
 Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred
Trigger Time
Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Max. 10000 events are saved.

9.10. Clear Saved Data

Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved events. Passcode 3 certification is
required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.
EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA
[CLEAR SAVED DATA] Clear Saved Data

>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
5.SET CHANGE
6.LOAD & ENERGY message is displayed.
7.DIGNOSTIC
8.PQM
9.PQM CYCLE
10.LOAD CURR’ ALARM 11. ABOVE ALL
11.ABOVE ALL
1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.
[CLEAR EVENT]
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

10. MAINTENANCE
Place the cursor on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu displays Maintenance information.
This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.
[MAINTENANCE]
>1.COUNT
2.INTERRUT TIME
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.DATA RESET
5.CONTROLLER INFO
6.MECHANISM SCALE
10.1. Count
Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.
[COUNT]
>1.ETR300-R
2.FAULT
3.PQM
4.COMMUNICATION
5.USER COUNT
10.1.1. ETR300-R Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / ETR300-R” to confirm ETR300-R count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU
[ETR300-R] Restart Count

RESTART : 30 ETR300-R restart number is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC : 0
OPERATION : 0
Diagnostic Count
ETR300-R diagnostic count is displayed.
Operation Count
Recloser operation counter is displayed.

10.1.2. Fault Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count. Number of fault is
displayed. This COUNT menu consists 7pages. Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT

[FAULT-TOTAL] [FAULT-FREQ] [FAULT-OTHERS]
No. 1/7 No. 6/7 No. 7/7
FAULT TRIP : 0 81 OVER : 0 DEMAND : 0
51 TOC : 0 81 UNDER : 0 46BC : 0
50 IOC : 0 81 DECAY : 0 32POW : 0
27 UV : 0 DEMAND : 0 21YN : 0
59 OV : 0
81 FREQ : 0
[FAULT-TOC] [FAULT-OV] [FAULT-TOTAL]

No. 2/7 5/7 No. 1/7
TARGET A : 0 TARGET A : 0 FAULT TRIP : 0
TARGET B : 0 TARGET B : 0 51 TOC : 0
TARGET C : 0 TARGET C : 0 50 IOC : 0
TARGET G : 0 TARGET N : 0 27 UV : 0
TARGET SEF : 0 59 OV : 0
TARGET Q : 0 81 FREQ : 0
[FAULT-IOC] [FAULT-UV]
No. 2/7 No. 4/7
TARGET A : 0 TARGET A : 0
TARGET B : 0 TARGET B : 0
TARGET C : 0 TARGET C : 0
TARGET G : 0
TARGET SEF : 0
TARGET Q : 0
FAULT-TOTAL (1/7)
Displays total count of faults.
 TRIP : Displays trip operation count.
 51 TOC : Displays time overcurrent trip count.
 50 IOC : Dispalys instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent trip count.
 27 UV : Displays under voltage trip count.
 59 OV : Displays phase over voltage and neutral over voltage trip count.
 81 FRE : Displays over frequency, under frequency and frequency decay trip count.
FAULT-TOC (2/7)

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT

Displays the time overcurrent trip count for each target.
FAULT-IOC (3/7)
Displays the instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent trip count for each target.
FAULT-UV (4/7)
Displays under voltage trip count for each phase.
FAULT-OV (5/7)
Displays over voltage trip count for each phase.
Target N means the neutral over voltage trip count.
FAULT-FREQ(6/7)
Displays the trip count for other faults.
 81 OVER : Displays over frequency trip count.
 81 UNDER : Displays under frequency trip count.
 81 DECAY : Displays frequency decay trip count.
FAULT-FREQ(7/7)
Displays the trip count for other faults.
 DEMAND : Displays demand trip count.
 46BC : Displays Broken Conductor trip count.
 32POW : Displays 32 Power element trip count.
 21YN : Displays 21 Zero Impedence trip count.

10.1.3. PQM Count

This menu displays power quality(PQM) related counter information, it has sub-menu as below.
When a PQM event occurs, the corresponding counter is increased.
[PQM COUNT]
>1.INTERRUT
2.SAG
3.SWELL
4.HARMONICS
5.CURR UNBALANCE
6.VOLT UNBALANCE
7.UNDER VOLTAGE
8.OVER VOLTAGE
9.UNDER FREQUNCY
10.1.3.1. Interrupt
Move to “MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT” to confirm interrup count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT
[INTERRUPT] Number of Interruption is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0
SUSSTAINED : 0
10.1.3.2. Sag
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG
[SAG] Number of Sag is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
INSTANT : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0

10.1.3.3. Swell
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL” to confirm swell count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL
[SWELL] Number of Swell occurred is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
INSTANT : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0
10.1.3.4. Harmonics
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC
[HARMONIC-VTHD COUNT]
Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu
No. 1/2
consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
VTHD(1/2)
Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage
harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
[HARMONIC-VTHD COUNT]
No. 1/2
ITHD(2/2)
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0 Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0 harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
PHASE G : 0
10.1.3.5. Current Unbalance

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE” to confirm current
unbalance count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNBALANCE
[UNBALANCE] Number of Current Unbalance occurred is displayed.

CURRENT : 0
VOLT-SOURCE: 0
VOLT-LOAD : 0

10.1.3.6. Under Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE” to confirm under voltage
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE
[UNDER VOLT-VS] 1/2 Number of under-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A: 0
PHASE B: 0
PHASE C: 0 VS-UNDER VOLT(1/2)
Total number of undervoltage at source side and number of
undervoltage per phase are displayed.
[UNDER VOLT-VL] 2/2

VL-UNDER VOLT (2/2)
TOTAL : 0
Total number of undervoltage at load side and number of
PHASE R: 0
PHASE S: 0 undervoltage at load side per phase are displayed.
PHASE T: 0
10.1.3.7. Over Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE” to confirm over voltage
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE
[OVER VOLT-VS] 1/2 Number of over-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A: 0
PHASE B: 0
PHASE C: 0 VS-OVER VOLT(1/2)
Total number of overvoltage at source side and number of
undervoltage per phase are displayed.
[OVER VOLT-VS] 2/2

VL-OVER VOLT (2/2)
TOTAL : 0
Total number of overvoltage at load side and number of overvoltage
PHASE R: 0
PHASE S: 0 at load side per phase are displayed.
PHASE T: 0

10.1.3.8. Under Frequency

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / Under Frequency” to confirm under frequency
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY
[UNDER FREQUENCY] Number of underfrequency is displayed.

COUNT : 0

10.1.4. Communication Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION
[COMM. COUNT-DNP S1] [COMM. COUNT-DNPS2]

No. 1/4 No. 4/4
Rx Message: 0 D Conf TO : 0
Tx Message: 0 A Conf TO : 0
Unsol Tx : 0 DI Evt buf: 0
Rx CRC Err: 0 AI Evt buf: 0
Tx RETRY : 0 CI Evt buf: 0
SBO TO : 0
[COMM. COUNT-DNPS1] [COMM. COUNT-DNPS2]

No. 2/4 No. 3/4
D Conf TO : 0 Rx Message: 0
A Conf TO : 0 Tx Message: 0
DI Evt buf: 0 Unsol Tx : 0
AI Evt buf: 0 Rx CRC Err: 0
CI Evt buf: 0 Tx RETRY : 0
SBO TO : 0
Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT menu consists 4 pages. Use
[▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
COMM. COUNT-DNP S1(1/4)

 Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
 Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
COMM. COUNT-DNP S1(2/4)

 D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 DI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted DI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 AI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmiteed AI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 CI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted CI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION

COMM. COUNT-DNP S2(3/4~4/4)
Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The composition counter is same as
DNP3.0 Slave 1.

10.1.5. User Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT” to confirm user count.
The ETR300-R provides eight(8) user counts. The user count can define the counter to be managed
by the user through the PLC configuration. When input condition set in CLSET # (User Counter
Set Condition) of PLC is occured, the corresponding user count is increased by 1. When the input
condition set in CLRST # (User Counter Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding user count is
cleared to 0. When you set CLST (close status) on CLSET01, user count 1 is increased by 1,
whenever the recloser is closed. User count can be monitored by Pulse Count logic of PLC
function. For details, refer to “7.1.5.3. PULSE COUNTER”.
Figure 10-1. PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT

Displays the user count defined by the PLC configuration (CLSET01
[USER] 1/2
USER COUNT1: 0 ~ CLSET08).
USER COUNT2: 0
USER COUNT3: 0 This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to
USER COUNT4: 0 move into sub-menu.
[USER] 2/2
USER COUNT5: 0
USER COUNT6: 0
USER COUNT7: 0
USER COUNT8: 0

10.2. Interrupt Time

Move to “MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME” to confirm interrupt time.
MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME

[INTERRUPT TIME] Accumulated interrupt time is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0
SUSSTAINED : 0
10.3. Contact Wear

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” to confirm contact wear.
MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR
[CONTACT WEAR] Display recloser contact wear in percentage.
A : 100.00
B : 100.00
C : 100.00

10.4. Data Reset

Move to “MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data.
Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.
MAINTENACE / DATA RESET
[DATA RESET] Saved Data Reset

>1.ETR300-R COUNT
2.OPERATION COUNT Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.
3.FAULT COUNT
4.PQM COUNT If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
5.COM’ COUNT
6.COUNT ALL message is displayed.
7.INTERRUPT TIME
>8.BATT. CAPACITY
9.CONTACT WEAR
10.ENERGY *. NOTE )
11.MAX DEMAND
12.PEAK CURRENT 1. ‘OPERATION COUNT’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN
13.COMM BUFF
14.USER COUNT MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION
15.ABOVE ALL
COUNT”.
[CLEAR EVENT] 2. ‘CONTACT WEAR’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR”.
3. ‘BATT. CATPACITY’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/
GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ BATT
MANAGEMENT”.
4. Except ‘OPERATION COUNT’, ‘CONTACT WEAR’ and
‘BATT CATPACITY’, all data is reset for 0.
15. ABOVE ALL

All count data of 1 ~ 14 menus are reset at once.
10.5. Controller Information

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO” to confirm ETR300-R controller information.
In this menu, information such as option, version and serial number of current ETR300-R is
displayed.

10.6. IP INFORMATION
Move to “MAINTENANCE / IP INFOMATION” to confirm ETR300-R controller IP
information. In this menu, information such as MAC address and IP address for each ETH1 and
ETH2 is displayed.
MAINTENACE / IP INFORMATION
[IP INFORMATION] HW
ETHERNET1
HW 00:00:00:00:00:00 MAC address for each ETH1 and ETH2 port is displayed.
IP 000.000.000.000
ETHERNET2
HW 00:00:00:00:00:00 IP
IP 000.000.000.000
IP address for each ETH1 and ETH2 is displayed.
10.7. RECLOSER AI SCALE FACTOR

Move to “MAINTENANCE / RECLOSER AI SCALE” to confirm Recloser Analog Input Scale
Factor for each CT and VT chanels. When replacing the ETR300-R controller, download the
Recloser Analog Input Scale from the previous ETR300-R using the ETIMS Interface Software and
upload it to the replacement ETR300-R. For details, refer to ETIMS Interface Software User's
Manual.
MAINTENACE / RECLOSER AI SCALE
[RECLOSER AI SCALE]
VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT
VA:1.0000 IA:1.0000
VB:1.0000 IB:1.0000
Recloser Analog Input Scale Factor for each VT chanels are displayed.
VC:1.0000 IC:1.0000
VR:1.0000 IG:1.0000
VS:1.0000 IS:1.0000
VT:1.0000
IA, IB, IC, IG, IS
Recloser Analog Input Scale Factor for each CT chanels are displayed.

11. TIME
Place the cursor on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
TIME
[TIME] In this menu, you can check and set the current data and time. This
* CURRENT TIME * menu applies local time and UTC time is managed internally
2006/11/05 21:02:38
depending on the time zone setting.
PRESS <ENT> TO SET
Here's how to change the present date and time;

1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting.
[TIME]
2) To change a number, use [▲][▼] button and to move next item,
* SETTING TIME *
press [ENT] button.
2006/11/05 21:02:38 3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT].
USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER]
PRESS <FUNC> : ABORT
If “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE /
Time Syn’ Type” is “GMT” and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /
[TIME] DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is “ON”, do not set current
* SAVE TIME * time manually.
2006/11/05 21:02:38
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE

12. STATUS
Place the cursor on “STATUS” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This
menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[STATUS]
>1.ETR300-R
2.INPUT PORTS
3.OUTPUT PORTS
4.GOOSE S-IN
5.GOOSE D-IN
6.GOOSE OUT
7.FAULT
8.DIAGONOSTIC
12.1. Recloser
Move to “MAINTENANCE / STATUS / ETR300-R” to confirm tank and ETR300-R status.
STATUS/ RECLOSER
[ETR300-R]
Present recloser and ETR300-R status are displayed.
>52A CONTACT: CLOSE
TYPE : REC
Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
PROTECTION : ENABLE
GND-PROTECT: ENABLE
SEF-PROTECT:DISABLE
RECLOSE :DISABLE 52A CONTACT
>CONTR’ LOCK: UNLOCK
CONTROL : LOCAL
Displays Circuit Breaker status.(OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE)
LOOP CONTR’:DISABLE
LC RESTORE :DISABLE
HOTLINE TAG:DISABLE TYPE
AUX1 :DISABLE
AUX2 :DISABLE Displays control type.(Recloser type(REC), Sectionalizer type(SEC))
79 LOCKOUT : ON
>AC POW FAIL: NORMAL
>BATTERY : NORMAL
>BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL PROTECTION
>DOOR OPEN : ON
>HANDLE LOCK: OFF Protection function status is displayed. (ENABLE/DISABLE)
>GAS : NORMAL
GND-PROTECT
Ground protection function status is displayed. (ENABLE/DISABLE)
SEF-PROTECT
Ground protection function status is displayed. (ENABLE/DISABLE)

STATUS/ RECLOSER
[ETR300-R] RECLOSE
52A CONTACT: CLOSE
TYPE : REC
Display whether to use reclosing function. (ENABLE/DISABLE)
PROTECTION : ENABLE
GND-PROTECT: ENABLE
SEF-PROTECT:DISABLE
>RECLOSE :DISABLE
CONTR’ LOCK
>CONTR’ LOCK: UNLOCK Displays panel control lock status.(LOCK, UNLOCK)
CONTROL : LOCAL
LOOP CONTR’:DISABLE
LC RESTORE :DISABLE
HOTLINE TAG:DISABLE CONTROL
AUX1 :DISABLE
AUX2 :DISABLE Operation control select is displayed.(REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE)
79 LOCKOUT : ON
>AC POW FAIL: NORMAL
>BATTERY : NORMAL
>BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL LOOP CONTR’
>DOOR OPEN : ON
>HANDLE LOCK: OFF
Display whether to use loop control function. (ENABLE/DISABLE)
>GAS : NORMAL
LC RESTORE
Display whether to use loop control restore function.
(ENABLE/DISABLE)
HOTLINE TAG
Display whether to use hotline tag function. (ENABLE/DISABLE)
AUX1 / AUX2
Display whether to use AUX1 / AUX2 tag function.
(ENABLE/DISABLE)
79 LOCKOUT
Lockout of reclosing status is displayed(ON, OFF)
AC POW FAIL
External power supply status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)
BATTERY
Battery status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)
BAT’ CHARGER
Battery charger status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

STATUS/ RECLOSER
DOOR OPEN
Door open status is displayed(ON, OFF)
HANDLE LOCK
Display recloser handle lock status (ON, OFF)
GAS
Circuit breaker gas pressure status is displayed. (NORMAL, LOW)
Battery charger status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

12.2. Input Ports

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS” to confirm input ports’s status.
STATUS/ INPUT PORTS
[INPUT PORTS] Displays 34 input terminals’ status.

IN 101 : OFF
IN 102 : OFF  IN101 ~ IN112 : Displays the status of SCADA input ports (But,
IN 103 : OFF
IN 104 : OFF when ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked “OFF”
IN 105 : OFF
：  IN201 ~ IN214 : Displays the status of recloser status input ports.
：
：  IN301 ~ IN308 : Displays external input ports of External I/O Unit
IN 308 : OFF
ETIO10 (But, when ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is
marked “OFF”).
Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.

[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.
12.3. Output Ports

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS” to confirm output ports’s status.
STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS

[OUTPUT PORTS] Displays 20 output terminals’ status.
OUT 101: OFF
OUT 102: OFF  OUT101 ~ OUT108 : Displays the status of the SCADA output ports
OUT 103: OFF
OUT 104: OFF (But, when the ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked
OUT 105: OFF
： “OFF”).
：
：  OUT201 ~ OUT214 : Displays the status of the recloser control
OUT 308: OFF
output ports.
 OUT301 ~ OUT308 : Displays external output ports’s status of
External I / O Unit ETIO10. (But, when ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting is
OFF, it always is marked “OFF”).
Depending on output signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.

[▼] [▲] button is used to check all outpu terminal status.

12.4. GOOSE Single Input

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE S-IN” to confirm goode single inputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN
[GOOSE S-IN] The ETR300-R provides 16 goose single inputs of IEC 61850
>GSIN01 ST : ON
>GSIN01 FAIL: OFF communication protocol. This menu displays the goose single input's
>GSIN02 ST : ON
>GSIN02 FAIL: OFF status provided by the ETR300-R.
>GSIN03 ST : ON
>GSIN03 FAIL: OFF
：  GSIN## ST : Displays goose single input’s current status
：
>GSIN16 ST : ON  GSIN## FAIL : Displays goose single input’s fail status.
>GSIN16 FAIL: OFF

12.5. GOOSE Double Input

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE D-IN” to confirm goode double inputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE D-IN
[GOOSE D-IN] The ETR300-R provides 16 goose double inputs of the IEC 61850
>GDIN010 Bit0: ON
>GDIN011 Bit1: OFF communication protocol. This menu displays the goose double input's
>GDIN01F Fail: OFF
>GDIN020 Bit0: ON status provided by the ETR300-R.
>GDIN021 Bit1: OFF
>GDIN02F Fail: OFF
：
：  GSIN##0 Bit0 : goose double input – displays the current status of
>GDIN160 Bit0: ON
>GDIN161 Bit1: OFF first bit(bit 0).
>GDIN16F Fail: OFF
 GSIN##1 Bit1 : goose double input – displays the current status of
the second bit(bit 1).
 GSIN##F Fail : Displays goose double input’s fail status.


12.6. GOOSE Output

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE OUT” to confirm goode outputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN
[GOOSE OUT] The ETR300-R provides 16 goose outputs of the IEC 61850
>GOUT01: OFF
>GOUT02: OFF communication protocol. This menu displays the goose output's status
GOUT03: OFF
：
provided by the ETR300-R.
：
>GOUT16: OFF
12.7. Fault
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / FAULT”.
STATUS/ FAULT
[FAULT] This menu displays the fault conditions that can not be indicated on the
>FAULT TRIP: OFF
27P1T : OFF front panel LEDs.
27P1AL : OFF
27P2T : OFF
27P2AL : OFF
27RSI : OFF Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
27RSCL : OFF
59P1T : OFF
59P1AL : OFF
59P2T : OFF FTRIP : Fault Trip Operation status.
59P2AL : OFF
59RSI : OFF 27P1T : Under Voltage 1 Trip status
59RSCL : OFF
81U1T : OFF 27P1A : Under Voltage 1 Alarm status
81U2T : OFF
81O1T : OFF 27P2T : Under Voltage 2 Trip status
81O2T : OFF
81D1T : OFF 27P2A : Under Voltage 2 Alarm status
81D2T : OFF
81RSI : OFF 27RSI : Under Voltage Auto Restoration Running status
81RSCL : OFF
27RSCL : Under Voltage Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts
59P1T : Over Voltage 1 Trip status
59P1A : Over Voltage 1 Alarm status
59P2T : Over Voltage 2 Trip status
59P2A : Over Voltage 2 Alarm status

STATUS/ FAULT
59RSI : Over Voltage Auto Restoration Running status

59RSCL : Over Voltage Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts
81U1T : Under Frequency 1 Trip status
81U2T : Under Frequency 2 Trip status
81O1T : Over Frequency 1 Trip status
81O2T : Over Frequency 2 Trip status
81D1T : Frequency Decay 1 Trip status
81RSI : Frequency Auto Restoration Running status
81RSCL : Frequency Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts
12.8. Diagonosic
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / DIGNOSTIC”
STATUS/ DIGNOSTIC
[DIGNOSTIC] Dignostic status of ETR300-R and System are displayed. When a

>DIGALM : OFF
>DIGERR : OFF diagnostic event occurs, the related status is displayed on “ON”. After
DIGIGBT: OFF
>DIGRTC : OFF the diagnostic event disappears, the status changes to “OFF” status.
DIGCLC : OFF
DIGOPOW: OFF Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
>ACFAIL : OFF
>BATBAD : OFF
NOBATT : OFF
>CHGBAD : OFF DIGALM : ETR300-R on the alarm status.
PWDOWN : OFF
DIGERR : ETR300-R has one error or more. When this status is
“ON, it means that there are critical errors on the system.
Thus, it makes to block all protection functions.
DIGRTC : Unusual condtion on Real Time Clock(RTC)
DIGCLC : Unusual condtion on Close Coil
DIGSPOW : Unusual condtion on System Power
ACFAIL: External AC Power Fail status
BATBAD : Battery Voltage Bad status
NOBATT : Battery Voltage Low status
CHGBAD : Charger Voltage Fail status
PWDOWN : Power Down status (AC Fail & No Battery)

13. METERING
Place the cursor on “METERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This
menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
The accuracy of the measurement value displayed in this menu is “2.3. Metering Accuracy”.
[METERING]
>1.CURRENT
2.VOLTAGE
3.FREQUENCY
4.POWER
5.ENERGY
6.DEMAND
7.UNBALANCE
8.HARMONICS
9.TRUE R.M.S
10.TD
11.CONTROLLER REF
13.1. Current
Following values are contained in the current metering.
 IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IQ : Displays the measured negative sequence RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 I1 : Indicates the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg°)
 I2: Indicates the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)
 3I0: Indicates the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)
 Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A)
 Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A)
 Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A)
 Peak IG : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A)
 Peak IQ : Displays the measured negative sequence Peak current (A)
NOTE
The peak current is updated by the recorded load current value when the load current alarm
event occurs. If the load current alarm function is DISABLE, the peak current is not
updated. The load current alarm function is described in “8.3.6. Load Current Alarm”.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT
Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed.
Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.
[R.M.S CURRENT] [SEQUENCE CURRENT] [PEAK CURRENT]

No. 1/3 No. 2/3 No. 3/3
IA : 0A/ 0D IA: 0 A
IB : 0A/ 0D I1: 0A/ 0D IB: 0 A
IC : 0A/ 0D I2: 0A/ 0D IC: 0 A
IG : 0A/ 0D 3I0: 0A/ 0D IG: 0 A
IQ : 0A/ 0D IQ: 0 A
SEF: 0.00A/ 0D
13.2. Voltage
Following values are contained in the voltage metering.
 SOURCE VOLT: Voltage and angle per phase at source side, Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence
voltage and angle at source side are displayed(㎸, deg°).
 LOAD VOLT: Voltage and angle per phase at load side, Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence
voltage and angle at load side are displayed(㎸, deg°).
 LINE VOLT: Phase to phase voltage and angle at source/load side are displayed (㎸, deg°).
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE”
MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE
[SOURCE VOLT] [LOAD VOLT] [LINE VOLT]

No. 1/3 No. 2/3 No. 3/3
VA: 0.00 kV 0D VR: 0.00 kV 0D AB: 0.00 kV 0D
VB: 0.00 kV 0D VS: 0.00 kV 0D BC: 0.00 kV 0D
VC: 0.00 kV 0D VT: 0.00 kV 0D CA: 0.00 kV 0D
V1: 0.00 kV 0D V1: 0.00 kV 0D RS: 0.00 kV 0D
V2: 0.00 kV 0D V2: 0.00 kV 0D ST: 0.00 kV 0D
3V0: 0.00 kV 0D 3V0: 0.00 kV 0D TR: 0.00 kV 0D
Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check it.

13.3. Frequency
Following values are contained in the frequency metering.
 Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated.
 Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.
 Slip : Frequency difference between the power source side and the load side is indicated.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
Frequency Display
[FREQUENCY]
Source: 0.00 Hz  Source

0.00 Hz/s
Load : 0.00 Hz - Frequency in source side (Hz)
0.00 Hz/s
Slip : 0.00 Hz - Frequency decay rate in source side (Hz/sec)
0.00 °
 Load
- Frequency in load side (Hz)
- Frequency decay rate in load side (Hz/sec)
 Slip
- Frequency difference between source and load sides: Slip
frequency (Hz)
- Phase difference between sour and load sides : Slip angle (deg°)

13.4. Power
Following values are contained in the power metering.
 ACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s active power displayed.
 REACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s reactive power displayed.
 APPARENT POWER: Each phase and three phase’s apparent power displayed.
 POWER FACTOR: Each phase and three phase’s power factor per phase is displayed.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”

MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER
Per phase, power and power factor are displayed.
Use [▼][▲] button to check the power metering information.
[ACTIVE POWER] [POWER FACTOR]

No. 1/4 No. 4/4
A: 0 kW A: 0.0 %
B: 0 kW B: 0.0 %
C: 0 kW C: 0.0 %
3P: 0 Kw 3P: 0.0 %
[REACTIVE POWER] [APPARENT POWER]

No. 2/4 No. 3/4
A: 0 kVar A: 0 kVA
B: 0 kVar B: 0 kVA
C: 0 kVar C: 0 kVA
3P: 0 kVar 3P: 0 kVA

13.5. Energy
Following values are contained in the energy metering.
 POS’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction are
indicated.
 POS’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction are
indicated.
 NEG’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction are
indicated.
 NEG’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction are
indicated.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY
[POS＇ W/H] Energy is displayed Use [▼][▲] button to check the energy metering
No. 1/4
information.
A: 0 kWh
B: 0 kWh
C: 0 kWh
3P: 0 kWh The last line “S” of each page indicates the time that have started the
SD:01/01/01/11:00:10
present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in
0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA
[POS＇ V/H]
No. 2/4
RESET/ ENERGY” menu.
A: 0 kVarh
B: 0 kVarh
C: 0 kVarh
3P: 0 kVarh
SD:01/01/01/11:00:10
[NEG＇ V/H]
No. 3/4
A: 0 kWh
B: 0 kWh
C: 0 kWh
3P: 0 kWh
SD:01/01/01/11:00:10
[NEG＇ V/H]
No. 4/4
A: 0 kVarh
B: 0 kVarh
C: 0 kVarh
3P: 0 kVarh
SD:01/01/01/11:00:10

13.6. Demand Current and Power

ETR300-R measures and indicates following Demand current and power items;
 DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase
sequence Demand current.
 PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current
maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current
maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current
maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 PHASE G CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase G, Demand current
maximum value of phase G and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 NEG SEQ’ CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence,
Demand current maximum valueof negative phase sequence and the time that have measured
the maximum value.
 POSITIVE ACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase A direction and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE ACTIVE POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the
maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE ACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the
 POSITIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase,
Demand active power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured the
 NEGATIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase A direction and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.
 NEGATIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the
maximum value for reverse direction.

 NEGATIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,
Demand active power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the
maximum value for reverse direction.
 NEGATIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present three-
phase, Demand active power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A and the time that have measured
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase C, Demand reactive power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have
measured the maximum value for forward direction.
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A and the time that have measured
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase C, Demand reactive power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have
measured the maximum value for reverse direction.
*. NOTE ) The aboive Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be reset
by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND” menu.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”

MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND
[DEMAND CURRENT] [NEG SEQ CURRENT] [P-A ACTIVE POWER] [3P REACTIVE POWER]
No. 01/14 No. 06/14 No. 07/14 No. 14/14
IA: 0 A DEMAND : 0 A DEMAND : 0 kW DEMAND : 0 kVar

IB: 0 A MAX : 0 A POS＇MAX: 0 kW POS＇MAX: 0 kVar
IC: 0 A 01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10
IG: 0 A NEG＇MAX: 0 kW NEG＇MAX: 0 kVar
IQ: 0 A 01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10
[PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE G CURRENT] [3P ACTIVE POWER] [P-A REACTIVE POWER]
No. 02/14 No. 05/14 No. 10/14 No. 11/14
DEMAND : 0 A DEMAND : 0 A DEMAND : 0 kW DEMAND: 0 kVar

MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A POS＇MAX: 0 kW POS＇MAX: 0 kVar
01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10
NEG＇MAX: 0 kW NEG＇MAX: 0 kVar
01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10
[PHASE B CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT]

No. 03/14 No. 04/14
DEMAND : 0 A DEMAND : 0 A
MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A
01/01/0000 11:00:10 01/01/0000 11:00:10
Demand current and power is indicated. Use [▼][▲] key to check the Demand metering
information.
13.7. Unbalance
Following values are contained in the unbalance metering.
 SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.
 LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.
 CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE
[UNBALANCE- %] Unbalance metering information is displayed.
SOURCE-VOLT: 0 %
LOAD-VOLT : 0 %
CURRENT : 0 %

13.8. Harmonics
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS”
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS
[HARMONICS-THD] [HARMONICS-02H] [HARMONICS-31H]
IA : 0.0% IA : 0.0% IA : 0.0%
IB : 0.0% IB : 0.0% IB : 0.0%
IC : 0.0% IC : 0.0% IC : 0.0%
IG : 0.0% IG : 0.0% IG : 0.0%
VA : 0.0% VA : 0.0% VA : 0.0%
VB : 0.0% VB : 0.0% VB : 0.0%
VC : 0.0% VC : 0.0% VC : 0.0%
Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check harmonic rate
information.
13.9. True R.M.S

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S
TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use
[TRUE R.M.S]
IA : 0 A [▼][▲] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.
IB : 0 A
IC : 0 A
IG : 0 A
VA : 0.00 kV
VB : 0.00 kV
VC : 0.00 kV

13.10. ZERO IMPEDANCE

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / ZERO IMPEDANCE”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING
[ZERO IMPEDANCE] ZERO IMPEDANCE value is displayed.
Z0: 0.0 Ohm
∠ 0°
 Z0 : Displays conductance and angle (ohm, deg) of ZERO
Y0: 0.0 mS
∠ 0° IMPEDANCE
 Y0 : Displays suseptance and angle (mS, deg) of ZERO
IMPEDANCE
13.11. TD Monitoring
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / TD”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING
[TD MONITORING] TD input value is displayed.
TD1: 0.0 ETD1: 0.0
TD2: 0.0 ETD2: 0.0
TD3: 0.0 ETD3: 0.0
TD4: 0.0 ETD4: 0.0  TD1 ~ TD4 : Displays the input value of the DC input channel on
the front panel (But, when the 'TD Input Use' setting is OFF, it
always is marked 0).
 ETD1 ~ ETD4 : Displays input value of external DC input channel
of External I/O ETIO10 (But, when ‘EXT.I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it
always is marked 0)
*. NOTE ) Depending on the ETR300-R option, the displayed items

may be different.

13.12. Controller Reference

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLLER REF”
MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLL REF
[REF. VALUE (1/2)] In this menu, the reference measurement value for checking the
BATTERY VOLT: 00.00V condition of ETR300-R is displayed. This menu consists of 2 pages
CHARGER VOLT: 00.00V
CHARGER I(+): 0.00A and use [▼] [▲] button to move into sub-menu.
BATTERY CAP.:100.00%
TEMPER.(IN) : 00D
TEMPER.(OUT): 00D  BATTERY VOLT : Display the battery voltage.
 CHARGER VOLT : Display the voltage of charge circuit.
 CHARGER I : Displays charge current. When the measurement
[REF. VALUE (2/2)] value is positive, it’s charge current. On the other side, the
+12V : 12.00V
-12V :-12.00V measurement value is negavitve, it’s discharge current.
REF. VOLT : 2.50A
GAS PRE(bar): 00.00b  BATTERY CAP.: Displays battery capacity by ‘Battery
GAS PRE(VOL): 00.00V Management’.
 TEMPER.(IN) : Displays internal temperature of ETR300-R.
 TEMPER.(OUT) : Displays external temperature of ETR300-R
(control box internal temperature)(But, ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ is
OFF, it doesn’t indicate that item).
 +12V : Displays +12V system power measurement value.
 -12V : Displays -12V system power measurement value.
 REF. VOLT : Displays reference voltage 2.5V measurement
value.
 GAS PRE(bar) : Displays gas pressure(But, when ‘GAS
Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t indicate that item).
 GAS PRE(VOL) : Displays input voltage value configured on
gas pressure input port. It calculates gas pressure using that
voltage value. (But, when ‘GAS Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t
indicate that item).

14. INSTALLATION
14.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
Satellite-Synchronized
Clock Unit
(ETSSCU100)
Door switch
Handle
ETR300-R
VA / VR
User Interface
Panel
VB / VS
VC / VT
TYPE :
SERIAL No :
DATE : 20 . .
POWER SUPPLY : VAC
WEIGHT : kg
User Interface
Door
Figure 14-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
User Interface Door

User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull the
handle.
Control Power Switch

After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power,
right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control.
AC Power Outlet
For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for
safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 14-4. Inner Structure”.
Air Vent
To prevent from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are covered with left and right side.

14.2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
443
Ø1
38 7
Ø
Ø 34
914.5
826.5
Earth Terminal
Φ12(113mm) 17mm dia.
292 86
322
Antenna hole
Spare hole
VG22 series
(34.9mm)
Control Cable Auxiliary Contact Cable

Receptacle Receptacle
AC Power Cable
Receptacle
Figure 14-2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
The top of the control box where the solar radiation is directly applied consists of a double
structure. The inside of the door is insulated with 5t insulator on the front side of the door so that it
can withstand rapid temperature changes. An air vent is installed at the top and bottom of the
control box to remove moisture from inside and it is also satisfying IP54 that can withstand dust /
moisture.

The control box is able to withstand the external environment and temperature changes for a long
time, and STS304 material is used to prevent rust. In addition, it is spray painted with Munsell No.
N5Y 7/1 (gray line), for durability of painting.
All metal parts of the control box are earthed to the enclosure and an earthing terminal for the
ground cable is provided on the outside of the enclosure. The ground terminal can be connected up
to 113mm of cable without separate auxiliary devices.
At the bottom of the control box, there are an antenna hole for remote communication and three
spare holes(Φ21) for user convenience in preparation for future improvement.

14.3. Earth Wiring Diagram
Figure 14-3. Earth Wiring Diagram
After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.

Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0.470") diameter.
Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from ETR300-R Earth Terminal must be connected to the
ground.

14.4. Inner Structure

Satellite-Synchronized
Clock Unit
(ETSSCU100)
Door switch
Control Module
User Available space
350*200*H100mm
(Modem space)
Capacitor Bank
SMPS
FUS E
3 Point SPD
locking (Surge Protection Device)
TYPE :
Terminal
R A IL H O L D E R
R A IL H O L D E R
SER IAL No :
Block
DATE : 20 . .
PO W ER SUPPLY : VAC
W EIGH T : kg
E N D C O VE R
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
USL-5 SR 4
Power
Ph as e A ngl e
A m pl ifie r
PW
T
T
S
Transformer
PO W E R
R
CN1
C
OU TPU T
B
CN3
A
IN P U T
CN2
N L
Battery
A document pocket
Nameplate
MCB(Battery, AC Power)
AC Power Outlet
Heater(option)
Figure 14-4. Inner Structure
Controller Power MCB (Miniature Circuit Breaker)

Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac.
Heater
Optional Heater is 40W
Battery
Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (＋) screwdriver for replacement.
Fuse
Fuse is for circuit protection
Terminal Block
Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user.
User Available Space
Space for additional hardware connection.
AC Power Outlet(Option)
AC Power Outlet is helpful for local operator as such getting AC Power using laptop.

14.5. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Figure 14-5. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.
On Base plate, 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.
Available space for height of base plate is 100㎜
14.6. User-Available DC Power

Table 14-1. User-Available DC Power
Voltage Rating Voltage Range Maximum Power output Positions
24Vdc 20∼25Vdc 40W Continuous
12Vdc 11.0∼12.5Vdc 60W 60second
Standard Voltage : 24Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating
60W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 60W, additional power should
be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer.
Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315＂). With using (＋) PTR J
connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to AWG12.
When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there is a
fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.

Recloser Control Cabinet
Receptacle(male) Receptacle(female)
(VG02B1:28-21) (VG02B1:28-21) MOV
LOAD SIDE F01
IC IC IA
Protection B/D A A 02
T S R
(CT & VD circuit protection) IB IB 03
B B IB
04
IA
1A
IA
C C 05 USB-B
16 IC
IG IG 06
CURRENT
D D 07
17 VC P7 IG
E E 1 CN1 08
18 VB 2 09
F F SEF
10
0.16A
VD 9 VA P1 P2
G G CN2 Eth1
1 1 CN3
P3 13 VT E01
H H 2 2 VA (TP/FX)
02
4V
14 VS 3 3 VB
J J 03
7 7 VC Eth2
3 15 VR 04
K K 4 4
05
6 10 5 5 VR (TP/FX)
06
VOLTAGE
L L
4V
6 6 VS
2 11 07
M M 8 8 VT
P1 08
5 12
N N
T/D
1 P P
RS232-1
4 S S L01 PS(V+)
69 02 PS(MONI')
PROTECTION C.T
T T
12 03 PS(GND)
U U
11 52b RS232-2
V V K01 IN201 (Open)
10 52a 02 IN202 (Close)
P2 W W
9 03 IN203 (Unlock)
INPUT
X X DOOR S/W 04 IN204 Spare 485+
8 05 IN205 (Door) 1
Z Z 485-
7 06 IN206 (CBP_OK) 2
a a RS485
VD 07 IN207 Spare FG
52b 3
b b 08 IN208 Spare
52a 09
PW
c c 10 ETSSCU100
d d J04 CAP+
C B A J05 CAP- GPS Module
e e (Option)
SOURCE SIDE f f
J01 IRIG-B 01 RS485+
g g CLOSE 02 RS485-
02
TRIP & CLOSE
+ OPEN + 03 RS485GND
CC h h 03 1
COM 04 IRIG-B(+)
j j - 2 05 IRIG-B(-)
06 N/C
m m 313
07 POW+
+ p p 401
TC Capacitor Bank 08 POW-
r r C1
k k
n n
SMPS-C Module
s s LD1 2 CN2
POWER ALARM SMA
R R OUTPUT 4
14.7. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram
Wifi
1 CN1
Shield Cable I01 (Option)
SMPS ON OUT205
INPUT PW
8M(standard) 2 02
03
LD3 1,2,3 CN3 OUT206
+ 04
DC120V OUTPUT DC120V
OUTPUT 4,5,6 05 OUT207
- 06
BATT' IN
FG ZG AC24V IN (DC24V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
+ -
1 2 4 3 2 1 Power output
TB1 TB2 MODEM 313
H01 +
401
POWER 02 - DC24V or DC12V
03 (40W / Continuous)
GPS Module
LEGEND
(60W / 1min)
04
Tr1 : Transformer
BATTERY
BAT1 310
G01 +
410 BATT.
TC : Trip Coil(120VDC)
G02 -
T/D: Voltage Transducer

SCADA
CC : Close Coil(120VDC)
Figure 14-6. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram (Standard type)

Tr1
GPS Module : ETSSCU100

TF1 : Fuses, 7A(Heater etc.)
DP-1202AD(200W)
100 130 12 digital input
VD : Resistive Voltage Divider

A Power input
SPD : Surge Protection Device

230 120
HT1 : Heater (AC110V/AC220V)

G03 P
C1 : Capacitor 680000uF/160WV
B 200 24VAC
220 8 digital output
G04 N
Neutral
C
BAT1 : Battery 24V(12Vdc / 17AH * 2)

69 : Switch lock(69 closed if switch lock)
AC power input
MCB2 : C60N/04A 2P (Scheider Electric)

MCB1 : C60N/06A 2P (Scheider Electric)
Receptacle
(VG02B1:22-2/male)
52b : Open status(52b closed if switch close)

52a : Close status(52a closed if switch open)
Control & RTU Module
ETR300-R
L
Protection B/D : CT open circuit & VD protection
X901 : Terminal block(250V/20A), USL-5SR4(18)

N
SMPS-C : Capacitor Charge Power Supply Module
Door S/W : Micro Switch / KH-9015-PBL (250V/15A)

MOV : Metal Oxide Varistor(Surge Protection Device)
SPD
http://www.entecene.co.kr
429
14.8. urrent Inputs Wiring Diagram

Current IG is connected with Side Panel
IN(F07, F08) in Earthing System.
SEF(F09, F10) should be connected, so
called “JUMPER”
F01
IA
2
3
IB
4
Current IN should be connected with
IC
6
SEF(F09, F10) of Side Panel in.
IN
8
Non Earthing System.
SEF
10
IN(F07,F08) should be connected to each CT
other.
F01
IA
2
3
IB
4
5
IC
6
7
IN
8
9
SEF
10
CT
Figure 14-7. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation”
CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.

14.9. VD Wiring Diagram

 VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) measures Voltage
with using Capacitor or Resistance installed in each Bushing of Recloser.
 VD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.
 Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase
rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.
 Option CVD 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ Class
 Option RVD 15㎸, 27㎸ Class
E01
VA
VB
2
VC
3
VN
4
VR
5
VS
6
VT
7
VN
8
PT
Figure 14-8. VD Wiring Diagram

14.10. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation
Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation
For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.
“Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and Recloser.
If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and VD wiring in side
panel to be matched.
ETR300-R Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.

14.11. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 14-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function Pin Function
A C.T Phase C a 52 common(Auxiliary)
B C.T Phase B b 52b(Auxiliary)
C C.T Phase A c 52a(Auxiliary)
D C.T Common(G) d Close and Trip Coil Common
E VD Source Phase C e Close and Trip Coil Common
F VD Source Phase B f Close and Trip Coil Common
G VD Source Phase A g Close Coil
H VD Load side Phase T h Close Coil
J VD Load side Phase S j Close Coil
K VD Load side Phase R k not connected
L Pressure Sensor Output(controller input) m Trip Coil
M not connected n not connected
N Pressure Sensor Power AGND p Trip Coil
P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc r Trip Coil
R Cable shield and Ground s not connected
S not connected
T Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)
U Recloser Status Common
V Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Open)
W Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)
X not connected
Z not connected
 Control ETR300-R Receptacle : VG95234 28-21S (Female)

 Recloser Receptacle : VG95234 28-21P (Male)
 Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”)
 Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”

Figure 14-10. Control Receptacle
“Figure 14-10. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control ETR300-R.
14.12. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling

Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling.
For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.
Following notices are suggested.
Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing.
Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this to
complete connection.
Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control Cable
assembling
Figure 14-11. Recloser Receptacle Figure 14-12. Control Cable

14.13. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 14-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function
A AC Power Input
B AC Power Input (Neutral)
C EARTH
Standard Input Voltage of Control ETR300-R

is 220Vac. Figure 14-13. Power Receptacle
14.14. AC Power Cable

TYPE : VG22-2S(Female)
Cable Length : 2C-3.5㎟ 6meter(236")
A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase)
B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral)
C PIN : Earth
14.15. Fuses
Table 14-4. Fuses
Rating /
Positions Dimensions Purpose
External AC - Power Input
0.25"×1.25" AC Power outlet and Heater

Terminal Block TF1 10A
(6.385×31.75)㎜ User Available AC Power
Inside Relay Module F1 0.197"×0.787"

5A User-Available DC Power
(Power board) (5×20)㎜

14.16. Battery and Control run time

Table 14-5. Battery Specs
Maker CSB
Battery Type GP 12170
Nominal Voltage 12V
Nominal capacity 17 amp-hours
Dimension 181×76×167㎜
Self-discharge Versus Time 14 month at +25℃, 5 month at +40℃
Service life Time 5 years at +25℃, 1 .5years at +50℃
Battery Connector(CN11) Molex Connector 3191-2R
Controller run time 24 hours at -5℃, 32 hours at 25℃
Recharge Time 15 hours at +25℃
Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in 2

1
series.
Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is
connected to battery switch NFB1. In order to store
Battery for a long time, turn NFB1 “OFF” without
disconnecting Harness connector.
The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3%
per month when batteries are stored at an ambient
temperature of +20℃(+68℉). The self-discharge rate
varies with ambient temperature. Figure 14-14. Battery
The approximate depth of discharge or remaining
capacity of an battery can be empirically determined
from “Figure 14-15. Open Circuit Voltage”.
Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits.
Remove Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure
the battery voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual
capacity is 0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires
maintenance.
24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and SMPS-C
Module through NFB1(Battery Switch).
Relay Module supplies through PTR G Connector in Side
Figure 14-15. Open Circuit Voltage
Panel and SMPS-C Module supplies through PTR J
Connector of SMPS-C Module.

14.17. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to
prevent over-recharge. Charge power supply is 24Vac, equal with Relay Module. Charging device
charges up to 80 percent of battery with constant current, from 80 to 100 percent of battery with
constant voltage, it makes that there’s any danger of overcharging. To measure temperature in
charging circuit, it helps to compensate with charging voltage, 26.4V to 28.2V. When measured
temperature is 5~35℃, charging voltage is 27.3V. Below 5℃ and higher than 35℃ are measured,
charging voltages are 28.2V and 26.4V, respectively.
Charge Voltage : 27.3Vdc(26.4V~28.2V)

Charge Current : 1.2Adc
14.18. Battery Change

Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and is
connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver.
For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and
black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake.
For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire
later. Refer to “14.16. Battery and Control run time”

14.19. Communication Cables
1) Cable USB-B to USB-A: Connect to Computer

ETR300-R Controller Computer
Figure 14-16. Cable USB-B to USB-A (connect to computer)
2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
ETR300-R Controller Modem, etc.
Figure 14-17. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)
3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
ETR300-R Controller Modem, etc.
Figure 14-18. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)

14.20. Hardware Block Diagram
RECLOSER CONTROL TRM Human-Machine Interface Module

(TRANSFORMER 20 X 8 Line LCD
MODULE)
METER
CURRENT
USB-B TYPE
VOLTAGE
PROTECTION 4 CT INPUTS FREQUENCY
CT 1 CT SENSITIVE BATTERY
VOLTAGE 6 VD
DIVIDER Main Process Module
INPUTS (ETR300-R(600))
Ethernet 1
TP or FX (Option)
Protocol Ethernet 2
PSM DNP 3.0 TP or FX (Option)
( Power Supply MODBUS
IEC 60870-5-101
Module) IEC 60870-5-104 RS232-1
IEC 61850 (Option)
52 CONTACT MONITORED
69 CONTACT
RS232-2
CLOSE/TRIP
RS485
MAGNETIC CONTROL
ACTUATOR
Capacitor IRIG-B
SMPS-C
120Vdc
(Capacitor
Charger)
SCADA Option
BATTERY
24Vdc
DIGITAL INPUTS 12
Transformer DIGITAL OUTPUT 8

AC EXTERNAL 24Vac
POWER INPUT
DC Power Output
(DC12V or DC24V)
Figure 14-19. Hardware Block Diagram

14.21. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
Controller Recloser
INPUT
COM (12Vdc) 1114
K09 U
IN201 (Trip Status) 1115 52b
K01 V
IN202 (Close Status) 1116 52a
K02 W
IN203 (Unlock Status) 1117 69
K03 T
IN206 (Cap, Charge OK) 1120
K06 SMPS-C Module
CN2 2
ALARM
4 OUTPUT
OUT205 CN1 1
I01 3 TB1
SMPS ON AC24V IN 4
2 INPUT
I02
2 TB2
BATT' IN
CN3 1,2,3 1
Relay Module
(DC24V)
+120VDC
J04 +
DC120V
C1 OUTPUT
4,5,6
J05 -
TB1 2 LD1 LD3 d

ZG
IGBT 1 FG e
f
Common
J03
g CC
Close J01 j
Control
Trip J02 m TC
Control
p
0VDC r
Side Panel Control Cable
CC Close Coil
TC Trip Coil
C Capacitor for Trip & Close
IGBT IGBT Contact for Trip & Close Control
Figure 14-20. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
SMPS-C is a module that receives AC 24V and BATT '(DC24V) input and charges the capacitor
for trip & close in CC (continuous current) mode.

 SMPS ON INPUT: ON/OFF input terminal of SMPS module and operates ON when short
 DC120V OUTPUT: DC120V output terminal for charging capacitor
 LD1: Lights up when SMPS module operates
 LD3: Lights up when capacitor charging is complete
 ALARM OUTPUT: Capacitor charge completion signal contact
When the IGBT is "ON", the charged capacitor's power turns on the trip/close coil, resulting in
recloser operation.

14.22. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
124
125
126
127
Figure 14-21. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram

 CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
 The capacity of VD is 20㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.

14.23. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
INTERUPTERS
VACUUM
Protection Module Receptacle(MS28-21P)

IC
4 16 1305 A
IB
1 17 1303 B
IA
5 18 1301 C
IG
P1
2 9 1302 D
6
VC
3 13 1312 E
VB
14 1311 F
VA
P3
7 1310
15 G
8 VT
10 1318 H
9 VS
11 1316 J
P2
10 VR
12 K
11 1314 L
12
N
P
69
1112 12 1112 T
1111 11 1111 U
1110 10 V
52b
1109 9 1109 W
52a
1108 8 1108 a
1107 7 1107 b
52b
1106 6 1106 c
52a
1105 5 1105 d
1104 4 1104 e
1103 3 f
+ g
CC 1102 2 1102
+
TC 1101 1 1101 h
TB1 j
m
p
r
R
RE1
Figure 14-22. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram

 CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
 The resistance of VD is 100MΩ, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.

14.24. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)

Table 14-6. Current Transformer (CT)
Description Pin Function
A C.T Phase C
CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard) B C.T Phase B
CT Resistance < 5 C C.T Phase A
D C.T Common(G)
14.25. CT Protection Circuit

A circuit which prevent from increasing voltage of secondary CT when Open Circuit, is built. This
circuit use TRIAC components and it is operated when the secondary voltage is 27 ~ 35V.
Figure 14-1. CT Protection Circuit
 D is Diac component and bi-directional and it works when 27~35V is applied.

 Q is Triac component and bi-directional and it works when the Voltage is applied at GATE.
 When CT secondary circuit is OPEN, the voltage is raised and D voltage is within 27~35V, D is
activated and operates Q in order to prevent a voltage increasing at both side of CT. Therefore,
the secondary voltage of CT is not increased over D voltage.

14.26. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD)

Table 14-7. Voltage Divider (VD)
E VD Source Phase C
EVR RECLOSER
Pin R is connected to Ground. F VD Source Phase B
VD Capacitance : 20㎊ G VD Source Phase A
For VD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase
H VD Load side Phase T
and Ground.
J VD Load side Phase S
K VD Load side Phase R
R Cable shield and Ground
E VD Source Phase C
F VD Source Phase B
G VD Source Phase A
K VD Load side Phase R

Figure 14-23. VD Wiring Diagram of EVR
R Cable shield and Ground
EPR RECLOSER
Pin R is connected to Ground.
VD Capacitance of Source Phase : 100MΩ
VD Capacitance of Load side Phase : 100MΩ
For VD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase
and Ground.
For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC
Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.
Figure 14-24. VD Wiring Diagram

Voltage Measuring Method 1
of EPR
measure MOV voltage.
(measure a voltage between MOV arms)
Voltage Measuring Method 2

Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and
measure MOV voltage.

14.27. Voltage Transducer
Figure 14-25. Voltage Transducer
 Voltage sensing device measures a voltage by using capacity of capacitor built or capacity of
resistance built in bushing of switch. Capacity of capacitor is 26㎊(±%), resistanc 100㏁.
 Voltage sensing device divides a voltage by using Voltage Divider(VD) and secondary
capacitor or resistance, and then divided voltage is supplied to RTU through Amplifer(AMP)
circuit and Transformer.
 MOV(TNR15G820K) is used to protect surge of control.

14.28. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)

Table 14-8. ETR300-R Pressure Sensor
L Pressure Sensor Output
Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
Output voltage(Vdc)
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
-0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Pressure (bar)
Figure 14-26. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage

14.29. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact

Table 14-9. 52 contact and 69 contact
T 69b(Monitored locked)
U Common(52 and 69)
V 52b(Monitored Trip)
69 is b Contact when unlocked. W 52a(Monitored Close)
a 52 common(Auxiliary)
b 52b(Auxiliary)
c 52a(Auxiliary)
14.30. Recloser Trip and Close Coil

Table 14-10. Trip and Close Coil
d Close and Trip Coil Common
e Close and Trip Coil Common
Pin d, e and f are combined as one line. f Close and Trip Coil Common
Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one line g Close Coil
Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one line. h Close Coil
Close Coil Resistance : < 5 j Close Coil
Trip Coil Resistance : < 2 m Trip Coil
p Trip Coil
r Trip Coil

14.31. Recloser Test Kit

RTS 2010 Model tests ETR300-R by Fault Simulation.
RTS 2010 can display Full Sequence of Trip time, Trip current, Interval on LCD screen and also
can variously test Calibration Mode, OCR Mode, External Mode, Manual Mode.
Figure 14-27. Recloser Test Kit
Standard Ratings and Features
Table 14-11. Standard Ratings and Features

Classification Rating and Characteristic
1.5Arms ×3ch (Burden below 1Ω)
Current output 4.5Arms×1ch (3ch Parallel)
Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.1mA)
7Vrms ×4ch (Burden over 1㏀)
Voltage output
Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.002V)
BI01~02: DC12~150V or Dry contact(User select)
Binary input
BI03~04: DC12~150V(Pulse below 1sec)
BO01~04
Binary output
130mA/350V, ON Resistance (below 35 Ω)
Time Accuracy ±5ms
Weight 6kg(RTS2010), 1.2kg(cable), 6kg AL Case
325×150×270 (RTS2010)
Dimensions
521×258×348 (AL CASE)
Control Interface Cable 2M
Operating Temperature -20℃ ~ +50℃
AC180~264 @ Select AC220V
Power input AC 90~132 @ Select AC110V
Max. 150W

15. MAINTANANCE
15.1. Warning Events
ETR300-R possesses self-test and self-diagnostic function. If any abnormal behavior is detected in
the system, it records the corresponding events in the Diagnostic Event or System Event and
transmits it to SCADA system via remote.
“Table 15-1. Warning Events” is the list of self-diagnosis conditions managed by ETR300-R
system processing method and user’s recommended actions.. Users are requested to refer to “Table
15-1. Warning Events” in case of any abnormality in the system.
Table 15-1. Warning Events(1/3)

EVENT TEXT ETR300-R USER’ RECOMMENDED
EVENT EXPLANATION
(LCD) ACTION ACTION
1. Check AC Power NFB
‘AC SUPPLY’ 2. Check AC Power fuse
ACFAIL External power FAIL
LED OFF 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC -
connector is securely connected
Battery charge circuit FAIL
CHGBAD
; CHGLOW or CHGHIGH 1. Check AC supply
Battery charge circuit volt ‘CHARGER’ 2. Check Battery charge Voltage
1) CHGLOW
LOW (Value 25V) LED OFF (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)
Battery charge circuit volt 3. Replace Analog Module
2) CHGHIGH
HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)
SYSTEM POWER Battery BAD
; BATLOW, BATHIG,
NOBAT or 1. Check AC Power NFB
BATBAD
Batt Cap’ Alarm Level 2. Check AC Power fuse
when BATT Manageement 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC
‘BATTERY’
is ENABLED. connector is securely connected
LED OFF
Battery volt LOW 4. Replace Battery charge T.R
1) BATLOW
(15V < Value 21V) 5. Check battery NFB
Battery charge circuit volt 6. Check battery connection
2) BATHIGH
HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)
3) NOBATT NO Battery (Value < 15V)
No problem
POWER DOWN Power down mode Controller
PWDOWN 1. Check AC supply
MODE (Value < 21V and ACFAIL) power turn off
2. Check battery
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
GAS STATUS Gas pressure LOW CLOSE block
GASLOW connected
*. applied only gas (Value 0.1 bar) When ‘Opr’ Block
2. Check Control cable fault
insulation type GPF’ setting is
Gas pressure HIGH 3. Replace Main Processing Module
(EVR) GASHIGH ON
(Value ≥ 1.5V) 4. Replace Recloser.
SYSRST System restarted - No problem

SYSTEM
RESTART
CLDRST Cold Restarted - No problem


EVENT EXPLANATION
(LCD) ACTION ACTION
GLSCHG
SETTING No problem
(Global setting)
(Refer to SET * But somebody modified the setting
and GRSCH1~ Setting Changed -
CHANGE data.
GRSCH6(Group
Event)
setting)
CF Close fail - 1. Check the close/trip module

2. Check the receptacle pin
3.Ensure Control cable is securely
connected
TRF Trip fail - 4.Check SMPS-C module
5.Check close/open magnetic contactor
(MC)
1.Ensure status input connector cable is
Capacitor charger power securely connected
DIGOPOW -
supply error 2. Check SMPS-C module
TRIP
3. Check IN210 stauts
& CLOSE
1.Ensure status input cable is securely
DIGIGBT IGBT error - connected
2. Check IN210 and IN211stauts
connected
DIGCLC Close coil error -
2. Check IN210, IN212, IN213 and
IN214 stauts
DIGTRC Trip coil error - connected
2. Check IN210 and IN213stauts
Detail message are
System error detected 1.Check the diagnostic event
SELFTER recorded in diagnostic
while booting 2.Refer to EVENT TEXT
event
1. Execute System Restart
Restored default setting
DIGGLSET Global setting error 2. Execute default setting
by itself
3. Replace Main Processing Module
1. Execute System Restart
Restored default setting
DIGGRSET Group setting error 2. Execute default setting
by itself
Correct measurement 1. Execute System Restart
DSP moule error or
DIGSPU and protection does not 2. Replace DSP Module
ADC processer error
work 3. Replace Main Processing Module
SELF TEST Correct measurement 1. Execute System Restart
DIGADC A/D conversion error and protection does not 2. Replace DSP Module
work 3. Replace Main Processing Module
1. Execute All Clear Event
Recorded events format
DIGEVT Cleared events by itself 2. Execute System Restart
error
1. Execute All Clear Data
Registered count data
DIGCNT Cleared count by itself 2. Execute System Restart
error
Cleared data(energy,
1. Execute All Clear Data
max. demand, contact
DIGMEM Registered data error 2. Execute System Restart
wear and battery
capacity) by itself


EVENT EXPLANATION
(LCD) ACTION ACTION
1.Ensure IRIG connector connector
DIGGPS IRIG/GPS module error -
cable is securely connected
2. Check IRIG module
DIGGPSLK IRIG/GPS link fail -
3. Check ‘IRIG Use’ setting
Cleared external TD 1.Ensure ETIO10 connector connector
External I/O Unit metering value, external cable is securely connected
DIGEXIO
ETIO10 error input status and external 2. Check ETIO10 module
output status 3. Check ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting
SELF TEST 1.Ensure Wifi connector connector
DIGWIFI Wifi module error -
2. Check Wifi module
DIGWIFILK Wifi link eerror - 3. Check ‘Wifi Use’ setting
4. Check Wifi communication setting
1.Ensure external thermistor connector
DISTHM External thermistor error -
2. Check external thermistor module
3. Check ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ setting

16. PLC function

ETR300-R has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to
control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During
ETR300-R running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet user’s need.
PLC is programmed in “ETIMS Interface Software”.
Figure 16-1. PLC Edit Window (Example)

17. Function of File Transfer Protocol

Without connecting ETIMS interface software, ETR300-R is possible to patch upgrade firmware
and to change ETR300-R settings and CSV(Comma Separated Value) format files through
FTP(File Transfer Protocol). Also it supports to download COMFEDE(COMmon Format for Event
Data Exchange) and COMTRADE(COMmon Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files on
operator PC. For this function is used, it is essential to use TLS(Transport Layer Security) that
universial FTP utility is installed on PC. By recommendation of universial FTP utility, there are
FileZilla, WinSCP.
17.1. Patching firmware to upgrade

Process of firmware patch is as follows;
1) Connect between PC and ETR300-R
Connect between PC and ETR300-R using Ethernet cable. The Ethernet cable should be wired at
ethernet port(EN1 or EN2) for Ethernet on side panel of ETR300-R.
2) Access ETR300-R through FTP utility
After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETR300-R required to patch firmware and No. 21 for
the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. IP address of ETR300-R refers to setting values
on “GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / PORT4/ IP Addr Oct1~ 4”.
Password refers to ‘Admin PW’ setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTP-
SSL / Admin PW”. Access “/home/entec_system/PACKAGE” on the FTP utility.
3) Firmware Upgrade through ETIMS Interface Software
Upload a file named ‘UPDATE.fw’ on directory. DOES NOT REVISE the file name. If the file
name does not correspond, patching firmware is not supported. After completed to upload the file
on the directory, patching firmware starts automatically. Changed firmware version is checked on
device or through interface ETIMS interface software after patch process is sucessfully finished.
For reference this function supports on ETIMS interface software, too.

17.2. Import/Export CSV files

Process to import and export CSV file is as follows;
17.2.1. Access ETR300-R to import and export CSV files

After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETR300-R required to patch firmware and No. 21
for the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. Password refers to ‘Admin PW’ setting on
“GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTP-SSL / Admin PW”. Access
“/home/entec_system/CSV” on the FTP utility.
17.2.2. Export CSV files

It is possible to export CSV file that global and group settings, PLC(Programmable Logic Control)
configuration and communication map configuration applied on ETR300-R. A file named
‘eSetting.csv’ is related to global and group settings another file named ‘ePLC.csv’ is related to
PLC information and the other file named ‘eDBMap.csv’ is related to communication map
configuration. When setting is revised and device restarts, export function operates automatically.
17.2.3. Import CSV files

It is possible to import CSV file for passcord related on passcord 1, global and group settings,
PLC(Programmable Logic Control) configuration and communication map configuration applied
on ETR300-R. To revise importing CSV file, edit CSV file on Excel or text editor. Refer to CSV
description for searching items wanted to change. Name of CSV file must be ‘iPassword.csv’ for
passcord 1, iSetting.csv for global and group setting, iPLC.csv for PLC and iDBMap.csv
communication map configuration which will be applied on ETR300-R. And then, upload the file
on directory “/home/entec_system/CSV”.
 CSV format of password  Example of CSV format for password

G,current passcord, new passcord G,0000,1234
ENTEC (END Tag) ENTEC
NOTE
Refer to ‘iResult.log’ file which is a generated error history of ETR300-R’. After it is
completed to import CSV files, the files will be removed. If any error generates, prefix
"Done_" adds name of the file generated error. Except on items generated error, import
function can continues to process. If error is generated, the error is logged on ‘iResult.log’
caused that any value gets out of a range and cannot be set.

17.3. COMFEDE
ETR300-R can download COMFEDE(Common Format for Event Data Exchange) format files
related on EVENT. After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETR300-R required to patch
firmware and No. 21 for the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. Password refers to
‘User1 PW’ setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTP-SSL / User1 PW”.
Access “/home/ entec_user/COMFEDE” on the FTP utility.
Saved event information contains as follows; Fault indicator, Operation, System, Diagnostic,
Setting changed, Load & Energy (Load profile). Initial one hundred logs of each type of ETR300-R
events. Initial fifty event logs of each type of Load & Energy events. Generated more than one
hundred event logs, the events are saved on flash memory or micro SD card.
In case that micro SD card is inserted, micro SD card stores every 1000 events separately. Using
date and time when every 1000th event is generated, name of file is created, for example,
FI_20171010_235043.xml. So the events can be separated using the name of xml format files.
However, storing event logs is limited according to storage capacity of micro SD Card inserted. If
there is no storage capacity of SD Card, it will be removed in old order. Note that formatting
FAT32 is required for micro SD card which allocation unit is 32KB. If micro SD card is not
inserted, events saved on flash drive be possible to store 1000 events., Per type of events, two files
grouped each 1000 events(up to 2000 events) can be managed. And the files can be distinguished
using the file names. For example, names of xml files are ‘FI_EVENT.xml’ saved recently and
‘OLD_FI_EVENT.xml’ saved in the past.

17.4. COMTRADE
ETR-300R supports COMTRADE(Common Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files of
fault waveforms recorded on fault event log. After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of
ETR300-R required to patch firmware and No.21 for the number of ports on TLS settings of FTP
utility. Password refers to 'User 1 PW' setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION /
FTP-SSL / User1 PW”. Access “/home/ entec_user/COMTRADE” on the FTP utility.
17.4.1. File format and Name

ETR300-R generates binary type COMTRADE files, only. Example of generated COMTRADE
file name are 'W2C_##.CFG' and 'W2C_##.DAT'’ Here, ## is the order in which they are
generated.
17.4.2. Releated Setting Items

COMFEDE file relates following settings;
Table 17-1. Setting Items

Menu Location Description
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> COMTRADE file is generated or not (ON/OFF)
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Record
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> Select COMTRADE standard's revision version which
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rev. be applied (1999/2013)
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> Select Analog channel wanted to generate
nd
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE P/S COMTRADE file (Primary :1st, Secondary: 2 )
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> Enter the rate of COMTRADE waveform wanted to
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rate generate(1~10:1)

18. Wireless Connection

ETR300-R and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly.
Wireless connectivity is as an option.
Table 18-1. Wireless Network Protocol Option

Wireless Network Protocol Supported 802.11 b/g/n
Wireless Network Frequency Range Supported 2.4Ghz
18.1. Connection using WIFI (PC)

It is possible to connect ETR300R wirelessly using ETIMS interface software. The connection
method is same as that of connecting to AP (Access Point). In order to establish a successful
connection, check the following setting items in advance.

Item Menu Location
WIFI Use GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION/
SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/
P/W GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/
Hidden SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/
Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.

18.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS

ETR300-R can be connected using Smart ETIMS interface software on the mobile phone. Smart
ETIMS interface software may not be installed depending on the type and version of Mobile OS.
Therefore, it is recommended to check the available Mobile OS and version before installation.
Table 18-3. Supported Mobile OS and Version

Mobile OS Support
Android O : Jelly Bean (4.1) ~ Oreo (8.0)
iOS X
In order to establish a successful connection, check the following setting items in advance.

Item Menu Location
WIFI Use GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION/
SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/
P/W GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/
Hidden SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/
Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.

18.3. Security
Wireless connection between ETR300-R and ETIMS interface software may be insecure.
Therefore, ETR300-R uses SSL / TLS and AES to enhance the security.
18.3.1. SSL / TLS

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) / TLS Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a protocol that ensures the
network security and integrity of the data transmitted and received. Using this protocol, ETR300R
and ETIMS interface software establish a secure channel for secure communication.
To use SSL / TLS, ETR300R and PC ETIMS interface software must have the same certification
and private key.
The current version is TLS v1.2.
18.3.2. AES
Mobile ETIMS encrypts the packets transmitted to ETR300-R using Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) encryption.
Only the control commands that change the settings of the ETR300-R are encrypted, other
commands are not encrypted.
Table 18-5. AES Commands

Command Type Encryption Support
Control Command O
Inquire (Check) and Other
X
Commands

02 ETR300-R-600 Manual Control

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

02 ETR300-R-600 Manual Control

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Release Date: Sep. 2019 / Manual Revision:1.

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

[Dec. 2017] Ver1.00

[Apr. 2018] Ver1.01

[May. 2018] Ver1.02

[Oct. 2018] Ver1.10

[Nov. 2018] Ver1.11

[Jan. 2019] Ver1.12

[Apr. 2019] Ver1.13

[Sep. 2019] Ver1.14

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 7

6. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 49

6.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 50

7. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 75

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

7.2.1. Protocol Setup ...................................................................................................... 148

8. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 204

8.2.3. Auto Setction ........................................................................................................ 341

9. EVENT RECORDER.................................................................................................. 371

10. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 390

10.5. Controller Information .................................................................................................. 402

11. TIME........................................................................................................................... 404

13. METERING ............................................................................................................... 412

14. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 423

14.9. VD Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................................... 431

15. MAINTANANCE....................................................................................................... 450

16. PLC function .............................................................................................................. 453

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii

17.4.2. Releated Setting Items ........................................................................................ 457

18. Wireless Connection .................................................................................................. 458

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY viii

1.2. Summary of Features

FAULT INDICATION (SECTIONALIZER MODE)

NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.

NOTE : According to stting, all events can support COMFEDE format.

 Positive and Negative Energy : Active Eenergy(kWh), Reactive Energy(kVarh)

CONTROL VOLTAGE INPUT

USER AVAILABLE DC POWER OUTPUT - Option

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Standard

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Option

CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS (CT)

CONTROL INPUTS - Option

CONTROL OUTPUT CONTACTS - Option

Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts

2.2. Type Withstand Tests

 Seismic : IEC 60255-21-3 : 1993

2.3. Metering Accuracy

HARMONIC METERING : ±5%

2.4. Recloser Mode Funtions

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Overcurrent Protection (+/-)

Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Sensitive Earth Fault Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Inst’ Overcurrent Lockout Protection(+/-)

Cold Load Pickup

2nd and 5th Harmonic Blocking

Phase Directional Control

Ground/Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control

Negative Directional Control

Broken Conduct Protection

Over Voltage 1,2

 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Phase, Ground, Negative Sequence Demand Protection